Owner`s Manual

Owner`s Manual
>> Owner's Manual
smart fortwo
Symbols
In this Owner's Manual, you will find the
following symbols:
G WARNING
Warning notes make you aware of dangers
which could pose a threat to your health or
life, or to the health and life of others.
H Environmental note
Environmental notes provide you with
information on environmentally aware
actions or disposal.
! Notes on material damage alert you to
dangers that could lead to damage to your
vehicle.
i These symbols indicate useful instructions or further information that could
be helpful to you.
X
This symbol designates an instruction you must follow.
X
Several consecutive symbols indicate an instruction with several
steps.
(Y
This symbol tells you where you can
page) find further information on a
topic.
YY
This symbol indicates a warning or
an instruction that is continued on
the next page.
Dis‐ This text indicates a message on
play the multifunction display.
Let the fun begin!
Before you first drive off, read this Owner's Manual carefully and familiarise
yourself with your vehicle. For your own
safety and a longer vehicle life, follow the
instructions and warning notices in this
manual. Disregarding them may lead to
damage to the vehicle or personal injury.
This Owner's Manual provides information
on the most important functions of your
vehicle.
The equipment or model designation of
your vehicle may vary according to:
Rmodel
Rorder
Rcountry
variant
Ravailability
The illustrations in this manual show a
left-hand-drive vehicle. On right-handdrive vehicles, the layout of components
and controls differs accordingly.
smart is constantly updating its vehicles
to the state of the art.
smart therefore reserves the right to
introduce changes in the following areas:
Rdesign
Requipment
Rtechnical features
The equipment in your vehicle may therefore differ from that shown in the descriptions and illustrations.
The following are integral components of
the vehicle:
ROwner's
Manual
Booklet
REquipment-dependent supplements
Keep printed copies of the documents in
the vehicle at all times. If you sell the
vehicle, always pass the documents on to
the new owner.
The technical documentation team at
Daimler AG wishes you safe and pleasant
motoring.
RService
4535847902 É4535847902ÄËÍ
Contents
Index ............................................ 4
At a glance ................................... 25
Introduction ................................. 18
Safety .......................................... 37
Opening and closing ....................... 63
Seats, steering wheel and mirrors ...... 77
Lights and windscreen wipers ........... 85
Climate control ............................ 101
Driving and parking ...................... 113
On-board computer and displays ....... 147
Stowing and features ...................... 197
Maintenance and care .................... 205
Breakdown assistance .................... 219
Wheels and tyres ........................... 239
Technical data ............................. 257
3
4
Index
1, 2, 3 ...
12 V socket
see Sockets
A
ABS (Anti-lock Braking System)
Display message ....................... 170
Function/notes ......................... 59
Important safety notes ................ 59
Warning lamp ........................... 187
Activating/deactivating airrecirculation mode ........................ 111
Activating/deactivating cooling
with air dehumidification .............. 106
Additives (engine oil) ................... 263
Adjusting the headlamp range ........... 88
Air conditioning
General notes .......................... 102
Air pressure
see Tyre pressure
Air vents
Important safety notes ............... 111
Setting ................................... 111
Setting the centre air vents ........ 112
Setting the side air vents .......... 112
Air vents
see Air vents
Air-conditioning system
see Climate control
Airbag
Enabling and disabling the
passenger airbag* ..................... 50
Head/thorax airbag .................... 45
Introduction ............................ 43
PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator
lamps ...................................... 39
Warning lamp .......................... 185
Airbags
Front airbag (driver, front
passenger) ............................... 44
Important safety guidelines ........ 43
Kneebag .................................. 44
Triggering .............................. 45
Alarm
Anti-theft alarm system .............. 58
Priming/deactivating function .... 58
Switching off ........................... 59
Ambient lighting
Setting the brightness .............. 160
Switching on/off ...................... 160
Animals
see Pets in the vehicle
Anti-lock Braking System
see ABS (Anti-lock Braking System)
Anti-skid chains
see Snow chains
Anti-theft alarm system
Function .................................. 58
Priming/deactivating ................ 58
Switching off the alarm .............. 59
Aquaplaning ................................ 138
Ashtray ....................................... 203
Assistance system
see Driving systems
Authorised workshop
see Qualified specialist workshop
Automatic engine Start/Stop function
Display message ....................... 180
Automatic engine switch-off (automatic start/stop system) ................. 118
Automatic headlamp mode ................ 87
Automatic Start/Stop function
Indicator lamp (green) .............. 195
Warning and indicator lamps
(yellow) .................................. 195
Automatic start/stop system
Activating/deactivating ............ 119
Automatic engine switchoff ......................................... 118
General information .................. 117
Introduction ............................ 117
Automatic transmission
Accelerator pedal position ........ 124
Changing gear ......................... 124
Display message (colour display) ...................................... 181
Display message (monochrome
display) ................................. 163
Drive program display .............. 123
Drive programs ........................ 125
Driving tips ........................... 124
Emergency running mode ............ 129
Gearshift paddles ..................... 127
Index
Kickdown ................................
Malfunction (on-board computer
with colour display) ..................
Malfunction (on-board computer
with monochrome display) ..........
Manual shifting .......................
Manually releasing the selector
lever lock ...............................
Overview ................................
Problem (fault) ........................
Program selector button ............
Pulling away ............................
Selector lever .........................
Starting the engine ...................
Transmission position display ...
Transmission positions .............
Automatic transmission emergency
running mode ...............................
125
181
163
125
129
122
129
125
116
123
116
123
124
129
B
Battery (key)
Important safety notes ................ 65
Replacing ................................ 65
Battery (vehicle)
Charging ................................ 227
Display message ....................... 173
Important safety notes .............. 225
Jump starting .......................... 228
Warning and indicator lamps ...... 190
Belt
see Seat belts
Belt tensioner
Activation ............................... 45
Blower
see Climate control
Bonnet (front)
see Service cover
Boot
Installing the cover ................. 200
Installing/removing the cover .... 201
see Tailgate
Brake
EBD ........................................ 62
Brake fluid
Display message ....................... 169
Notes ..................................... 264
Brake force distribution
see EBD (electronic brake force
distribution)
Brake lamps
Changing bulbs ......................... 94
Display message (colour display) ..................................... 180
Brake lights
Display message (monochrome
display) ................................. 162
Brakes
ABS ......................................... 59
Brake fluid (notes) ................... 264
Driving tips ............................ 136
Important safety notes ............... 136
Parking brake .......................... 133
Warning lamp .......................... 185
Breakdown
see Flat tyre
see Towing away/tow-starting
Bulbs
see Replacing bulbs
C
Calling up a fault
see Display messages
Capacities (technical data) ............
Car
see Vehicle
Car key
see Key
Car wash
see Care
Car wash (care) .............................
Care
Automatic car wash ...................
Carpets ..................................
Display ..................................
Exhaust pipe ...........................
Exterior lighting .....................
Gear or selector lever ...............
General notes ..........................
High-pressure cleaner ..............
Interior .................................
Paint .....................................
Panorama roof .........................
Plastic trim ............................
260
212
212
217
216
216
215
217
212
213
216
213
214
216
5
6
Index
Reversing camera ..................... 215
Roof lining ............................. 217
Seat belt ................................ 217
Seat cover ............................... 217
Sensors .................................. 215
Steering wheel ......................... 217
Washing by hand ....................... 213
Wheels ................................... 214
Windows ................................. 214
Wiper blades ........................... 215
Central locking
Locking/unlocking (key) ............. 65
Centre console .............................. 33
Changing bulbs
Brake lamps ............................. 94
Dipped-beam headlamps ............. 93
Front foglamp ........................... 93
Main-beam headlamps ................ 93
Rear foglamp ............................ 94
Reversing lamps ........................ 94
Tail lamps ............................... 94
Turn signals (front) ................... 92
Turn signals (rear) .................... 94
Child seat
Forward-facing restraint system ......................................... 52
ISOFIX .................................... 48
On the front-passenger seat ......... 51
Rearward-facing restraint system ......................................... 52
Recommendations ...................... 56
Suitable positions .................... 53
Top Tether ............................... 49
Children
Restraint systems ...................... 47
Cigarette lighter ......................... 203
Cleaning
see Care
Climate control
Air conditioning ..................... 103
Automatic air conditioning ........ 105
Controlling automatically .......... 107
Cooling with air dehumidification ....................................... 106
Demisting the windows .............. 109
Demisting the windscreen .......... 108
Heating .................................. 103
Notes on using the air-conditioning system ......................... 103
Notes on using the automatic
climate control ........................ 105
Overview of systems .................. 102
Problem with the rear window
heating .................................. 111
Setting the air distribution ....... 107
Setting the air vents ................. 111
Setting the airflow ................... 108
Setting the temperature ............. 107
Switching air-recirculation
mode on/off ............................. 111
Switching on/off ...................... 105
Switching the rear window heating on/off ............................... 109
Clock
Setting (dashboard clock) .......... 150
Cockpit
Overview ................................. 26
Constant headlamp mode
see Daytime driving lights
Consumption statistics (colour
display) ...................................... 154
Controlling speed
see Cruise control
Coolant
Battery .................................. 210
Checking the level .................... 210
Drive system ........................... 210
General notes .......................... 264
Important safety notes ............... 210
Setting the temperature unit ...... 160
Temperature gauge ................... 156
Topping up ............................. 210
Warning lamp ........................... 191
Coolant (engine)
Display message ....................... 175
Cooling
see Climate control
Copyright ..................................... 23
Cover (front)
see Service cover
Crosswind Assist ............................ 62
Cruise control
Activating .............................. 139
Buttons .................................. 139
Calling up the speed last stored .. 140
Index
Cancelling cruise control ..........
Deactivating ...........................
Display message (colour display) ......................................
Display message (monochrome
display) .................................
Driving systems .......................
Function/notes ........................
General notes ..........................
Important safety notes ...............
Increasing/decreasing the
speed ....................................
Storing and maintaining current speed ..............................
Cup holder
Centre console ........................
Important safety notes ..............
Rear centre console ..................
Cup holder
see Cup holder
140
140
177
166
139
139
139
139
140
139
202
202
203
D
Dashboard
Additional instruments ............. 150
Dashboard
see Cockpit
Dashboard clock ........................... 150
Data
see Technical data
Daytime driving lights
Function/notes .......................... 87
Dealership
see Qualified specialist workshop
Declarations of conformity .............. 20
Diagnostics connection ................... 20
Digital speedometer
Display .................................. 148
Setting the display ................... 159
Dipped-beam headlamps
Changing bulbs ......................... 93
Setting for driving abroad
(symmetrical) ........................... 86
Switching on/off ....................... 88
Display
Colour ................................... 153
Menu (on-board computer with
colour display) ........................ 158
Monochrome ............................. 151
Display (cleaning instructions) ....... 216
Display message
Calling up (message memory) ...... 156
Colour display ......................... 167
Driving systems ....................... 176
General notes (on-board computer with colour display) .......... 167
General notes (on-board computer with monochrome display) .. 162
Monochrome display .................. 162
Setting the language ................. 160
Display messages
Engine ................................... 173
Hiding ................................... 167
Lights .................................... 180
Safety systems ......................... 168
Service display ........................ 211
Tyres ..................................... 178
Vehicle .................................. 180
Distance recorder
Monochrome display .................. 152
Distance recorder
see Trip meter
Distance warning function
Function/notes ......................... 60
Warning lamp (red) ................... 189
Warning lamp (yellow) ............... 188
Door
Automatic locking (switch) .......... 69
Central locking/unlocking (key) ... 65
Control panel ........................... 35
Display message ....................... 180
Emergency locking ..................... 70
Emergency unlocking .................. 70
Important safety notes ................ 68
Opening (from the inside) ........... 68
Warning lamp .......................... 194
Drive program
Display .................................. 123
Drive programs
Automatic transmission ............. 125
Driver's door
see Door
Driver's seat
see Seats
Driving abroad
smart service .......................... 212
7
8
Index
Symmetrical dipped beam ............ 86
Driving on flooded roads ................ 138
Driving safety system
EBD (electronic brake force
distribution) ........................... 62
Driving safety systems
ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) .... 59
Distance warning function .......... 60
ESP® (Electronic Stability Program) ...................................... 61
ETS (Electronic Traction System) ........................................ 61
Important safety guidelines ........ 59
Overview ................................. 59
Driving system
Parking aid ............................ 142
Speed limiter .......................... 141
Driving systems
Cruise control ......................... 139
Display message ....................... 176
Lane Keeping Assist ................. 145
Reversing camera ..................... 143
Driving tips
Aquaplaning ............................ 138
Automatic transmission ............. 124
Brakes ................................... 136
Downhill gradient .................... 136
Driving abroad ......................... 86
Driving in winter ..................... 138
Driving on flooded roads ........... 138
Driving on wet roads ................. 138
Fuel ...................................... 134
General .................................. 134
Icy road surfaces ...................... 138
Limited braking efficiency on
salted roads ............................ 137
New brake pads/linings ............. 137
Running-in tips ....................... 114
Snow chains ............................ 243
Subjecting brakes to a load ........ 137
Symmetrical dipped beam ............ 86
Wet road surface ....................... 137
E
EBD (electronic brake force distribution)
Display message ....................... 169
Function/notes ......................... 62
Indicator lamp ........................ 186
eco score
Display (on-board computer
with colour display) ................. 155
Display (on-board computer
with monochrome display) .......... 151
Function/notes ........................ 134
Electrical fuses
see Fuses
Electromagnetic compatibility
Declaration of conformity ........... 20
Electronic Brake-force Distribution
see EBD (electronic brake force
distribution)
Electronic Traction System
see ETS (Electronic Traction System)
Emergency release
Driver's door ............................ 70
Emergency unlocking
Vehicle ................................... 70
Engine
Automatic start/stop system ........ 117
Display message ....................... 173
Engine number ......................... 260
Jump-starting ......................... 228
Running irregularly ................. 120
Starting problems .................... 120
Starting the engine with the key .. 116
Stopping ................................ 133
Tow-starting (vehicle) .............. 232
Warning lamp (engine diagnostics) ...................................... 190
Engine compartment cover .............. 206
Engine electronics
Notes ..................................... 258
Problem (fault) ........................ 120
Engine oil
Additives ............................... 263
Checking the oil level ............... 207
Display message ....................... 174
Filling capacity ...................... 263
Notes about oil grades .............. 263
Notes on oil level/consumption ... 206
Topping up ............................. 207
Viscosity ............................... 264
Warning lamp ........................... 191
Index
Engine oil additives
see Additives (engine oil)
Environmental protection
Returning an end-of-life vehicle ......................................... 18
ESP® (Electronic Stability Program)
Characteristics ........................ 62
Crosswind Assist ....................... 62
Display message ....................... 171
ETS ......................................... 61
Function/notes .......................... 61
General notes ............................ 61
Important safety guidelines ........ 61
Warning and indicator lamps ...... 187
ETS (Electronic Traction System) ....... 61
Exhaust pipe (cleaning instructions) ......................................... 216
Exterior lighting
Cleaning ................................ 215
Settings options ........................ 87
Exterior mirrors
Adjusting (electrically) ............. 84
Adjusting (manually) .................. 84
Out of position (troubleshooting) ........................................ 84
F
Fault message
see Display messages
Filler cap
see Fuel filler flap
Fire extinguisher .........................
First-aid kit ...............................
Fitting a wheel
Fitting a wheel ........................
Lowering the vehicle ................
Preparing the vehicle ...............
Raising the vehicle ..................
Removing a wheel .....................
Securing the vehicle against
rolling away ...........................
Flat tyre
Preparing the vehicle ...............
TIREFIT kit .............................
Floormat .....................................
Foglamps
Switching on/off .......................
221
220
251
251
248
249
250
248
221
222
204
88
Frequencies
Mobile phone .......................... 258
Two-way radio ......................... 258
Front cover
see Service cover
Front foglamps
Changing bulbs ......................... 93
Frontal area cover
see Service cover
Fuel
Additives ............................... 262
Consumption information .......... 262
Consumption statistics ............. 154
Displaying the current consumption (colour display) .......... 156
Displaying the current consumption (monochrome display) ... 151
Driving tips ........................... 134
E10 ........................................ 261
Fuel gauge .............................. 149
Grade (petrol) ......................... 261
Important safety notes ............... 261
Problem (malfunction) ............... 132
Refuelling .............................. 130
Tank content/reserve fuel .......... 261
Fuel consumption
Displaying (on-board computer
with monochrome display) .......... 152
Resetting data (on-board computer with monochrome display) .. 152
Fuel filler flap
Opening ................................. 131
Fuel level
Gauge .................................... 149
Fuel reserve
see Fuel
Fuel tank
Capacity ................................. 261
Problem (malfunction) ............... 132
Fuses
Allocation .............................. 235
Before changing ...................... 233
Dashboard fuse box ................... 234
Fuse box in the front area .......... 233
Important safety notes .............. 233
9
10
Index
G
Gear or selector lever (cleaning
instructions) ............................... 217
Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts ........... 18
Glove compartment ........................ 199
H
Handbrake
see Parking brake
Hands-free system
see Mobile phone
Hazard warning lamps .....................
Head/thorax airbag ........................
Headlamp flasher ...........................
Headlamps
Misting up ...............................
see Automatic headlamp mode
Heating
see Climate control
High-pressure cleaners .................
Hill start assist ............................
90
45
89
90
213
117
I
Ice warning
Display message (colour display) ......................................
Display message (monochrome
display) .................................
Warning lamp (colour display) ....
Warning lamp (monochrome display) .....................................
Ignition key
see Key
Ignition lock
see Key positions
Immobiliser .................................
Indicator and warning lamp
Restraint system ......................
Indicator and warning lamps
Coolant ..................................
Engine diagnostics ...................
Indicator lamps
see Warning and indicator lamps
Instrument cluster
Overview (colour display) ...........
Overview (monochrome display) ....
Warning and indicator lamps
(colour display) ........................
Warning and indicator lamps
(monochrome display) .................
Instrument cluster lighting
Notes .....................................
Setting ..................................
Instrument lighting
see Instrument cluster lighting
Interior lighting ...........................
Automatic control system ............
Changing bulbs .........................
Overview .................................
Setting the ambient lighting ......
Intermittent wipe ..........................
ISOFIX child seat securing system .....
30
28
148
158
90
90
95
90
160
96
48
J
Jack
Using .................................... 249
Jump start (engine)
see Jump starting (engine)
Jump starting (engine) ................... 228
K
173
167
149
149
58
185
191
190
29
27
Key
Changing the battery .................. 65
Door central locking/unlocking .... 65
Important safety notes ................ 64
Loss ........................................ 67
Positions (ignition lock) ........... 115
Problem (malfunction) ................ 67
Starting the engine ................... 116
Key positions (ignition lock) .......... 115
Kickdown
Driving tips ............................ 125
Manual gearshifting ................. 128
Kneebag ....................................... 44
L
Lamps
see Warning and indicator lamps
Lane Keeping Assist
Activating/deactivating ............ 146
Function/information ............... 145
Warning lamp (colour display) ..... 176
Index
Warning lamp (monochrome display) ...................................... 165
Lane recognition system (automatic)
see Lane Keeping Assist
Language (on-board computer) ......... 160
Licence plate lighting
Changing ................................. 94
Light sensor (display message) ........ 183
Lighting
see Lights
Lights
Automatic headlamp mode ............ 87
Dipped-beam headlamps ............. 88
Display message ....................... 180
Driving abroad ......................... 86
Foglamps ................................. 88
Hazard warning lamps ................. 90
Headlamp flasher ....................... 89
Headlamp range ......................... 88
Light switch ............................. 87
Main-beam headlamps ................ 89
Rear foglamp ............................ 88
Setting the ambient lighting ...... 160
Side lamps ............................... 88
Turn signals ............................. 89
see Interior lighting
see Replacing bulbs
Limiter
Buttons ................................... 141
Calling up the last speed stored .. 142
Cancelling .............................. 142
Deactivating ........................... 142
Display message (colour display) ...................................... 176
Display message (monochrome
display) ................................. 165
Exceeding the stored speed ........ 142
General notes .......................... 141
Increasing/decreasing the
speed ..................................... 142
Storing the speed ..................... 141
Limiting the speed
see Speed limiter
Loading guidelines ....................... 198
Locking
see Central locking
Locking (doors)
Automatic ................................ 69
Emergency locking ..................... 70
From inside (central locking
button) .................................... 69
Locking centrally
see Central locking
Loudspeaker
see Subwoofer
Lubricant additives
see Additives (engine oil)
M
M+S tyres (winter tyres) ................. 242
Main-beam headlamps
Changing bulbs ......................... 93
Switching on/off ....................... 89
Manual transmission
Display message (colour display) ...................................... 181
Display message (monochrome
display) ................................. 162
Engaging reverse gear ............... 122
Gear lever ............................... 121
Malfunction (on-board computer
with colour display) ................. 183
Malfunction (on-board computer
with monochrome display) .......... 164
Pulling away ............................ 116
Shift recommendation ............... 122
Shifting to neutral ................... 121
Starting the engine ................... 116
Manually releasing the selector
lever lock (automatic transmission) . 129
Message memory (colour display) ...... 156
Messages
see Display messages
Mirrors
see Exterior mirrors
see Rear-view mirror
Mobile phone
Frequencies ............................ 258
Installation ............................ 258
Transmission output (maximum) .. 258
Model series
see Vehicle identification plate
11
12
Index
Multi-functional seat
see Seats
Multifunction steering wheel
Overview .................................. 31
N
Notes on running in a new vehicle .... 114
O
Occupant safety
Children in the vehicle .............. 46
Important safety notes ................ 38
Pets in the vehicle .................... 58
Oil
see Engine oil
On-board computer
Display submenu ...................... 158
Displaying a service message ..... 211
Important safety notes ............... 148
Menu overview (colour display) ... 154
Menu overview (monochrome
display) ................................. 152
Message memory ....................... 156
Operating (colour display) ......... 153
Operating (monochrome display) . 150
Selecting the language .............. 160
Service menu ........................... 156
Settings menu .......................... 157
On-board computer*
Messages menu ......................... 156
On-board diagnostics interface
see Diagnostics connection
Operating instructions
Vehicle equipment ..................... 19
Operating safety
Declaration of conformity ........... 20
Important safety note ................. 19
Operating system
see On-board computer
Outside temperature display
Ice warning (colour display) ....... 149
Ice warning (monochrome display) ..................................... 149
Notes ..................................... 149
Setting the units ...................... 160
Overhead control panel ................... 34
Overrevving range ......................... 150
P
Paint code ................................... 259
Paintwork (cleaning instructions) .... 213
Panorama roof
Cleaning ................................ 214
Panoramic roof
Operating the roller sunblind ...... 75
Park brake
see Parking brake
Parking ...................................... 132
Important safety notes ............... 132
Parking brake .......................... 133
Reversing camera ..................... 143
Switching off the engine ............ 133
Parking brake
Display message ....................... 168
Notes/function ........................ 133
Warning lamp .......................... 185
PASSENGER AIR BAG
Disabling/activating ................. 50
Indicator lamps ........................ 39
Passenger airbag
Enabling and disabling* ............. 50
Problem (malfunction)* ............... 53
Passenger seat
Folding down ............................ 80
Petrol ......................................... 261
Pets in the vehicle ......................... 58
Plastic trim (cleaning instructions) ......................................... 216
Power windows
see Side windows
Program selector button ................. 125
Protection against theft
Anti-theft alarm system .............. 58
Immobiliser ............................. 58
Protection of the environment
General notes ............................ 18
Pulling away
Automatic transmission ............. 116
General notes .......................... 116
Manual transmission ................. 116
Q
QR code
Rescue card .............................. 22
Index
Qualified specialist workshop .......... 21
R
Radio-based vehicle components
Declaration of conformity ........... 20
Rain/light sensor (display message) . 183
Rear foglamp
Changing bulbs ......................... 94
Switching on/off ....................... 88
Rear lamps
Changing bulbs ......................... 94
Rear parking aid
Activating/deactivating ............ 143
Function/notes ........................ 142
Rear window heating
Problem (fault) ......................... 111
Switching on/off ...................... 109
Rear window wiper
Replacing the wiper blade ........... 97
Switching on/off ....................... 96
Rear-view mirror
Dipping (manual) ....................... 84
Recycling
see Protection of the environment
Refuelling
Fuel gauge .............................. 149
Important safety notes ............... 130
Refuelling process ................... 130
see Fuel
Replacing bulbs
Important safety notes ................ 91
Overview of bulb types ................ 91
Removing/replacing the cover
(front wheel arch) ...................... 92
Replacing the bulb
Interior lighting ...................... 95
Turn signals ............................. 93
Rescue card .................................. 22
Reserve (fuel tank)
see Fuel
Reserve fuel
Display message ....................... 175
Restraint system
Display message ....................... 168
Introduction ............................ 38
Warning lamp .......................... 185
Warning lamp (function) .............. 38
Rev counter ................................. 150
Reverse gear
Engaging (manual transmission) .. 122
Reversing camera
Cleaning instructions ............... 215
Function/notes ........................ 143
Switching on/off ...................... 144
Reversing feature
Side windows ............................ 72
Reversing lamp
Changing bulbs ......................... 94
Roller sunblind of the panorama
roof
Operating ................................ 75
Roof
see Panoramic roof
Roof lining and carpets (cleaning
instructions) ............................... 217
S
Safety
Child restraint systems .............. 47
Children in the vehicle .............. 46
see Operating safety
Safety system
see Driving safety systems
Seat
Folding passenger seat down ........ 80
Seat belt
Correct usage ........................... 41
Seat belts
Cleaning ................................ 217
Fastening ................................ 42
Important safety guidelines ........ 40
Introduction ............................ 40
Releasing ................................ 42
Warning lamp .......................... 184
Warning lamp (function) .............. 42
Seats
Adjusting (manually) .................. 80
Cleaning the cover .................... 217
Correct driver's seat position ...... 78
Important safety notes ................ 79
Seat heating problem ................. 83
Switching seat heating on/off ...... 81
Sensors (cleaning instructions) ....... 215
13
14
Index
Service Centre
see Qualified specialist workshop
Service cover .............................. 208
Service display
Calling up (on-board computer
with colour display) ................. 156
Calling up (on-board computer
with monochrome display) .......... 152
Hiding a service message ........... 211
Notes ..................................... 211
Resetting ................................ 211
Service message ....................... 211
Showing a service message ......... 211
Special service requirements ..... 212
Service products
Brake fluid ............................. 264
Coolant (engine) ...................... 264
Engine oil .............................. 263
Fuel ...................................... 261
Important safety notes .............. 260
Washer fluid ........................... 265
Setting a speed
see Cruise control
Setting the air distribution ........... 107
Setting the airflow ....................... 108
Shifting to neutral (manual transmission) ..................................... 121
Side lamps
Switching on/off ....................... 88
Side windows
Important safety notes ................ 72
Opening/closing ....................... 73
Problem (malfunction) ................ 75
Resetting ................................. 73
smart Centre
see Qualified specialist workshop
Snow chains ................................. 243
Sockets
Centre console ........................ 204
General notes .......................... 204
Speakers
see Subwoofer
Specialist workshop ....................... 21
Speed limiter
Activating .............................. 141
Important safety notes ............... 141
Setting limit speed .................. 141
Speedometer
Digital .................................. 148
In the Instrument cluster ........... 148
see Instrument cluster
SRS (Supplemental Restraint System)
see Restraint system
Start/stop function
see Automatic start/stop system
Starting (engine) .......................... 115
Starting the engine
see Starting (engine)
Steering
Display message (colour display) ..................................... 180
Warning lamps ......................... 194
Steering wheel
Adjusting (manually) .................. 83
Button overview ......................... 31
Cleaning ................................ 217
Gearshift paddles ..................... 127
Important safety notes ................ 83
Stowage areas ............................... 198
Stowage compartment
Door stowage compartment .......... 199
Stowage compartment in the
tailgate ................................. 199
Stowage compartment in the tailgate ........................................... 199
Stowage compartments
Centre console ......................... 199
Cup holder .............................. 202
Glove compartment ................... 199
Important safety information ...... 198
Submenu
Ambient lighting ..................... 160
Subwoofer
Fitting/removing ..................... 201
Summer tyres
In winter ................................ 242
Sun visor .................................... 203
T
Tailgate
Important safety notes ................ 71
Opening dimensions ................. 265
Opening/closing ........................ 71
Index
Warning lamp .......................... 194
Tank
see Fuel tank
Technical data
Capacities ............................. 260
Information ............................ 258
Tyres/wheels ........................... 252
Vehicle data ........................... 265
Temperature
Coolant .................................. 156
Outside temperature ................. 149
Setting (climate control) ........... 107
Setting the display units ........... 160
Time
Setting (on-board computer
with colour display) .................. 157
Setting (on-board computer
with monochrome display) .......... 152
Setting the time format (onboard computer with colour display) ...................................... 158
TIREFIT kit ................................. 222
Tool
see Vehicle tool kit
Top Tether .................................... 49
Total distance recorder
Colour display ......................... 154
Monochrome display .................. 151
Setting the display unit ............ 159
Tow-starting
Emergency engine starting ......... 232
Important safety notes .............. 230
Towing
Important safety notes .............. 230
With the rear axle raised ........... 232
Towing away
Fitting the towing eye ............... 231
Removing the towing eye ............ 232
With both axles on the ground ..... 232
Transmission
see Automatic transmission
see Manual transmission
Transmission position display ........ 123
Transporting the vehicle ............... 232
Trip computer (colour display) ........ 154
Trip meter
Colour display ......................... 154
Displaying (on-board computer
with colour display) ................. 154
Displaying (on-board computer
with monochrome display) .......... 152
Resetting (on-board computer
with colour display) ................. 154
Resetting (on-board computer
with monochrome display) .......... 152
Setting the display unit ............ 159
Trip meter
see Trip meter
Turn signals
Changing bulbs (front) ................ 92
Changing bulbs (rear) ................ 94
Replacing the bulb .................... 93
Switching on/off ....................... 89
Turn signals
see Turn signals
Two-way radio
Frequencies ............................ 258
Installation ............................ 258
Transmission output (maximum) .. 258
Type identification plate
see Vehicle identification plate
Tyre pressure
Display message ....................... 178
Important safety notes .............. 245
Not reached (TIREFIT) ............... 223
Reached (TIREFIT) .................... 223
Recommended .......................... 243
Tyre pressure monitor
Display message (monochrome
display) ................................. 165
Function/notes ........................ 245
General notes .......................... 245
Important safety notes .............. 245
Restarting (on-board computer
with colour display) ................. 246
Restarting (on-board computer
with monochrome display) .......... 246
Warning lamp .......................... 192
Warning message ...................... 246
Tyres
Changing a wheel ..................... 247
Checking ................................ 241
Direction of rotation ................ 248
Display message ....................... 178
General notes .......................... 252
15
16
Index
Important safety notes ..............
M+S tyres (winter tyres) ............
Replacing ...............................
Service life ............................
Snow chains ............................
Storing ..................................
Summer tyres in winter .............
Tyre size (data) .......................
Tyre tread ..............................
Wheel and tyre combinations ......
see Flat tyre
240
242
247
241
243
248
242
252
241
253
U
Unlocking
Emergency unlocking .................. 70
From inside the vehicle (central
unlocking button) ...................... 69
V
Vehicle
Correct use .............................. 21
Data acquisition ....................... 22
Electronic malfunction (display
message) ................................ 183
Electronic malfunction (warning lamp) ................................ 194
Electronics ............................. 258
Equipment ................................ 19
Implied warranty ....................... 22
Leaving parked up .................... 134
Locking (in an emergency) ........... 70
Locking (key) ............................ 65
Lowering ................................ 251
Pulling away ............................ 116
Raising ................................. 249
Registration ............................ 21
Securing from rolling away ........ 248
Tow-starting ........................... 230
Towing away ............................ 230
Transporting .......................... 232
Unlocking (in an emergency) ........ 70
Unlocking (key) ......................... 65
Vehicle data ........................... 265
Vehicle battery
see Battery (vehicle)
Vehicle data ................................ 265
Vehicle dimensions ...................... 265
Vehicle emergency locking ..............
Vehicle identification number
see VIN
Vehicle identification plate ..........
Vehicle key
see Key
Vehicle tool kit ...........................
Ventilation
see Climate control
VIN ............................................
70
259
221
259
W
Warning and indicator lamps
ABS ........................................ 187
Airbag ................................... 185
Automatic Start/Stop function
(green) ................................... 195
Automatic Start/Stop function
(yellow) .................................. 195
Battery .................................. 190
Brakes ................................... 185
Distance warning function (red) .. 189
Distance warning function (yellow) ....................................... 188
Door ...................................... 194
EBD ....................................... 186
Electronics ............................. 194
ESP® ...................................... 187
Lane Keeping Assist (colour
display) ................................. 176
Lane Keeping Assist (monochrome display) ....................... 165
Oil pressure ............................ 191
Overview (colour display) ........... 30
Overview (monochrome display) .... 28
Parking brake .......................... 185
PASSENGER AIR BAG .................... 39
Seat belt ................................ 184
Steering ................................. 194
Tyre pressure monitor ............... 192
Warning triangle .......................... 220
Wheel and tyre combinations
see Tyres
Wheel bolt tightening torque ........... 251
Wheels
Changing a wheel ..................... 247
Changing/replacing ................. 247
Index
Checking ................................ 241
Cleaning ................................ 214
Fitting a new wheel .................. 251
Fitting a wheel ........................ 248
General notes .......................... 252
Important safety notes .............. 240
Removing a wheel ..................... 250
Snow chains ............................ 243
Storing .................................. 248
Tightening torque .................... 251
Wheel size/tyre size ................. 252
Windows
Cleaning ................................ 214
see Side windows
Windscreen
Demisting ............................... 108
Windscreen
see Windscreen
Windscreen washer fluid
see Windscreen washer system
Windscreen washer system
Important safety notes .............. 265
Topping up ............................. 210
Windscreen wipers
Intermittent wipe ...................... 96
Problem (malfunction) ................ 99
Rear window wiper ..................... 96
Replacing the wiper blades ......... 96
Switching on/off ....................... 95
Winter driving
General notes .......................... 242
Winter operation
Slippery road surfaces .............. 138
Snow chains ............................ 243
Winter tyres
M+S tyres ............................... 242
Wiper blades
Cleaning ................................ 215
Important safety notes ................ 96
Replacing (on the rear window) ..... 97
Replacing (windscreen) .............. 97
Workshop
see Qualified specialist workshop
17
18
>> Introduction.
Protection of the environment
General notes
H Environmental note
Daimler's declared policy is one of comprehensive environmental protection.
The objective is to use the natural resources which form the basis of our existence on
this planet sparingly and in a manner which
takes the requirements of both nature and
humanity into account.
You too can help to protect the environment
by operating your vehicle in an environmentally-responsible manner.
Fuel consumption and the rate of engine,
transmission, brake and tyre wear depend
on the following factors:
Rthe operating conditions of your vehicle
Ryour
personal driving style
You can influence both factors. You should
bear the following in mind:
Operating conditions:
Ravoid
short trips as these increase fuel
consumption.
Rmake sure that the tyre pressures are
always correct.
Rdo not carry any unnecessary weight.
Ra regularly serviced vehicle will contribute to environmental protection. You
should therefore adhere to the service
intervals.
Ralways have service work carried out at a
qualified specialist workshop.
Personal driving style:
Rdo
not depress the accelerator pedal
when starting the engine.
Rdo not warm up the engine with the vehicle stationary.
Rdrive carefully and maintain a suitable
distance from the vehicle in front.
Ravoid frequent, sudden acceleration and
braking.
Rchange
gear in good time and use each
gear only up to Ô of its maximum engine
speed.
Rswitch off the engine in stationary traffic.
Rkeep an eye on the vehicle's fuel consumption.
Returning an end-of-life vehicle
EU countries only:
smart will take back your old vehicle to
dispose of it in an environmentallyresponsible manner in accordance with the
European Union (EU) End of Life Vehicles
Directive.
There is a network of return points and
disassembly plants available. In these
plants you can return your vehicle free of
charge. This makes a valuable contribution
to the recycling process and the conservation of resources.
For further information on recycling old
vehicles, recovery and the terms of the policy, visit the smart homepage.
Genuine smart parts
H Environmental note
Daimler AG also supplies reconditioned
assemblies and parts which are of the same
quality as new parts. For these, the same
warranty applies as for new parts.
! Airbags and seat belt tensioners, as
well as control units and sensors for
these restraint systems, may be installed
in the following areas of your vehicle:
Rdoors
Rdoor
pillars
sills
Rseats
Rdashboard
Rdoor
>> Introduction.
Rinstrument
cluster
console
Do not install accessories such as audio
systems in these areas. Do not carry out
repairs or welding. You could impair the
operating efficiency of the restraint
systems.
Have accessories retrofitted at a qualified specialist workshop.
Rcentre
You could jeopardise the operating safety
of your vehicle if you use parts, tyres and
wheels as well as accessories relevant to
safety which have not been approved by
smart. This could lead to malfunctions in
safety-relevant systems, e.g. the brake
system. Use only genuine smart parts or
parts of equal quality. Only use tyres,
wheels and accessories that have been specifically approved for your vehicle.
smart tests genuine parts and conversion
parts and accessories that have been specifically approved for your vehicle for
their reliability, safety and suitability.
Despite ongoing market research, smart is
unable to assess other parts. smart therefore accepts no responsibility for the use
of such parts in smart vehicles, even if they
have been officially approved or independently approved by a testing centre.
In Germany, certain parts are only officially approved for installation or modification if they comply with legal requirements. This also applies to some other
countries. All genuine smart parts meet the
approval requirements. The use of nonapproved parts may invalidate the vehicle's general operating permit.
This is the case:
Rif they cause a change of the vehicle type
from that for which the vehicle's general
operating permit was granted
Rif other road users could be endangered
Rif the emission or noise levels are
adversely affected
Always specify the vehicle identification
number (VIN) (Y page 259) when ordering
genuine smart parts.
Owner's Manual
Vehicle equipment
This Owner's Manual describes all models
and all standard and optional equipment
available for your vehicle at the time of
publication of the Owner's Manual. Country-specific differences are possible.
Note that your vehicle may not be fitted
with all features described. This is also
the case for systems and functions relevant
to safety. Therefore, the equipment on your
vehicle may differ from that in the
descriptions and illustrations.
The original purchase contract documentation for your vehicle contains a list of
all of the systems in your vehicle.
Should you have any questions concerning
equipment and operation, please consult a
smart Centre.
The Owner's Manual and Service Booklet are
important documents and should kept in the
vehicle.
Operating safety
Important safety notes
G WARNING
If you do not have the prescribed service/
maintenance work or necessary repairs
carried out, this could result in malfunctions or system failures. There is a risk of
an accident.
Always have the prescribed service/maintenance work as well as necessary repairs
carried out at a qualified specialist workshop.
Z
19
20
>> Introduction.
G WARNING
Flammable material such as leaves, grass or
twigs may ignite if they come into contact
with hot parts of the exhaust system. There
is a risk of fire.
When driving off road or on unpaved roads,
check the vehicle's underside regularly. In
particular, remove parts of plants or other
flammable materials which have become
trapped. In the case of damage, contact a
qualified specialist workshop.
G WARNING
Modifications to electronic components,
their software as well as wiring could
affect their function and/or the operation
of other networked components. This could
in particular also be the case for systems
relevant to safety. They might not function
properly anymore and/or jeopardise the
operational safety of the vehicle. There is
an increased risk of an accident and injury.
Do not attempt to modify the wiring as well
as electronic components or their software.
Always have work on electrical and electronic components carried out at a qualified specialist workshop.
If you make any changes to the vehicle electronics, the general operating permit is
rendered invalid.
! There is a risk of damage to the vehicle
if:
Rthe
vehicle becomes stuck, e.g. on a
high kerb or an unpaved road
Ryou drive too fast over an obstacle, e.g.
a kerb or a pothole in the road
Ra heavy object strikes the underbody or
parts of the chassis
In situations like this, the body, the
underbody, chassis parts, wheels or tyres
could be damaged without the damage
being visible. Components damaged in
this way can unexpectedly fail or, in the
case of an accident, no longer withstand
the strain they are designed for.
If the underbody panelling is damaged,
combustible materials such as leaves,
grass or twigs can gather between the
underbody and the underbody panelling.
If these materials come in contact with
hot parts of the exhaust system, they can
catch fire.
In such situations, have the vehicle
checked and repaired immediately at a
qualified specialist workshop. If, upon
continuing your journey, you notice that
driving safety is impaired, pull over and
stop the vehicle immediately, paying
attention to road and traffic conditions.
In such cases, consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Declarations of conformity
Wireless vehicle components
The following information applies to all
components of the vehicle and the information systems and communication devices
integrated into the vehicle which receive
and/or transmit radio waves:
The components of this vehicle that receive
and/or transmit radio waves are compliant
with the essential requirements and all
other relevant conditions of Directive
1999/5/EC. For further information enquire
at any smart centre.
Electromagnetic compatibility
The electromagnetic compatibility of the
vehicle components has been checked and
certified according to the currently valid
version of Regulation ECE-R 10.
Diagnostics connection
The diagnostics connection is only intended for the connection of diagnostic
equipment at a qualified specialist workshop.
>> Introduction.
G WARNING
If you connect equipment to a diagnostics
connection in the vehicle, it can affect the
operation of the vehicle systems. This may
affect the operating safety of the vehicle.
There is a risk of an accident.
Do not connect any equipment to a diagnostics connection in the vehicle.
G WARNING
Objects in the driver's footwell may
restrict the clearance around the pedals or
block a depressed pedal. This jeopardises
the operating and road safety of the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident.
Stow all objects securely in the vehicle so
that they do not get into the driver's footwell. Always fit the floormats securely and
as prescribed in order to ensure that there
is always sufficient room for the pedals. Do
not use loose floormats and do not place
several floormats on top of one another.
! If the engine is switched off and equipment on the diagnostics connection is
used, the starter battery may discharge.
Connecting equipment to the diagnostics
connection can lead to emissions monitoring information being reset, for example.
This may lead to the vehicle failing to meet
the requirements of the next emissions test
during the main inspection.
Qualified specialist workshop
A qualified specialist workshop has the
necessary special skills, tools and qualifications to correctly carry out any necessary work on your vehicle. This particularly applies to work relevant to safety.
Observe the notes in the Service Booklet.
Always have the following work carried out
at a qualified specialist workshop:
Rwork
Rrepair
work
Rmodifications,
installations and conversions
Rwork on electronic components
smart recommends that you use a smart
centre.
Vehicle registration
smart may ask its smart centres to carry out
technical inspections on certain vehicles.
The quality or safety of the vehicle is
improved as a result of the inspection.
smart can only inform you about vehicle
checks if it has your registration data.
It is possible that your vehicle has not yet
been registered in your name in the following cases:
Rif
your vehicle was not purchased at an
authorised specialist dealer.
Rif your vehicle has not yet been examined
at a smart centre.
It is advisable to register your vehicle
with a smart centre.
Inform smart as soon as possible about any
change in address or vehicle ownership.
You can do this at a smart centre, for example.
Correct use
If you remove any warning stickers, you or
others could fail to recognise certain dangers. Leave warning stickers in position.
Observe the following information when
driving your vehicle:
Rthe
safety notes in this manual
technical data in this manual
Rtraffic rules and regulations
Rlaws and safety standards pertaining to
motor vehicles
Rthe
relevant to safety
and maintenance work
Rservice
Z
21
22
>> Introduction.
Implied warranty
! Follow the instructions in this manual
about the proper operation of your vehicle as well as about possible vehicle
damage. Damage to your vehicle that arises from culpable contraventions
against these instructions is not covered either by the smart implied warranty or by the New or Used-Vehicle Warranty.
QR codes for rescue card
The QR code is secured in the fuel filler
flap and on the opposite side on the B-pillar. In the event of an accident, rescue
services can use the QR code to quickly find
the appropriate rescue card for your vehicle. The current rescue card contains, in a
compact form, the most important information about your vehicle, e.g. the routing of
the electric cables.
You can find more information under
http://portal.aftersales.i.daimler.com/
public/content/asportal/en/
communication/informationen_fuer/
QRCode.html.
Data stored in the vehicle
A large number of your vehicle's electronic
components can store data.
The data memory temporarily or permanently stores technical information about:
Rthe
vehicle's operating state
Revents
Rfaults
The technical information generally documents the condition of a component, module, system or the environment.
These include, for example:
RThe
operating status of system components, e.g. fluid levels
RStatus messages concerning the vehicle
and its individual components, e.g. number of wheel revolutions/speed, deceleration in movement, lateral acceleration, accelerator pedal position
RMalfunctions and defects in key system
components, including, for instance,
lights, brakes.
RVehicle reactions and operating conditions in special driving situations,
including, for instance, deployment of
an airbag, use of stability control systems.
REnvironmental conditions, including,
for instance, the outside temperature.
This data is of an exclusively technical
nature and can be used to:
Rassist
in the detection and elimination
of faults and defects
Ranalyse vehicle functions, e.g. after an
accident
Roptimise vehicle functions
The data cannot be used to trace the vehicle's movements.
If you have the vehicle serviced, this technical information can be read out from the
event and fault data memory.
Services include, for example, information on:
Rrepair
work
work
Rwarranty claims
Rquality assurance
The readout is handled by service network
staff (including the manufacturer) with the
help of special diagnostic testers. You can
obtain more detailed information, if
required.
After the fault has been rectified, the
information is cleared in the fault memory
or is sequentially overwritten.
Rservice
>> Introduction.
During vehicle operation, certain situations may arise in which this technical
data - in conjunction with other information and, if applicable, after consultation
with an approved assessor - may be linked
to an individual person.
Examples of this include:
Raccident
reports
damage
Revidence
Rvehicle
Copyright information
General notes
You can find information on licences for
free and open-source software used in your
vehicle and its electronic components on
the following website:
http://www.mercedes-benz.com/
opensource
Z
23
24
25
Instrument cluster with monochrome
display ........................................... 27
Instrument cluster with colour display ............................................... 29
Multifunction steering wheel .............. 31
Centre console .................................. 33
Overhead control panel ...................... 34
Door control panel ............................. 35
>> At a glance.
Cockpit ........................................... 26
26
Cockpit
>> At a glance.
Cockpit
Function
:
Additional instruments
on the dashboard
;
Instrument cluster
=
Horn
?
Multifunction lever
On-board computer
Windscreen wipers combination switch
Page
150
F
Adjusts the steering
wheel
83
95
Overhead control panel
34
C
smart Audio-System/
smart Media-System (see
the separate operating
instructions)
Climate control system
control panel
115
150
B
D
Ignition lock
G
90
69
H
I
102
Page
E
29
Switches the automatic
locking feature on/off
Switches the hazard warning lamps on/off
A
Function
Control panel for:
è Turning the automatic start/stop system
on/off
Turning Lane Keeping
Assist on/off
Turning the forward collision warning on/off
Turning the parking aid
on/off
Headlamp range adjustment
Lights combination
switch
Gearshift paddles
119
145
60
142
88
87
127
Instrument cluster with monochrome display
27
Instrument cluster with monochrome display
>> At a glance.
Displays
i Instrument cluster with speedometer
Function
Page
:
Speedometer
148
;
Monochrome display
151
=
Warning and indicator
lamps
28
28
Instrument cluster with monochrome display
>> At a glance.
Warning and indicator lamps
Function
:
;
Page
^ Distance warning
function
188
· Distance warning
signal
189
=
T Side lamps
?
ç Automatic start/stop
function
Conditions for the automatic engine switch-off
not met
Malfunction
117
195
A
? Coolant temperature
191
B
5 Oil pressure
191
C
í Battery
190
D
! Turn signal, right
E
D Power steering
194
F
; Engine diagnostics
190
G
J Brakes
185
H
÷
esp®
88
Function
I
\ Doors or the tailgate
Vehicle electronics
J
R Rear foglamp
88
K
L Dipped-beam headlamps
88
K Main-beam headlamps
89
M
N Foglamps
88
N
# Turn signal, left
89
O
ü Seat belts
184
P
6 Restraint system
185
Q
! abs
187
R
h Tyre pressure monitor
192
è Automatic start/stop
function
Automatic start/stop system
118
L
89
187
Page
S
194
194
Instrument cluster with colour display
29
Instrument cluster with colour display
>> At a glance.
Displays
i Instrument cluster with speedometer
Function
Page
:
Speedometer
148
;
Colour display
153
=
Warning and indicator
lamps
30
30
Instrument cluster with colour display
>> At a glance.
Warning and indicator lamps
Function
:
ç Automatic start/stop
function
Conditions for the automatic engine switch-off
not met
Malfunction
Page
117
195
Function
Page
G
! Turn signal, right
89
H
# Turn signal, left
89
I
J Brakes
J
R Rear foglamp
88
K
N Foglamps
88
L
K Main-beam headlamps
89
L Dipped-beam headlamps
88
185
è Automatic start/stop
function
Automatic start/stop system
118
=
! abs
187
?
÷ esp®
187
N
6 Restraint system
38
A
í Battery
190
O
T Side lamps
88
B
h Tyre pressure monitor
P
192
· Distance warning
signal
189
C
5 Oil pressure
191
Q
ü Seat belts
184
D
D Power steering
194
R
E
; Engine diagnostics
190
\ Doors or the tailgate
Vehicle electronics
194
194
F
? Coolant temperature
191
;
M
Multifunction steering wheel
31
>> At a glance.
Multifunction steering wheel
Function
:
Colour display in instrument cluster
Monochrome display in
instrument cluster
;
smart Audio-System or
smart Media-System display (see the separate
operating instructions)
=
W X Changes the
volume of the smart
Audio-System or smart
Media-System (see the
separate operating
instructions)
Only with an instrument
cluster with colour display:
? Switches voiceoperated control of the
smart Audio-System
on/off and accepts/ends a
call (see the separate
operating instructions)
Page
Function
?
153
151
A
B
Cruise control and limiter button:
® Increases or stores
the current speed
− Decreases current speed
• Cruise control
• Limiter
Cruise control and limiter button:
° Calls up the last
speed stored
• Cruise control
• Limiter
Cruise control and limiter button:
± Interrupts cruise
control or limiter
• Cruise control
• Limiter
Page
139
139
139
32
Multifunction steering wheel
>> At a glance.
Function
C
Cruise control and limiter switch:
V Activates cruise
control
^ Deactivates cruise
control or limiter
È Activates limiter
• Cruise control
• Limiter
Page
Function
D
139
i Voice-operated control as well as control of the telephone and volume using
the steering wheel buttons in the control
panel on the right = only function with
the smart Media-System. If you use a
smart Audio-System or an audio device
from another manufacturer, the functions
may be restricted or not available at all.
Only with an instrument
cluster with colour display:
9 : Scrolls through
a menu or list
a
To confirm the selection
Changes to the "Reset values" function in certain
menus
Hides display messages
Page
153
153
153
167
Centre console
33
>> At a glance.
Centre console
i Vehicles with automatic transmission
Function
Page
Page
B
Selector lever
123
C
Parking brake
133
D
Cigarette lighter
Power socket
203
204
E
AUX/USB port and SD memory card (only with smart
Media-System)
F
Cup holders
:
Cup holders
202
;
Transmission position
display
124
Sets the driving program
(program selector button)
125
?
Drawer
199
A
Coin holder
=
Function
203
34
Overhead control panel
>> At a glance.
Overhead control panel
Function
:
Depending on the position
of the switch:
Interior lighting
switched on
Automatic interior lighting control on
Interior lighting
switched off
Page
Function
;
90
90
90
=
Page
PASSENGER AIRBAG
OFF/ON indicator lamps
39
Rear-view mirror
84
Door control panel
35
>> At a glance.
Door control panel
Function
:
Opens the door
;
Adjusts the exterior mirrors electrically
Page
68
84
Function
=
W Opens/closes the
side windows
Page
72
36
37
Useful information ............................ 38
Occupant safety ................................ 38
Children in the vehicle ...................... 46
Protection against theft ..................... 58
Driving safety systems ....................... 59
>> Safety.
Pets in the vehicle ............................ 58
38
Occupant safety
Useful information
>> Safety.
i This Owner's Manual describes all models, series and optional equipment for
your vehicle that were available at the
time of going to press. Country-specific
differences are possible. Note that your
vehicle may not be fitted with all features described. This is also the case for
systems and functions relevant to safety.
i Read the information on qualified specialist workshops: (Y page 21).
Occupant safety
Introduction to the restraint system
The restraint system can reduce the risk of
vehicle occupants coming into contact with
parts of the vehicle's interior in the event
of an accident. The restraint system can
also reduce the forces to which vehicle
occupants are subjected during an accident.
The restraint system includes the:
RSeat
belt system
RAirbags
RChild
restraint system
seat securing system
The components of the restraint system
work in conjunction with each other. They
can only offer protection if all vehicle
occupants always:
RChild
Rhave
the seat belt correctly fastened
(Y page 41)
Rhave the seat adjusted properly
(Y page 79)
As the driver, you must also make sure that
the steering wheel is also adjusted properly. Observe the information on the correct driver's seat position (Y page 78).
In addition, you must make sure that the
airbags can inflate properly if they are
deployed (Y page 43).
An airbag supplements a correctly worn
seat belt. The airbag, as an additional
safety device, increases protection for
vehicle occupants in applicable accident
situations. The airbags are not deployed,
for example, in the event of an accident in
which sufficient protection is offered by
the seat belt. In addition, only those airbags, which in the applicable accident
situations offer additional protection,
are deployed in the event of an accident.
However, the seat belt and airbag generally
do not protect against objects penetrating
the vehicle from the outside.
Information on how the restraint system
operates can be found under "Deployment of
belt tensioners and airbags" (Y page 45).
See "Children in the vehicle" for further
information on children travelling in the
vehicle as well as on child restraint systems (Y page 46).
Important safety notes
G WARNING
If the restraint system is modified, it may
no longer work as intended. The restraint
system may then not perform its intended
protective function by failing in an accident or triggering unexpectedly, for example. There is an increased risk of injury,
possibly even fatal.
Never modify parts of the restraint system.
Do not attempt to modify the wiring as well
as electronic components or their software.
If it is necessary to modify an airbag system to accommodate a person with disabilities, contact a smart centre.
Restraint system warning lamp
The functions of the restraint system are
checked after the ignition is switched on
and at regular intervals while the engine
Occupant safety
Rdoes
not light up after the ignition is
switched on
Rdoes not go out after a few seconds with
the engine running
Rlights up again while the engine is running
G WARNING
If the restraint system is malfunctioning,
restraint system components may be triggered unintentionally or might not be triggered at all in the event of an accident with
a high rate of vehicle deceleration. This
can effect belt tensioners or airbags, for
example. There is an increased risk of
serious or even fatal injuries.
Have the restraint system checked and
repaired immediately at a qualified specialist workshop.
PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator lamps
PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp :
and PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator
lamp ; are part of the deactivation system
of the front-passenger front airbag.
The indicator lamps display the status of
the front-passenger front airbag.
RPASSENGER AIR BAG OFF : lights up: the
front-passenger front airbag is disabled. It will then not be deployed in the
event of an accident.
RPASSENGER AIR BAG ON ; lights up: the
front-passenger front airbag is enabled. If, in the case of an accident, all
deployment criteria are met, the frontpassenger front airbag is deployed.
Depending on the person in the frontpassenger seat, the front-passenger front
airbag must either be disabled or enabled.
You must make sure of this both before and
during a journey.
RChildren
in a child restraint system:
whether the front-passenger front airbag must be enabled or disabled depends
on the installed child restraint system,
and the age and size of the child. Therefore, always observe the information on
"Children in the vehicle" (Y page 46).
There you will also find instructions on
backwards and forwards-facing child
restraint systems on the front-passenger
seat.
RAll other persons: the PASSENGER AIR BAG
OFF indicator lamp must be off and the
PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamp
must be on. The front-passenger front
airbag is enabled. If the PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp is lit, the frontpassenger front airbag is disabled. It
will then not be deployed in the event of
an accident. In this case, the frontpassenger seat should not be used.
Be sure to observe the notes on "Activating/deactivating the front-passenger
airbag" as well as "Seat belts"
(Y page 50) (Y page 40) and "Airbags"
(Y page 43). There you can also find
information on the correct seat position.
Z
>> Safety.
is running. Therefore, malfunctions can be
detected in good time.
The 6 restraint system warning lamp in
the instrument cluster lights up when the
ignition is switched on. It goes out no later
than a few seconds after the engine is started. The components of the restraint system
are in operational readiness.
A malfunction has occurred if the 6
restraint system warning lamp:
39
40
Occupant safety
>> Safety.
Observe the information on the airbag
deactivation system of the front-passenger
front airbag (Y page 50).
Seat belts
Introduction
A correctly worn seat belt is the most effective means of restraining the movement of
vehicle occupants in the event of a collision or if the vehicle overturns. This
reduces the risk of vehicle occupants coming into contact with parts of the vehicle
interior or being ejected from it. The seat
belt also helps to keep the vehicle occupants in the best position in relation to the
airbag being deployed.
The seat belt system consists of:
Rseat
belts
Rbelt tensioners and belt force limiters
If the seat belt is pulled quickly or sharply
by the seat belt guide, the inertia reel
locks. The belt strap cannot be pulled out
any further.
The belt tensioner tightens the seat belt in
the event of a collision so that it fits
tightly across your body. However, it does
not pull the vehicle occupants back in the
direction of the seat backrest.
The belt tensioner does not, however, correct an incorrect seat position or correct
the routing of a seat belt that is worn
incorrectly.
When triggered, seat belt force limiters
help to reduce the peak force exerted by the
seat belt on the vehicle occupant.
The belt force limiters are synchronised
with the front airbags, which take on a part
of the deceleration force. This can reduce
the forces to which the vehicle occupants
are subjected during an accident.
! If the co-driver's seat is not occupied,
do not engage the seat belt tongue in the
buckle on the co-driver's seat. Other-
wise, the belt tensioner could be triggered in the event of an accident and
would have to be replaced.
Important safety notes
G WARNING
The seat belt cannot perform its intended
protective function if it is not fastened
correctly. Also, an improperly fastened
seat belt can cause additional injuries in
the event of an accident, sudden braking or
abrupt changes of direction. There is an
increased risk of injury, possibly even
fatal.
Always make sure that all vehicle occupants
are wearing their seat belt properly and
are seated correctly.
G WARNING
The seat belt does not offer the intended
level of protection if you have not moved
the backrest to an almost vertical position.
When braking or in the event of an accident,
you could slide underneath the seat belt and
sustain abdomen or neck injuries, for
example. This poses an increased risk of
injury or even fatal injury.
Adjust the seat properly before beginning
your journey. Always ensure that the backrest is in an almost vertical position and
that the shoulder section of your seatbelt is
routed across the centre of your shoulder.
G WARNING
Persons under 1.50 m tall cannot wear the
seat belts correctly without a suitable,
additional restraint system. The seat belt
cannot perform its intended protective
function if it is not fastened correctly.
Also, an improperly fastened seat belt can
cause additional injuries in the event of an
accident, sudden braking or abrupt changes
of direction. There is an increased risk of
injury, possibly even fatal.
Secure persons less than 1.50 m tall in a
suitable restraint system.
Occupant safety
Ralways
secure the child in a child
restraint system suitable for this smart
vehicle.
The child restraint system must be
appropriate to the age, weight and size
of the child.
Ralways observe the instructions and
safety notes on "Children in the vehicle"
in this Owner's Manual (Y page 46) in
addition to the child restraint system
manufacturer's installation instructions.
G WARNING
Seat belts cannot protect as intended, if:
Rthey
are damaged, have been modified,
are extremely dirty, bleached or dyed
Rthe seat belt buckle is damaged or
extremely dirty
Rmodifications have been made to the belt
tensioners, belt anchorages or inertia
reels
Seat belts may sustain non-visible damage
in an accident, e.g. due to glass splinters.
Modified or damaged seat belts can tear or
fail, for example in the event of an accident. Modified seat belt tensioners may be
deployed unintentionally or fail to be
deployed when required. There is an
increased risk of injury, possibly even
fatal.
Never modify safety belts, seat belt tensioners, seat belt anchorages and inertia
reels. Ensure that seat belts are not damaged or worn and are clean. After an accident, have the seat belts checked immediately at a qualified specialist workshop.
smart recommends that you only use seat
belts which have been approved specifically for your vehicle by smart. Any such
modifications could invalidate the vehicle's general operating permit.
Correct use of the seat belt
Observe the safety notes on the seat belt
(Y page 40).
All vehicle occupants must be wearing the
seat belt correctly before beginning the
journey. Also make sure that all vehicle
occupants are always wearing the seat belt
correctly while the vehicle is in motion.
When fastening the seat belt, always make
sure that:
Rthe
seat belt tongue is only inserted to
the belt buckle belonging to that seat.
Rthe seat belt is tight across your body.
Avoid wearing bulky clothing, e.g. a winter coat.
Rthe seat belt is not twisted.
Only then can forces which occur be distributed across the surface of the seat
belt.
Rthe shoulder section of the belt is always
routed across the centre of your shoulder.
The shoulder section of the seat belt
should not touch your neck nor be routed
under your arm.
Rthe lap belt passes across your lap as
tightly and as low down as possible.
The lap belt must always be routed across
your hip joints and never across your
abdomen. This applies particularly to
pregnant women. If necessary, press the
lap belt down into your hip joints and
pull tight with the shoulder section of
the belt.
Rthe seat belt is not routed across sharp,
pointed or fragile objects.
If you have such items located on or in
your clothing, e.g. pens, keys or spectacles, store these in a suitable place.
Ronly one person is using a seat belt.
Infants and children must never travel
sitting on the lap of a vehicle occupant.
In the event of an accident, they could be
Z
>> Safety.
If a child under twelve years of age and less
than 1.50 m tall is travelling in the vehicle:
41
Occupant safety
>> Safety.
42
crushed between the vehicle occupant
and seat belt.
Robjects are never secured with a seat belt
if the seat belt is also being used by one
of the vehicle's occupants.
Seat belts are only intended to secure and
restrain vehicle occupants. Always observe
the "Loading guidelines" for securing
objects, luggage or loads (Y page 198).
Releasing the seat belts
! Make sure that the seat belt is fully
rolled up. Otherwise, the seat belt or
belt tongue will be trapped in the door or
in the seat mechanism. This could damage the door, the door trim panel and the
seat belt. Damaged seat belts can no longer fulfil their protective function and
must be replaced. Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Fastening seat belts
Observe the safety notes on the seat belt
(Y page 40) and the notes on correct use of
seat belts (Y page 41).
For easy fastening, the seat belt is guided
through a belt loop on the side of the driver's seat.
X
Press release button :, hold belt
tongue ; and guide it back towards belt
outlet =.
Belt warning for the driver and front
passenger
X
Adjust the seat (Y page 78).
The seat backrest must be in an almost
vertical position.
X Pull the seat belt smoothly from belt outlet = and engage belt tongue ; into
belt buckle :.
X If necessary, pull upwards on the shoulder section of the seat belt to tighten the
belt across your body.
The 7 seat belt warning lamp in the
instrument cluster is a reminder that all
vehicle occupants must wear their seat
belts. It may light up continuously or flash.
In addition, a warning tone may sound.
The 7 seat belt warning lamp goes out
and the warning tone ceases when the driver
and the front passenger have fastened their
seat belt.
i If you are using an ISOFIX child
restraint system on the front-passenger
seat and the child is not secured using
the seat belt of the front-passenger seat,
Occupant safety
Airbags
Introduction
The installation location of an airbag is
identified by the AIRBAG symbol.
An airbag supplements a correctly worn
seat belt. It is not a replacement for the
seat belt. The airbag offers additional
protection in applicable accident situations.
Not all airbags are deployed in an accident. The different airbag systems work
independently of each other (Y page 45).
However, no system available today can
completely eliminate injuries and fatalities.
It is also not possible to completely rule
out a risk of injury caused by an airbag due
to the speed at which the airbag must be
deployed.
Important safety notes
G WARNING
If you deviate from the correct seat position, the airbag cannot perform its intended protective function and can even cause
additional injuries when deployed. There
is an increased risk of serious or even fatal
injuries.
In order to avoid such risks, always ensure
that all vehicle occupants:
Rfasten their seatbelts correctly, includ-
ing pregnant women
seated correctly and maintain the
furthest possible distance from the airbags
Robserve the following notes
Always ensure that there are no objects
located between the airbag and the vehicle
occupant.
Rare
RAdjust
the seats properly before beginning your journey. Always make sure that
the seat is in an almost upright position.
RMove the driver's and front-passenger
seats as far back as possible. The driver's seat position must allow the vehicle
to be driven safely.
ROnly hold the steering wheel on the outside. This allows the airbag to be fully
deployed.
RAlways lean against the backrest while
driving. Do not lean forwards or lean
against the door or side window. You may
otherwise be in the deployment area of
the airbags.
RAlways keep your feet in the footwell in
front of the seat. Do not put your feet on
the dashboard, for example. Your feet
may otherwise be in the deployment area
of the airbag.
RAlways secure persons less than 1.50 m
tall in suitable restraint systems. Up to
this height, the seat belt cannot be worn
correctly.
If a child is travelling in your vehicle,
also observe the following notes:
RAlways
secure children under twelve
years of age and less than 1.50 m tall in
suitable child restraint systems.
ROnly secure a child to the frontpassenger seat when the front-passenger
front airbag is disabled, and only then in
a rearward-facing child restraint sysZ
>> Safety.
the belt warning may be activated. In
this case, you can insert the belt tongue
of the seat belt into the belt buckle
belonging to the front-passenger seat.
To do this, guide the seat belt between
the ISOFIX child restraint system and the
backrest of the front-passenger seat.
43
>> Safety.
44
Occupant safety
tem. If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is permanently lit, the frontpassenger front airbag is disabled
(Y page 39).
RAlways observe the instructions and
safety notes on "Children in the vehicle"
(Y page 46) and on the "Child restraint
system on the front-passenger seat"
(Y page 51) in addition to the child
restraint system manufacturer's installation instructions.
Objects in the vehicle interior may prevent the airbag from functioning correctly. Before starting your journey and to
avoid risks resulting from the speed of the
airbag as it deploys, make sure that:
are no people, animals or objects
between the vehicle occupants and an
airbag.
Rthere are no objects between the seat, the
door and the door pillar (B-pillar).
Rno hard objects, e.g. coat hangers, are
hanging on the grab handles or coat
hooks.
Rno accessories, such as cup holders, are
attached to the vehicle within the
deployment area of an airbag, e.g. to
doors or side windows.
Rno heavy, sharp-edged or fragile objects
are in the pockets of your clothing. Store
such objects in a suitable place.
impaired. The airbags might therefore not
function properly any more. Consequently,
the airbags cannot protect vehicle occupants as they are designed to do. This poses
an increased risk of injury.
Never modify the doors or parts of the
doors. Always have work on the doors or door
panelling carried out at a qualified specialist workshop.
Front airbags
Rthere
G WARNING
If you modify an airbag cover or affix
objects such as stickers to it, the airbag
can no longer function correctly. There is
an increased risk of injury.
Never modify an airbag cover or affix
objects to it.
G WARNING
Sensors to control the airbags are located
in the doors. Modifications or work not
performed correctly to the doors or door
panelling, as well as damaged doors, can
lead to the function of the sensors being
Driver's airbag : deploys in front of the
steering wheel. Front-passenger front airbag ; deploys in front of and above the
glove compartment.
When deployed, the front airbags offer
additional head and thorax protection for
the occupants in the front seats.
The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF and PASSENGER
AIR BAG ON indicator lamps inform you
about the status of the front-passenger
front airbag (Y page 39).
Driver's kneebag
Occupant safety
Head/thorax airbags
G WARNING
Unsuitable seat covers can obstruct or prevent the deployment of the airbags integrated into the seats. Consequently, the
airbags cannot protect vehicle occupants
as they are designed to do. This poses an
increased risk of injury or even fatal
injury.
You should only use seat covers that have
been approved for the corresponding seats
by smart.
Head/thorax airbags : deploy next to the
outer bolster of the seat backrest.
When deployed, the head/thorax airbag
offers additional head and thorax protection. However, it does not protect the arms.
Deployment of belt tensioners and airbags
Important safety notes
G WARNING
After the airbag deploys, the airbag parts
are hot. There is a risk of injury.
Do not touch the airbag parts. Have a
deployed airbag replaced at a qualified
specialist workshop as soon as possible.
G WARNING
Pyrotechnic seat belt tensioners that have
been deployed are no longer operational
and are unable to perform their intended
protective function. This poses an
increased risk of injury or even fatal
injury.
Therefore, have pyrotechnic belt tensioners which have been triggered immediately
replaced at a qualified specialist workshop.
smart recommends that you have the vehicle
towed to a qualified specialist workshop
after an accident. Take this into account,
particularly if a seat belt tensioner was
triggered or an airbag was deployed.
If the belt tensioners are triggered or an
airbag is deployed, you will hear a bang,
and a small amount of powder may also be
released. The 6 restraint system warning lamp lights up.
Only in rare cases will the bang affect your
hearing. In general, the powder released is
not hazardous to health but may cause
short-term breathing difficulties to persons suffering from asthma or other pulmonary conditions. Provided it is safe to
do so, you should leave the vehicle immediately or open the window in order to prevent breathing difficulties.
Method of operation
During the first stage of a collision, the
restraint system control unit evaluates
important physical data relating to vehicle deceleration or acceleration, such as:
Rduration
Rdirection
Rintensity
Z
>> Safety.
Driver's kneebag : deploys under the
steering column. The driver's kneebag is
triggered together with the front airbags.
The driver's kneebag offers additional
thigh, knee and lower leg protection for the
occupant in the driver's seat.
45
>> Safety.
46
Children in the vehicle
Based on the evaluation of this data, the
restraint system control unit triggers the
seat belt tensioners in the event of a headon or rear collision.
A seat belt tensioner can only be triggered
if:
Rthe
ignition is switched on
components of the restraint system
are operational; see "Restraint system
warning lamp" (Y page 38)
Rthe belt tongue has engaged in the belt
buckle of the respective front seat
If the restraint system control unit detects
a high severity of an accident, in certain
head-on collisions, additional components of the restraint system are deployed
independently of each other:
Rthe
Rfront airbags and driver's kneebag
The front-passenger front airbag can only
be deployed in an accident if the
PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is
off. Observe the information on the
PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp
(Y page 39).
The activation threshold for the seat belt
tensioners and airbags is determined
based on the evaluation of the vehicle's
rate of deceleration or acceleration at
various points in the vehicle. This process
is pre-emptive in nature. The triggering/
deployment process should take place in
good time at the start of the collision.
The rate of vehicle deceleration or acceleration and the direction of the force are
essentially determined by:
Rthe
distribution of forces during the
collision
Rthe collision angle
Rthe deformation characteristics of the
vehicle
Rthe characteristics of the object with
which the vehicle has collided
Factors which can only be seen and measured after a collision has occurred do not
play a decisive role in the deployment of an
airbag, nor do they provide an indication
of airbag deployment.
The vehicle may be deformed significantly
without an airbag being deployed. This is
the case if only parts which are relatively
easily deformed are affected and the rate
of deceleration is not high. Conversely, an
airbag may be deployed even though the
vehicle suffers only minor deformation.
This is the case if, for example, very rigid
vehicle parts such as longitudinal body
members are hit, and sufficient deceleration occurs as a result.
If the restraint system control unit detects
a side impact, the applicable components
of the restraint system are activated independently of each other depending on the
apparent type of accident.
The head/thorax airbag will deploy on the
side on which an impact occurs, independent from the seat belt tensioner and seat
belt usage
i Not all airbags are deployed in an accident. The different airbag systems work
independently of each other.
How the airbag system works is determined by the severity of the accident
detected, especially the vehicle deceleration or acceleration, and the apparent type of accident:
Rhead-on
Rside
collision
impact
Children in the vehicle
Important safety notes
If a child younger than 12 years old and
under 1.50 m in height is travelling in the
vehicle:
Ralways
secure the child in a child
restraint system suitable for smart
vehicles. The child restraint system
must be appropriate to the age, weight
and size of the child
Rbe sure to observe the instructions and
safety notes in this section in addition
to the child restraint system manufacturer's installation instructions
G WARNING
If you leave children unattended in the
vehicle, they may be able to set the vehicle
in motion if, for example, they:
Rrelease
the parking brake
Rshift the automatic transmission out of
park position P or shift manual transmission into neutral
Rstart the engine
In addition, they may operate vehicle
equipment and become trapped. There is a
risk of an accident and injury.
When leaving the vehicle, always take the
key with you and lock the vehicle. Never
leave children unattended in the vehicle.
G WARNING
If persons (particularly children) are
exposed to heat or cold for a prolonged
period, there is a risk of serious or even
fatal injuries. Never leave persons (particularly children) unattended in the vehicle.
G WARNING
If the child restraint system is placed in
direct sunlight, the parts could become
very hot. Children could be suffer burns by
touching these parts, in particular on the
metallic parts of the child restraint system. There is a risk of injury.
If you and your child leave the vehicle,
always make sure that the child restraint
system is not in direct sunlight. Cover it
with a blanket, for example. If the child
restraint system has been exposed to direct
sunlight, leave it to cool down before
securing the child in it. Never leave children unattended in the vehicle.
Always ensure that all vehicle occupants
have their seat belts fastened correctly
and are sitting properly. Particular attention must be paid to children.
Observe the safety notes on the seat belt
(Y page 40) and the notes on correct use of
seat belts (Y page 41).
Child restraint system
Observe the instructions for correct use of
the child restraint system (Y page 53).
For safety reasons, smart recommends that
you only use a child restraint system recommended by smart (Y page 56).
G WARNING
If the child restraint system is incorrectly
fitted on the seat position suitable for this
purpose, it cannot perform its intended
protective function. In the event of an
accident, sharp braking or a sudden change
in direction, the child may not be held
securely. There is an increased risk of
serious or even fatal injuries.
Observe the manufacturer's installation
instructions and the correct use for the
child restraint system. Make sure that the
entire surface of the child restraint system
is resting on the seat surface. Never place
objects under or behind the child restraint
system, e.g. cushions. Only use child
restraint systems with the original cover
designed for them. Only replace damaged
covers with genuine covers.
G WARNING
If the child restraint system is fitted
incorrectly or is not secured, it can come
loose in the event of an accident, heavy
braking or a sudden change in direction.
The child restraint system could be thrown
about, striking vehicle occupants. There is
an increased risk of injury, possibly even
fatal.
Z
47
>> Safety.
Children in the vehicle
48
Children in the vehicle
>> Safety.
Always fit child restraint systems properly, even if they are not being used. Make
sure that you observe the child restraint
system manufacturer's installation
instructions.
You will find further information on stowing objects, luggage or loads under "Loading guidelines" (Y page 198).
G WARNING
Child restraint systems or their securing
systems that have been damaged or subjected to a load in an accident cannot perform
their intended protective function. In the
event of an accident, sharp braking or a
sudden change in direction, the child may
not be held securely. There is an increased
risk of serious or even fatal injuries.
Immediately replace child restraint systems that have been damaged or subjected to
a load in an accident. Have the child
restraint securing systems checked in a
qualified specialist workshop before fitting a child restraint system again.
Securing systems for child restraint systems include:
ISOFIX child seat securing system
G WARNING
ISOFIX child restraint systems do not offer
sufficient protective effect for children
whose weight is greater than 22 kg who are
secured using the safety belt integrated in
the child restraint system. The child could,
for example, not be restrained correctly in
the event of an accident. This poses an
increased risk of injury or even fatal
injury.
If the child weighs more than 22 kg, only use
ISOFIX child restraint systems with which
the child is also secured with the vehicle
seat belt. Also secure the child restraint
system with the Top Tether belt, if available.
When fitting a child restraint system, be
sure to observe the manufacturer's installation instructions and the instructions
for correct use of the child restraint system (Y page 53).
Before every trip, make sure that the ISOFIX child restraint system is engaged correctly in both ISOFIX securing rings.
Rthe
seat belt system
ISOFIX securing rings
Rthe Top Tether anchorages
Rthe
i If you install a child restraint system
on the front-passenger seat, make sure
that the backrest is securely engaged
(Y page 80).
i If a child is carried on the frontpassenger seat, be sure to observe the
information on "Child restraint systems
on the front-passenger seat"
(Y page 51). There you will also find
information on disabling the frontpassenger front airbag.
Observe the warning labels in the vehicle
interior and on the child restraint system.
: ISOFIX securing rings
X
Install the ISOFIX child restraint system
on both ISOFIX securing rings :.
ISOFIX is a standardised securing system
for specially designed child restraint
systems. ISOFIX securing rings : for an
ISOFIX child restraint system are fitted to
the front-passenger seat.
Children in the vehicle
Top Tether anchorages
>> Safety.
Secure child restraint systems without an
ISOFIX child seat securing system using
the seat belts in the vehicle. When fitting a
child restraint system, be sure to observe
the manufacturer's installation and operating instructions and the instructions for
correct use of the child restraint system
(Y page 53).
If you are using an ISOFIX child restraint
system on the front-passenger seat whereby
the child is not secured using the seat belt
of the front-passenger seat, the belt warning may be activated (Y page 42).
To deactivate the belt warning for the
front-passenger, proceed as follows:
: Loop
; Top Tether anchorage
X
Insert the seat belt tongue into the
buckle before the child restraint system
is fitted to the front-passenger seat.
X Then fit the ISOFIX child restraint system to the front-passenger seat (with
seat belt fastened).
Make sure that the seat belt does not
become damaged.
Top Tether
49
; Top Tether anchorage
= Top Tether hook
Introduction
? Top Tether belt
Top Tether provides an additional connection between the child restraint system
secured with ISOFIX and the vehicle. It
helps reduce the risk of injury even further. If the child restraint system is fitted
with a Top Tether belt, this should always
be used.
Top Tether anchorage ; is fitted to the
luggage compartment floor.
X Fit the ISOFIX child restraint system
with Top Tether. Always comply with the
child restraint system manufacturer's
installation instructions when doing so.
X Route Top Tether belt ? back over the
head restraint, keeping it as central as
possible, into the luggage compartment
through loop :.
X Hook Top Tether hook = of Top Tether
belt = into Top Tether anchorage ;.
Lift up the carpet a little if necessary.
Z
50
Children in the vehicle
Ensure that:
>> Safety.
RTop
Tether hook = is hooked into Top
Tether anchorage ; as shown.
RTop Tether belt ? is not twisted.
X Tension Top Tether belt ?. Always comply with the child restraint system manufacturer's installation instructions
when doing so.
Disabling/activating the frontpassenger front airbag
G WARNING
If the PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator
lamp is lit, the front-passenger front airbag is disabled. It will not be deployed in
the event of an accident and cannot perform
its intended protective function. A person
in the front-passenger seat could then, for
example, come into contact with the vehicle's interior, especially if the person is
sitting too close to the dashboard. This
poses an increased risk of injury or even
fatal injury.
In this case the front-passenger seat may
not be used. You may only transport a child
on the front-passenger seat if they are
seated in a suitable rearward or forwardfacing child restraint system. Always
observe the information about suitable
positioning of the child restraint system
in this Owner's Manual as well as the child
restraint system manufacturer's installation instructions.
G WARNING
If you secure a child on the co-driver's seat
in a rearward-facing child restraint system and the PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamp lights up, the co-driver's airbag
could be deployed in the event of an accident. The child could be struck by the airbag. There is an increased risk of injury,
possibly even fatal.
In this case, always ensure that the codriver's airbag is disabled. The
PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp must
light up.
If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator
lamp remains off and/or the PASSENGER AIR
BAG ON indicator lamp is lit, do not fit a
rearward-facing child restraint system to
the front-passenger seat. For more information, see "Problems with automatic
front-passenger airbag deactivation"
(Y page 53).
G WARNING
If you secure a child in a forward-facing
child restraint system on the frontpassenger seat and you position the frontpassenger seat too close to the dashboard,
in the event of an accident, the child could:
Rcome
into contact with the vehicle's
interior if the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF
indicator lamp is lit, for example
Rbe struck by the airbag if the PASSENGER
AIR BAG ON indicator lamp is on.
This poses an increased risk of injury or
even fatal injury.
Move the front-passenger seat as far back
as possible. Always make sure that the
shoulder belt strap is correctly routed
from the vehicle belt outlet to the shoulder
belt guide on the child restraint system.
The shoulder belt strap must be routed forwards and downwards from the vehicle belt
outlet. If necessary, adjust the frontpassenger seat accordingly. Additionally,
always observe the information on suitable
positioning of the child restraint system
in this Owner's Manual in addition to the
child restraint system manufacturer's
installation instructions.
Children in the vehicle
51
The passenger airbag is enabled when the
ignition is switched on unless the
passenger airbag has been manually disabled. If the passenger airbag is deactivated and the ignition is switched on, the
PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF 4 indicator
lamp in the overhead control panel
(Y page 39) lights up permanently.
Warning symbol for a rearward-facing child
restraint system
If you use a rearward-facing child
restraint system on the front-passenger
seat, you must disable the front-passenger
front airbag.
Child restraint system on the frontpassenger seat
General notes
If you secure a child in a child restraint
system on the front-passenger seat, always
observe the information on "Disabling the
front-passenger front airbag" (Y page 50).
You can thus avoid the risks that could
arise as a result of:
Rthe
enabling or disabling of the frontpassenger front airbag by mistake
Rthe unsuitable positioning of the child
restraint system, e.g. too close to the
dashboard
The airbag-off switch for manually activating and disabling the front-passenger
front airbag is in the dashboard on the
front-passenger side.
X
Push in airbag-off switch : beyond the
point of resistance.
X To disable the front-passenger front
airbag: turn airbag-off switch : anticlockwise.
The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF 4 indicator lamp on the overhead control panel
lights up and stays on when the ignition
is switched on (Y page 39).
X To activate the front-passenger front
airbag: turn airbag-off switch : clockwise.
The PASSENGER AIR BAG ON × indicator lamp on the overhead control panel
Please observe the warning notice on the
front-passenger sun visor, see the illustration.
G WARNING
If you secure a child in a child restraint
system on the front-passenger seat and the
PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is
Z
>> Safety.
lights up and stays on when the ignition
is switched on (Y page 39).
>> Safety.
52
Children in the vehicle
off, the front-passenger front airbag can
deploy in the event of an accident. The
child could be struck by the airbag. This
poses an increased risk of injury or even
fatal injury.
Make sure that the front-passenger front
airbag has been disabled. The PASSENGER
AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp must be lit.
NEVER use a rearward facing child
restraint on a seat protected by an ACTIVE
AIRBAG in front of it, DEATH or SERIOUS
INJURY to the CHILD can occur.
Rearward-facing child restraint system
Warning symbol for a rearward-facing child
restraint system
If you secure a child in a rearward-facing
child restraint system on the frontpassenger seat, always make sure that the
front-passenger front airbag is disabled.
Only if the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is permanently lit (Y page 39) is
the front-passenger front airbag disabled.
Always observe the information on suitable
positioning of the child restraint system
(Y page 53) in addition to the child
restraint system manufacturer's installation and operating instructions.
Forward-facing child restraint system
If you secure a child in a forward-facing
child restraint system on the frontpassenger seat, always move the frontpassenger seat as far back as possible.
Always make sure that the shoulder belt
strap is correctly routed from the frontpassenger seat belt guide to the shoulder
belt guide on the child restraint system.
The shoulder belt strap must be routed forwards and downwards from the frontpassenger seat belt guide. If necessary,
adjust the front-passenger seat accordingly.
Children in the vehicle
53
Problems with automatic front-passenger airbag deactivation
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
The PASSENGER AIR
The front-passenger airbag has been disabled manually
BAG OFF 4 indica- (Y page 50).
tor lamp on the over- X Nobody may use the front-passenger seat unless a suitable
head control panel is
rearward-facing child restraint system is being used.
lit.
The front-passenger airbag has not been disabled manually
(Y page 50). The airbag deactivation is malfunctioning.
X Do not use a rearward-facing child restraint system on the
front-passenger seat.
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
The PASSENGER AIR
The passenger airbag has been manually activated (Y page 50).
BAG OFF × indica- The system operates correctly.
tor lamp on the over- X Do not use a rearward-facing child restraint system on the
head control panel is
front-passenger seat.
lit.
The PASSENGER AIR
The airbag system is malfunctioning.
BAG ON × indica- X Nobody may use the front-passenger seat.
tor lamp does not light X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
up if the passenger
airbag on the overhead control panel was
activated manually.
Suitable positioning of the child
restraint system
Introduction
Only child restraint systems which are
approved in accordance with the ECE standard ECE R44 are permitted for use in the
vehicle.
For certain child restraint systems in
weight categories II or III, this can mean
that the area of use is restricted. The maximum size setting of the child restraint
system is not possible due to possible contact with the roof.
"Universal" category child restraint systems can be recognised by their orange
approval label and the text "Universal".
Example: approval label on the child restraint
system
"Universal" category child restraint systems can be used on the seats indicated
with U, UF or IUF according to the tables
"Suitability of the seats for attaching
belt-secured child restraint systems" or
Z
>> Safety.
Problem
Children in the vehicle
>> Safety.
54
"Suitability of the seats for attaching an
ISOFIX child restraint system".
Semi-universal child restraint systems
are indicated by the text "Semi-universal"
on the approval label. These can be used if
the vehicle and the seat are listed in the
child restraint system manufacturer's
vehicle model list. For more information,
contact the child restraint system manufacturer or visit their website.
Child restraint system on the frontpassenger seat – if you secure a child in a
child restraint system on the frontpassenger seat:
X
Always pay attention to the instructions
under "Child restraint system on the
front-passenger seat" (Y page 51).
There you will find instructions on how
to correctly route the shoulder belt strap
from the vehicle belt outlet to the shoulder belt guide on the child restraint system (Y page 52).
X Move the front-passenger seat as far
back as possible.
X Move the backrest to an almost vertical
position.
The base of the child restraint system
must lie fully against the seat cushion of
the front-passenger seat. The back of a
forward-facing child restraint system
must lie as flat as possible against the
front-passenger backrest. The child
restraint system must not touch the roof
or be subjected to a load by the head
restraint. Adjust the backrest angle
accordingly. Also observe the child
restraint system manufacturer's installation instructions.
Children in the vehicle
55
In addition, always observe the information given under "Child restraint system"
(Y page 47), as well as the child restraint system manufacturer's installation instructions.
Legend for the table:
X
U
Seat which is unsuitable for children in this weight category.
Suitable for child restraint systems in the "Universal" category that are approved for
use in this weight category.
UF Suitable for forward-facing child restraint systems that belong to the "Universal"
category and are approved for use in this weight category.
L Suitable for child restraint systems as recommended, see the table of "Recommended
child restraint systems" (Y page 56). Suitable for semi-universal child-restraint
systems if the vehicle and the seat are listed in the child restraint system manufacturer's vehicle model list.
Front-passenger seat
Weight categories
Front-passenger front air- Front-passenger front airbag is activated
bag is deactivated1
Category 0: up to 10 kg
X
U, L
Category 0+: up to 13 kg
X
U, L
Category I: 9 to 18 kg
UF, L
U, L
Category II: 15 to 25 kg
UF, L
U, L
Category III: 22 to 36 kg
U, L
U, L
Suitability of the seats for attaching ISOFIX child restraint systems
In addition, always observe the information given under "Child restraint system"
(Y page 47), as well as the child restraint system manufacturer's installation instructions.
Legend for the table:
X
ISOFIX position that is not suitable for ISOFIX child restraint systems in this
weight category and/or size category.
IUF Suitable for forward-facing ISOFIX child seat securing systems that belong to the
"universal" category which are approved for use in this weight category.
IL Suitable for ISOFIX child restraint systems as recommended; see the following table
of "Recommended child restraint systems" (Y page 56).
The manufacturer will also recommend a suitable ISOFIX child restraint system. For
this, your vehicle and the seat must be listed in the child restraint system manufacturer's model list. For more information, contact the child restraint system
manufacturer or visit their website.
1
The front-passenger front airbag must be deactivated. The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp must
be on.
Z
>> Safety.
Suitability of the seats for attaching belt-secured child restraint systems
Children in the vehicle
56
Weight category
>> Safety.
Carry-cot
Size category
Equipment
Frontpassenger
seat
F
ISO/L1
X
G
ISO/L2
X
0
up to 10 kg
up to approximately 6 months
E
ISO/R1
IL1
0+
up to 13 kg
up to approximately 15 months
E
ISO/R1
IL1
D
ISO/R2
IL1
C
ISO/R3
IL1
D
ISO/R2
IL1
C
ISO/R3
IL1
B
ISO/F2
IUF
B1
ISO/F2X
IUF
A
ISO/F3
IUF
I
9 kg up to 18 kg
between approximately
9 months and 4 years
Recommended child restraint systems
General notes
Always observe the information in "Child restraint systems on the front-passenger seat"
(Y page 51) and in "Suitable positioning of the child restraint system" (Y page 53).
You can obtain further information about the correct child restraint system from any
smart centre.
The smart fortwo does not have automatic child seat recognition.
X
Before using a rearward-facing child restraint on the front-passenger seat, disable
the front-passenger airbag (Y page 50).
1
The front-passenger front airbag must be deactivated. The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp must
be on.
Children in the vehicle
57
Recommended child restraint systems for attaching with the vehicle seat belt
Manufacturer
Category 0:
up to 10 kg
up to approximately 6 months
Type
Approval number
(E1 ...)
Order number
(A 000 ...)2
Britax Römer BABY SAFE
PLUS
03 301146
04 301146
970 10 00
BABY SAFE
plus II
04 301146
970 20 00
Category 0+:
up to 13 kg
up to approximately 15 months
Britax Römer BABY SAFE
PLUS
03 301146
04 301146
970 10 00
BABY SAFE
plus II
04 301146
970 20 00
Category I:
9 kg up to 18 kg
between approximately 9 months
and 4 years
Britax Römer DUO PLUS
03 301133
04 301133
970 16 00
Category II/III:
15 kg up to 36 kg
from approximately 4 years to
12 years
Britax Römer KIDFIX3
04 301198
970 19 00
>> Safety.
Weight category
Recommended ISOFIX child restraint systems for the "Universal"/"Semi-Universal"
category
2
3
Weight cate- Size category
gory
Manufacturer
Type
Approval
number
(E1 ...)
Order number2
Category 0+: E
up to 13 kg
Britax
Römer
BABY SAFE
plus
03 301146
04 301146
B6 6 86 8224
Category I:
9 kg up to
18 kg
Britax
Römer
DUO PLUS
03 301133
04 301133
A 000 970 16
00
B1
Colour code 9H95
Before fitting the KIDFIX child restraint system in the vehicle, always observe the child restraint
system manufacturer's installation instructions. These also contain information on the different
installation methods possible.
Z
Protection against theft
58
>> Safety.
Pets in the vehicle
G WARNING
If you leave animals unsupervised or unsecured in the vehicle, they may push a button
or a switch, for example.
They could:
Ractivate
vehicle equipment and become
trapped, for example
Rswitch vehicle systems on or off, thus
endangering other road users
In the event of an accident, sudden braking
or abrupt changes of direction, unsecured
animals could be flung around the vehicle,
injuring the vehicle occupants. There is a
risk of an accident and injury.
Never leave animals unattended in the
vehicle. Always secure animals correctly
during a journey, e.g. in an animal transport box.
Protection against theft
Immobiliser
The immobiliser prevents your vehicle
from being started without the correct key.
X To activate: remove the key from the
ignition lock.
X To deactivate: switch on the ignition.
When leaving the vehicle, always take the
key with you and lock the vehicle. The
engine can be started by anyone with a
valid key that is left inside the vehicle.
i The immobiliser is always deactivated
when you start the engine.
Rthe
side windows are closed.
objects, such as mascots, are hanging from the rear-view mirror or grab
handles.
This will prevent false alarms.
X Make sure that:
Rthe doors are closed.
Rthe tailgate is closed
Rthe service cover is closed.
X Press the & button on the key.
The alarm system is primed after approximately 30 seconds.
i If the service cover is open or is not
properly closed, the vehicle will be
locked. The anti-theft alarm system is
primed. To remind you that the service
cover is not secured, a warning tone
sounds for 30 seconds. Ensure that the
service cover is properly closed. Only
then is the anti-theft alarm system correctly primed and the service cover
properly secured.
Rno
Deactivating
X Press the % button on the key.
or
X Unlock the vehicle by using the key in the
emergency lock.
and
Switch the ignition on.
Examples for triggering the alarm
A visual and audible alarm is triggered if
the alarm system is primed and you open:
Rthe vehicle by using the key in the emer-
gency lock
door
Rthe tailgate
Rthe service cover
Ra
Anti-theft alarm system
Activating
X
Make sure that:
Switching off the alarm
X
To switch off the alarm: press the %
button on the key.
The alarm is switched off.
or
X Insert the key into the ignition lock.
The alarm is switched off.
The alarm is not switched off, even if you
close the open door that has triggered it,
for example.
Driving safety systems
minimum tyre tread depths, etc.
(Y page 240).
In wintry driving conditions, always use
winter tyres (M+S tyres) and, if necessary,
snow chains. Only in this way will the driving safety systems described in this section work as effectively as possible.
For safety reasons, smart recommends that
you only use snow chains that have been
specially approved for your vehicle by
smart, or fine-link snow chains that are of
a corresponding standard of quality. For
more information, please contact a qualified specialist workshop.
Driving safety systems overview
In this section, you will find information
about the following driving safety systems:
Rabs
(Anti-lock Braking System)
(Y page 59)
RDistance warning function (Y page 60)
Resp® (Electronic Stability Program)
(Y page 61)
REBD (electronic brake force distribution) (Y page 62)
Important safety notes
If you fail to adapt your driving style or if
you are inattentive, the driving safety systems can neither reduce the risk of accident nor override the laws of physics. Driving safety systems are merely aids
designed to assist driving. You are
responsible for the distance to the vehicle
in front, for vehicle speed and for braking
in good time. Always adapt your driving
style to suit the prevailing road, weather
and traffic conditions and maintain a safe
distance from the vehicle in front. Drive
carefully.
The driving safety systems described only
work as effectively as possible when there
is adequate contact between the tyres and
the road surface. Please pay special attention to the notes on tyres, recommended
ABS (Anti-lock Braking System)
General notes
abs regulates brake pressure in such a way
that the wheels do not lock when you brake.
This allows you to continue steering the
vehicle when braking.
The ! abs warning lamp in the instrument cluster lights up when the ignition is
switched on. It goes out when the engine is
running.
Important safety notes
i Observe the "Important safety notes"
section for driving safety systems
(Y page 59).
When abs is malfunctioning, other systems,
including driving safety systems, will also
become inoperative. Observe the information on the abs warning lamp (Y page 185)
and display messages which may be shown
in the instrument cluster (Y page 170).
G WARNING
If ABS is faulty, the wheels could lock when
braking. The steerability and braking
characteristics may be severely impaired.
Additionally, further driving safety systems are deactivated. There is an increased
danger of skidding and accidents.
Z
59
>> Safety.
Driving safety systems
Driving safety systems
60
>> Safety.
Drive on carefully. Have ABS checked immediately at a qualified specialist workshop.
abs works from a speed of about 6 km/h,
regardless of road-surface conditions. abs
works on slippery surfaces, even when you
only brake gently.
Braking
X
If abs intervenes: continue to depress
the brake pedal with force until the
braking situation is over.
X To make a full brake application:
depress the brake pedal with full force.
If abs intervenes when braking, you will
feel a pulsing in the brake pedal.
The pulsating brake pedal can be an indication of hazardous road conditions, and
functions as a reminder to take extra care
while driving.
Distance warning function
General notes
The distance warning function can help you
to minimise the risk of a collision with a
vehicle ahead or reduce the effects of such
an accident. If the distance warning function detects that there is a risk of a collision, you will be warned visually and
acoustically.
Starting the engine also switches on the
distance warning function.
Important safety notes
G WARNING
The distance warning function does not
react:
Rto
people or animals
oncoming vehicles
Rto crossing traffic
Rwhen cornering
Rto
Thus, the distance warning function cannot
provide a warning in all critical situations. There is a risk of an accident.
Always pay careful attention to the traffic
situation and be ready to brake.
G WARNING
The distance warning function cannot
always clearly identify objects and complex traffic situations.
In such cases, the distance warning function may:
Rgive
an unnecessary warning
give a warning
There is a risk of an accident.
Always pay careful attention to the traffic
situation; do not rely on the distance warning function alone.
Rnot
Observe the "Important safety notes" section for driving safety systems (Y page 59).
In particular, the detection of obstacles
can be impaired if there is:
Rdirt on the sensors or anything else cov-
ering the sensors
or heavy rain
Rinterference by other radar sources
Rthe possibility of strong radar reflections, for example, in multi-storey car
parks
Ra narrow vehicle travelling in front, e.g.
a motorcycle
Ra vehicle travelling in front on a different line
Rnew vehicles or after a service on the
distance warning system
Please observe the information in the
section on running-in the vehicle
(Y page 114).
Following damage to the front end of the
vehicle, have the configuration and operation of the radar sensor checked at a
qualified specialist workshop. This also
applies to collisions at slow speeds where
Rsnow
Driving safety systems
Function
Up to a speed of around 70 km/h, the distance warning function can also react to
stationary obstacles, such as stopped or
parked vehicles.
ESP® (Electronic Stability Program)
General notes
i Observe the "Important safety notes"
section (Y page 59).
X
To switch off: press button ;.
Indicator lamp : lights up.
X To switch on: press button ;.
Indicator lamp : goes out.
The distance warning function issues a
warning at speeds:
Rof
around 30 km/h or more, if, over several seconds, the distance maintained to
the vehicle travelling in front is insufficient. The · distance warning lamp
then lights up in the instrument cluster.
Rof around 7 km/h or more, if you rapidly
approach a vehicle in front. An intermittent warning tone will then sound and
the · distance warning lamp will
light up in the instrument cluster.
X Brake immediately in order to increase
the distance from the vehicle in front.
or
X Take evasive action provided it is safe
to do so.
Due to the nature of the system, particularly complicated but non-critical driving conditions may also cause the system to
display a warning.
With the help of the radar sensor system,
the distance warning function can detect
obstacles that are in the path of your vehicle for an extended period of time.
esp® monitors driving stability and traction, i.e. power transmission between the
tyres and the road surface.
If esp® detects that the vehicle is deviating from the direction desired by the
driver, one or more wheels are braked to
stabilise the vehicle. The engine output is
also modified to keep the vehicle on the
desired course within physical limits.
esp® assists the driver when pulling away
on wet or slippery roads. esp® can also stabilise the vehicle during braking.
ETS (Electronic Traction System)
i Observe the "Important safety notes"
section (Y page 59).
ETS traction control is part of esp®.
ETS brakes the drive wheels individually if
they spin. This enables you to pull away and
accelerate on slippery surfaces, for example if the road surface is slippery on one
side. In addition, more drive torque is
transferred to the wheel with traction.
Important safety notes
G WARNING
If ESP® is malfunctioning, ESP® is unable to
stabilise the vehicle. In addition, other
driving safety systems are switched off.
This increases the risk of skidding and an
accident.
Drive on carefully. Have ESP® checked at a
qualified specialist workshop.
Z
>> Safety.
there is no visible damage to the front of
the vehicle.
61
Driving safety systems
62
! If you test the parking brake using a
>> Safety.
brake dynamometer, switch the ignition
off. Application of the brakes by ESP®
may otherwise destroy the brake system.
Observe the notes on esp® when towing away
your vehicle with the rear axle raised
(Y page 232).
If the ÷ esp® warning lamp lights up
permanently, esp® or hill start assist are
unavailable due to a malfunction.
Observe the information on warning lamps
(Y page 187) and display messages which
may be shown in the instrument cluster
(Y page 171).
i Only use wheels with the recommended
tyre sizes. Only then will esp® function
properly.
Characteristics of ESP®
General notes
If the ÷ esp® warning lamp goes out
before the journey begins, esp® is automatically active.
If esp® intervenes, the ÷ esp® warning
lamp flashes in the instrument cluster.
If esp® intervenes:
X
When pulling away, only depress the
accelerator pedal as far as is necessary.
X Adapt your driving style to suit the prevailing road and weather conditions.
crosswind assist
General notes
Strong crosswind gusts can impair the
roadholding of your vehicle when driving
straight ahead. The crosswind driving
assistance function integrated in esp®
noticeably reduces these impairments.
Depending on the direction and intensity
of the side wind, esp® is activated automatically.
esp® intervenes with stabilising braking
to assist you in keeping the vehicle in the
lane.
crosswind assist is active at vehicle
speeds above 70 km/h when driving straight
ahead or cornering gently.
Important safety notes
crosswind assist does not work if esp® is
disabled because of a malfunction.
EBD (electronic brake force distribution)
General notes
EBD monitors and controls the brake pressure on the rear wheels to improve driving
stability while braking.
Important safety notes
i Observe the "Important safety notes"
section (Y page 59).
G WARNING
If EBD is malfunctioning, the rear wheels
can lock, e.g. under full braking. This
increases the risk of skidding and an accident.
You should therefore adapt your driving
style to the different handling characteristics. Have the brake system checked at a
qualified specialist workshop.
Observe information regarding indicator
and warning lamps (Y page 187) as well as
display messages (Y page 169).
63
Useful information ............................ 64
Key ................................................ 64
Doors .............................................. 68
Luggage compartment ......................... 71
Operating the roller sunblind for the
panoramic roof ................................. 75
>> Opening and closing.
Side windows .................................... 72
64
Key
Useful information
>> Opening and closing.
i This Owner's Manual describes all models, series and optional equipment for
your vehicle that were available at the
time of going to press. Country-specific
differences are possible. Note that your
vehicle may not be fitted with all features described. This is also the case for
systems and functions relevant to safety.
i Read the information on qualified specialist workshops: (Y page 21).
! Keep the key away from strong magnetic
fields. Otherwise, the remote control
function could be affected.
Strong magnetic fields can occur in the
vicinity of powerful electrical installations.
Do not keep the key:
Rwith
Key
Important safety notes
G WARNING
If children are left unattended in the vehicle, they could:
doors, thus endangering other people or road users
Rexit the vehicle and be caught by oncoming traffic
Roperate vehicle equipment and become
trapped
Children could also set the vehicle in
motion by, for example:
Ropen
Rreleasing
Rshifting
cause the engine to be switched off. There
is a risk of an accident.
Do not attach any heavy or large objects to
the key. Remove any bulky keyrings before
inserting the key into the ignition lock.
the parking brake
the manual transmission into
neutral
Rstarting
the engine
There is a risk of an accident and injury.
When leaving the vehicle, always take the
key with you and lock the vehicle. Never
leave children and animals unattended in
the vehicle. Keep the key out of the reach of
children.
G WARNING
If you attach heavy or large objects to the
key, the key could be unintentionally
turned in the ignition lock. This could
electronic devices, e.g. a mobile
phone or another key
Rwith metallic objects, e.g. coins or metal
film
Rwith metallic objects, e.g. a metal case
Only for England:
G WARNING
When the double locks are activated, the
doors can no longer be opened from the
inside. People in the vehicle can no longer
get out, e.g. in hazardous situations. There
is a risk of injury.
Therefore, do not leave any people unsupervised in the vehicle, particularly children, elderly people or people in need of
special assistance. Do not activate the
double lock when people are in the vehicle.
The double-lock function is activated if
you press the locking button twice when
locking the vehicle. It is then not possible
to open the doors from inside the vehicle.
G WARNING
If persons (particularly children) are
exposed to heat or cold for a prolonged
period, there is a risk of serious or even
fatal injuries. Never leave persons (particularly children) unattended in the vehicle.
Key
Key functions
65
Battery of the key
G WARNING
Batteries contain toxic and corrosive substances. If batteries are swallowed, it can
result in severe health problems. There is a
risk of fatal injury.
Keep batteries out of the reach of children.
If a battery is swallowed, seek medical
attention immediately.
: % Unlocks the vehicle
; º Opens the tailgate
= & Locks the vehicle
X
To unlock centrally: press button :.
If you do not open the vehicle within
approximately 2 minutes of unlocking:
Rthe
vehicle is locked again.
against theft is reactivated
X To unlock and open the tailgate: press
and hold button ; on the key.
Rprotection
X
To lock centrally: press button =.
The key centrally locks/unlocks:
Rthe
doors
tailgate
Rthe fuel filler flap
When unlocking, the turn signals flash
once. When locking, they flash twice.
Only for England:
X To activate the double-lock function:
press button = twice.
It is then not possible to open the doors
from inside the vehicle.
Rthe
H Environmental note
Batteries contain pollutants. It is illegal to dispose of them with the
household rubbish. They
must be collected separately and disposed of in an
environmentally responsible recycling system.
Dispose of batteries in an
environmentally responsible manner. Take discharged batteries to a
qualified specialist workshop or to a collection
point for used batteries.
smart recommends that you have the batteries changed at a qualified specialist
workshop.
Replacing the battery
You require a CR 2016 3V cell battery.
Upon activation of the double-lock function, the turn signals flash twice long and
three times short.
Z
>> Opening and closing.
Important safety notes
Key
66
>> Opening and closing.
X
Remove screw : turning anti-clockwise
using a suitably sized Phillips screwdriver and put in a safe place.
X
Insert a suitable tool, e.g. a coin, into
the opening of the key. Turn the tool until
battery tray cover ; opens. When doing
so, do not hold cover ; shut.
X Remove battery tray cover ;.
X
Remove battery =.
Insert the new battery with the positive
terminal facing upwards. Use a lint-free
cloth to do so.
X Make sure that the surface of the battery
is free from lint, grease and all other
forms of contamination.
X Insert battery tray cover ; into the
housing and press to close.
X Replace screw : and tighten clockwise
using a suitably sized Phillips screw
driver.
X Check the function of all key buttons on
the vehicle.
X
Key
67
Problem
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
You cannot lock or
unlock the vehicle
using the key.
The key battery is discharged or nearly discharged.
X Try again to lock/unlock the vehicle using the remote control
function of the key. Do this by pressing the % or &
button in the immediate vicinity of the vehicle.
If this does not work:
X Change the key battery if necessary (Y page 65).
X Unlock the vehicle with the key in the emergency lock
(Y page 70) or lock the vehicle with the emergency locking
(Y page 70).
There is interference from a powerful source of radio waves.
X Try again to lock/unlock the vehicle using the remote control
function of the key. Do this by pressing the % or &
button in the immediate vicinity of the vehicle.
The key is faulty.
X Unlock the vehicle with the key in the emergency lock
(Y page 70) or lock the vehicle with the emergency locking
(Y page 70).
X Have the key checked at a qualified specialist workshop.
You have lost a key.
X
Have the key deactivated at a qualified specialist workshop.
Report the loss immediately to the vehicle insurers.
X If necessary, have the locks changed as well.
X
The engine cannot be The on-board voltage is too low.
started using the key. X Switch off non-essential consumers, e.g. seat heating or
interior lighting, and try to start the engine again.
If this does not work:
Check the starter battery and charge it if necessary
(Y page 225).
or
X Jump-start the vehicle (Y page 228).
or
X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
X
The steering lock is mechanically blocked.
Remove the key and reinsert it into the ignition lock. When
you turn the key, turn the steering wheel in both directions.
X
Z
>> Opening and closing.
Problems with the key
68
Doors
Doors
Important safety notes
G WARNING
>> Opening and closing.
If children are left unattended in the vehicle, they could:
doors, thus endangering other people or road users
Rexit the vehicle and be caught by oncoming traffic
Roperate vehicle equipment and become
trapped
Children could also set the vehicle in
motion by, for example:
Ropen
If you press the locking button on the key
twice when locking the vehicle:
Rthe
turn signals flash twice long and
three times short
Rthe double-lock function is activated
It is then not possible to open the doors
from inside the vehicle.
Unlocking and opening the doors from
the inside
Rreleasing
Rshifting
the parking brake
the manual transmission into
neutral
Rstarting
the engine
There is a risk of an accident and injury.
When leaving the vehicle, always take the
key with you and lock the vehicle. Never
leave children and animals unattended in
the vehicle. Keep the key out of the reach of
children.
Preferably stow luggage or loads in the
luggage compartment. Observe the loading
guidelines (Y page 198).
Only for England:
G WARNING
When the double locks are activated, the
doors can no longer be opened from the
inside. People in the vehicle can no longer
get out, e.g. in hazardous situations. There
is a risk of injury.
Therefore, do not leave any people unsupervised in the vehicle, particularly children, elderly people or people in need of
special assistance. Do not activate the
double lock when people are in the vehicle.
X
Pull door handle :.
The door opens.
You can open a door from inside the vehicle
even if it has been locked.
X Pull door handle :.
The door unlocks and opens.
If the vehicle has previously been locked
with the key, opening a door from the
inside will trigger the anti-theft alarm
system. Switch off the alarm (Y page 59).
For England only:
If when locking the vehicle you press twice
on the locking button on the key:
Rthe
turn signals flash long twice and
short three times
Rthe double-lock function is activated
It is then not possible to open the doors
from inside the vehicle.
Doors
You can centrally lock or unlock the vehicle
from the inside. This can be useful if you
wish to lock the vehicle before pulling
away, for example.
X
To lock: when the vehicle is unlocked,
press button :.
If all the doors and the tailgate are
closed, the vehicle locks. Indicator
lamp ; lights up.
X To lock the vehicle from inside when
getting out: open the driver's door.
The front-passenger door and the tailgate must be closed.
X Press the locking button (Y page 69).
X Close the driver's door within 5 seconds.
Do not leave the key in the vehicle. You
could otherwise lock yourself out.
The doors, tailgate and fuel filler flap
are locked. The anti-theft alarm system
is primed.
X Make sure that the doors and the tailgate
are locked.
X To unlock: when the vehicle is locked,
press button :.
The vehicle is unlocked. Indicator
lamp ; goes out.
You can open a door from inside the vehicle
even if it has been locked.
If the vehicle has previously been locked
with the key, opening a door from the
inside will trigger the anti-theft alarm
system. Switch off the alarm (Y page 59).
If a locked door is opened from the inside,
the previous unlocking is taken into
account, if:
Rit was locked using the locking button for
the central locking, or
was locked automatically
The vehicle will be fully unlocked if it had
previously been fully unlocked. If only the
driver's door had been previously
unlocked, then only the door which has been
opened form the inside is unlocked.
You cannot unlock the vehicle centrally
from the inside if the vehicle has been
locked with the key.
Only for England:
If you press the locking button on the key
twice when locking the vehicle:
Rit
Rthe
turn signals flash twice long and
three times short
Rthe double-lock function is activated
It is then not possible to open the doors
from inside the vehicle.
Automatic locking feature
X
To deactivate: with the ignition
switched on, press and hold button : for
about five seconds until a tone sounds.
X To activate with the ignition switched
on, press and hold button : for about
five seconds until a tone sounds.
The vehicle is locked automatically when
the ignition is switched on and the wheels
are turning.
Z
>> Opening and closing.
Centrally locking or unlocking the
vehicle from the inside
69
Doors
70
You could therefore be locked out if:
>> Opening and closing.
Rthe
vehicle is being pushed.
Rthe vehicle is being towed.
Rthe vehicle is being tested on a dynamometer.
You can also switch the automatic locking
function on or off in the smart Media-System; see the separate operating instructions.
Unlocking the driver's door (emergency lock)
If you can no longer unlock the vehicle
using the remote control key, use the emergency lock.
If you use the key in the emergency lock to
unlock and open the driver's door, the antitheft alarm system will be triggered.
Switch off the alarm (Y page 59).
X Carefully remove the cover from the
emergency lock.
X Insert the key into the emergency lock of
the driver's door as far as it will go.
i For right-hand-drive vehicles, the key
must be inserted into the emergency lock
of the passenger's door.
X
Turn the key anti-clockwise as far as it
will go to position 1.
The door is unlocked.
X Turn the key back and remove it.
X Replace the cover on the emergency lock
and press until it engages.
Locking the driver's door (emergency
locking)
If you can no longer lock the vehicle using
the remote control key, use the locking button on the instrument cluster (Y page 69).
X Open the driver's door.
X Close the front-passenger door and the
tailgate.
X Press the locking button (Y page 69).
X Close the driver's door within 5 seconds.
Do not leave the key in the vehicle. You
could otherwise lock yourself out.
The doors, tailgate and fuel filler flap
are locked. The anti-theft alarm system
is primed.
X Make sure that the doors and the tailgate
are locked.
If this does not work, use the emergency
locking.
X Open the driver's door.
X Close the front-passenger door and the
tailgate.
X Press the locking button (Y page 69).
X Check whether the front-passenger door
is locked. If necessary, carry out the following steps on both doors.
X
X
Insert the tip of the key into slit :.
Turn the key anti-clockwise as far as it
will go to position 2.
On the passenger door, the direction of
rotation is reversed.
Luggage compartment
ficient clearance above, behind and
below the tailgates.
i For right-hand-drive vehicles, the key
X
Close the driver's door.
X Check that the doors are locked.
i If you lock the vehicle using the emergency locking, the tailgate and fuel
filler flap are not locked. The anti-theft
alarm system is not primed.
i The opening dimensions of the tailgate
can be found in the "Vehicle data" section (Y page 265).
Preferably stow luggage or loads in the
luggage compartment. Observe the loading
guidelines (Y page 198).
Do not leave the key in the luggage compartment. You could otherwise lock yourself out.
Luggage compartment
Important safety notes
G WARNING
Combustion engines emit poisonous
exhaust gases such as carbon monoxide. If
the tailgate is open when the engine is
running, particularly if the vehicle is
moving, exhaust fumes could enter the
passenger compartment. There is a risk of
poisoning.
Turn off the engine before opening the
tailgate. Never drive with the tailgate
open.
G WARNING
If objects, luggage or loads are not secured
or not secured sufficiently, they could
slip, tip over or be flung around and
thereby hit vehicle occupants. There is a
risk of injury, especially when braking or
abruptly changing directions.
Always store objects so that they cannot be
flung around. Secure objects, luggage or
loads against slipping or tipping before
the journey.
Opening or closing
Opening the upper tailgate
X
If the vehicle is locked, first press the
% button on the key.
Press button :.
The upper tailgate is now unlocked.
or
X Press and hold the º button on the key.
The upper tailgate opens slightly.
X Swing the upper tailgate up.
! Do not exceed the lower tailgate maximum load of 100 kg. It may otherwise
become damaged.
! The tailgates swing to the rear, both
upwards and downwards, when opened.
Therefore, make sure that there is sufZ
>> Opening and closing.
in the driver's door must be turned
clockwise.
71
Side windows
72
>> Opening and closing.
Opening the lower tailgate
press the switch to open the side window
again.
G WARNING
Children could become trapped if they
operate the side windows, particularly
when unattended. There is a risk of injury.
When leaving the vehicle, always take the
key with you and lock the vehicle. Never
leave children unattended in the vehicle.
X
Pull release catch : upwards.
Swing the lower tailgate down.
Closing the tailgate
X
Swing the lower tailgate upwards until it
engages audibly.
X Pull the upper tailgate down and push
closed.
X If necessary, lock the vehicle with the
& button on the key.
Side windows
Important safety notes
G WARNING
While closing the side windows, body parts
in the closing area could become trapped.
There is a risk of injury.
When closing make sure that no parts of the
body are in the closing area. If somebody
becomes trapped, release the switch or
Side window reversing feature
In vehicles with the comfort package, the
side windows are equipped with an automatic reversing feature. If a solid object
blocks or restricts a side window from
travelling upwards during the automatic
closing process, the side window opens
again automatically. During the manual
closing process, the side window only
opens again automatically after the corresponding switch is released. The automatic
reversing feature is only an aid and is no
substitute for your attention when closing
a side window.
G WARNING
The reversing function does not react:
Rto soft, light and thin objects, e.g. small
fingers
resetting
This means that the reversing feature cannot prevent someone being trapped in these
situations. There is a risk of injury.
When closing, make sure that no parts of the
body are in the closing area. If someone
becomes trapped, press the switch to open
the side window again.
Rwhile
G WARNING
If you close a side window again immediately after it has been blocked or reset, the
side window closes with increased or maximum force. The reversing function is then
not active. Parts of the body could be trap-
ped in the closing area in the process. This
poses an increased risk of injury or even
fatal injury.
Make sure that no parts of the body are in
the closing area. To stop the closing process, release the switch or push the switch
again to reopen the side window.
Opening or closing the side windows
The switches for both side windows are
located on the driver's door. There is also a
switch for the front-passenger side window
on the front-passenger door.
The switch on the driver’s door takes precedence.
To close fully: pull the button beyond the
point of resistance and release it.
Automatic closing is started.
X To interrupt automatic opening/closing:
press/pull the corresponding switch
again.
i If you press the switch beyond the point
of resistance while opening, automatic
operation is started. In vehicles with
the comfort package, you can also start
automatic operation when closing. To do
so, pull the switch beyond the point of
resistance.
You can stop automatic operation by
pressing again.
i You can continue to operate the side
windows after turning the key to position
0 in the ignition lock or removing the
key. This function remains active for 3
minutes or until you open a door.
Resetting the side windows
You must reset each side window if:
Rthe
: Left
; Right
X
Turn the key to position 1 or 2 in the
ignition lock.
X To open manually: press and hold the corresponding button.
X To open fully: press the button beyond the
point of resistance and release it.
Automatic closing is started.
X To close manually: pull the corresponding button and hold it.
X Vehicles with the comfort package:
side window opens again slightly
after being closed fully.
Rthe side window can no longer be fully
opened or closed.
X Close all doors.
X Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition
lock.
X Pull the corresponding switch on the
door control panel until the side window
is completely closed (Y page 73).
X Hold the switch for an additional second.
If the side window opens again slightly:
X
Immediately pull the corresponding
switch on the door control panel until the
side window is completely closed
(Y page 73).
X Hold the switch for an additional second.
X If the corresponding side window
remains closed after the button has been
released, the side window has been reset
Z
73
>> Opening and closing.
Side windows
74
Side windows
>> Opening and closing.
correctly. If this is not the case, repeat
the steps above again.
Operating the roller sunblind for the panoramic roof
75
Problems with the side windows
If you close a side window again immediately after it has been blocked or reset, the side
window closes with increased or maximum force. The reversing function is then not active.
Parts of the body could be trapped in the closing area in the process. This poses an increased
risk of injury or even fatal injury.
Make sure that no parts of the body are in the closing area. To stop the closing process,
release the switch or push the switch again to reopen the side window.
Problem
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
A side window cannot
be closed because it
is blocked by objects,
e.g. leaves in the window guide.
X
X
Remove the objects.
Close the side window.
A side window cannot If a side window is obstructed during closing and reopens
be closed and you can- again slightly:
not see the cause.
X Immediately after the window blocks, pull the corresponding
switch again until the side window has closed.
The side window is closed with increased force.
If a side window is obstructed again during closing and
reopens again slightly:
X
Immediately after the window blocks, pull the corresponding
switch again until the side window has closed.
The side window is closed without the anti-entrapment feature.
Operating the roller sunblind for the
panoramic roof
The roller sunblind shields the vehicle
interior from sunlight.
X
To open: press the roller sunblind up by
the outer edge of recess : and slide it
backwards.
X To close: pull the roller sunblind
forward by the outer edge of recess :
until it is fully closed.
Z
>> Opening and closing.
G WARNING
76
77
Useful information ............................ 78
Correct driver's seat position ............. 78
Seats .............................................. 79
Steering wheel ................................. 83
>> Seats, steering wheel and mirrors.
Mirrors ........................................... 84
78
Correct driver's seat position
Useful information
i This Owner's Manual describes all mod-
>> Seats, steering wheel and mirrors.
els, series and optional equipment for
your vehicle that were available at the
time of going to press. Country-specific
differences are possible. Note that your
vehicle may not be fitted with all features described. This is also the case for
systems and functions relevant to safety.
i Read the information on qualified specialist workshops: (Y page 21).
Correct driver's seat position
G WARNING
You could lose control of the vehicle while
driving if you:
Radjust
the driver's seat, steering wheel
or mirror
Rfasten the seat belt.
There is a risk of an accident.
Adjust the driver's seat, steering wheel or
mirror and fasten the seat belt before
starting the engine.
X
Make sure that seat = is adjusted properly.
Adjusting the seat (Y page 80)
When adjusting the seat, make sure that:
Ryou
are as far away from the driver's
airbag as possible.
Ryou are sitting in a normal upright
position.
Ryou can fasten the seat belt properly.
Ryou have moved the backrest to an
almost vertical position.
Ryou can depress the pedals properly.
Observe the safety guidelines on steering
wheel adjustment (Y page 83).
X Make sure that steering wheel : is
adjusted properly.
Adjusts the steering wheel (Y page 83)
When adjusting the steering wheel, make
sure that:
Ryou
can hold the steering wheel with
your arms slightly bent.
Ryou can move your legs freely.
Ryou can see all the displays in the
instrument cluster clearly.
Observe the safety guidelines for seat
belts (Y page 40).
X Check whether you have fastened seat
belt ; properly (Y page 42).
The seat belt should:
Rfit
snugly across your body
routed across the middle of your
shoulder
Rbe routed in your pelvic area across
the hip joints
X Before starting off, adjust the rear-view
mirror and the exterior mirrors
(Y page 84) in such a way that you have a
good view of road and traffic conditions.
Rbe
Example
Observe the safety guidelines on seat
adjustment (Y page 79).
Seats
Important safety notes
G WARNING
If children adjust the seats, they could
become trapped, especially if they are
unattended. There is a risk of injury.
When leaving the vehicle, always take the
key with you and lock the vehicle. Never
leave children unattended in the vehicle.
G WARNING
If the driver's seat is not correctly
engaged, it could unexpectedly move while
driving. This could cause you to lose control of the vehicle. There is a risk of an
accident.
Always ensure that the driver's seat is
engaged before starting the vehicle.
G WARNING
You could lose control of the vehicle while
driving if you:
Radjust
the driver's seat, steering wheel
or mirror
Rfasten the seat belt.
There is a risk of an accident.
Adjust the driver's seat, steering wheel or
mirror and fasten the seat belt before
starting the engine.
G WARNING
When adjusting a seat, you or another vehicle occupant could become trapped by the
guide rail of the seat, for instance. There
is a risk of injury.
Make sure that no one has any part of their
body within the sweep of the seat when
adjusting it.
you could slide underneath the seat belt and
sustain abdomen or neck injuries, for
example. This poses an increased risk of
injury or even fatal injury.
Adjust the seat properly before beginning
your journey. Always ensure that the backrest is in an almost vertical position and
that the shoulder section of your seatbelt is
routed across the centre of your shoulder.
Observe the safety notes on "Airbags"
(Y page 43) and "Children in the vehicle"
(Y page 46).
! To avoid damage to the seats and the
seat heating, observe the following
information:
Rdo not spill any liquids on the seats. If
liquid is spilled on the seats, dry them
as soon as possible.
Rif the seat covers are damp or wet, do
not switch on the seat heating. The seat
heating should also not be used to dry
the seats.
Rclean the seat covers as recommended;
see the "Interior care" section.
Rdo not transport heavy loads on the
seats. Do not place sharp objects on the
seat cushions, e.g. knives, nails or
tools. The seats should only be occupied by passengers, if possible.
Rwhen the seat heating is in operation,
do not cover the seats with insulating
materials, e.g. blankets, coats, bags,
seat covers, child seats or booster
seats.
! Make sure that there are no objects in
the footwell under or behind the seats
when moving the seats back. There is a
risk that the seats and/or the objects
could be damaged.
G WARNING
The seat belt does not offer the intended
level of protection if you have not moved
the backrest to an almost vertical position.
When braking or in the event of an accident,
Z
>> Seats, steering wheel and mirrors.
Seats
79
Seats
80
Adjusting the seat
Variant 2
X
Relieve the pressure on the backrest.
Pull release lever :.
The backrest is released.
X Move the backrest forwards or backwards.
X Let go of release lever : again.
X
>> Seats, steering wheel and mirrors.
Seat height4
X
Illustration of variant 1
Only variant 2: pull handle ; up or push
it down repeatedly until the seat has
reached the desired height.
Folding down the front-passenger seat
You can increase the size of the luggage
compartment by folding the frontpassenger seat backrest forwards.
Observe the loading guidelines
(Y page 198) and the notes in the "Child
restraint system on the front-passenger
seat" section (Y page 51).
Illustration of variant 2
Folding down
Seat fore-and-aft adjustment
X
Remove the seat belt from the belt loop by
opening the press stud.
X
Lift handle = and slide the seat forwards or rearwards.
X Release lever = again.
Make sure that you hear the seat engage
in position.
Backrest angle
Variant 1
X
X
Relieve the pressure on the backrest.
Turn handwheel : forwards or backwards.
4
Only driver's seat, depending on equipment.
Illustration of variant 1
Seats
81
Variant 1:
X
Turn handwheel : back until the desired
seat backrest position is achieved
Variant 2:
Pull release lever :.
The backrest is released.
X Fold the backrest backwards.
X Ensure that the seat backrest is engaged
again.
Illustration of variant 2
Variant 1:
X
Slide the right-hand front seat to its
rearmost position.
X Turn handwheel : forward until the
desired seat backrest position is achieved
Variant 2:
X
Slide the right-hand front seat to its
rearmost position.
X Hold onto the backrest at the head
restraint with one hand.
X Pull release lever :.
The backrest is released.
X Fold the backrest forwards.
Switching the seat heating on/off
Switching on/off
G WARNING
If you repeatedly switch on seat heating,
the seat cushion and backrest padding may
become very hot. The health of vehicle
occupants with limited temperature sensitivity or a limited ability to react to
excessively high temperatures may be
affected or they may even suffer burn-like
injuries. There is a risk of injury.
Therefore, do not switch on the seat heating
repeatedly.
Folding back
G WARNING
If the seat backrest is not engaged, it may
fold forwards, e.g. during braking or in the
event of an accident.
RAs
a result, a backrest which is not
engaged would press you into the seat
belt. The seat belt cannot perform its
intended protective function and could
additionally cause injury.
RThe backrest cannot restrain objects or
loads in the boot.
This poses an increased risk of injury.
Before every journey, make sure that the
backrest is engaged as described.
X
Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition
lock (Y page 115).
X To switch on: press button ;.
Indicator lamp : in the button lights
up.
X To switch off: press button ;.
Indicator lamp : in the button goes out.
Z
>> Seats, steering wheel and mirrors.
X
82
Seats
i If the battery voltage is too low, the
>> Seats, steering wheel and mirrors.
seat heating may switch off.
The seat heating switches off automatically after about 10 minutes.
Steering wheel
83
Problem
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
The seat heating has
switched off prematurely or cannot be
switched on.
The on-board voltage is too low because too many electrical
consumers are switched on.
X Switch off electrical consumers that you do not need, such as
the rear window heating or interior lighting.
Once the battery is sufficiently charged, the seat heating
will switch back on automatically.
Steering wheel
Important safety notes
G WARNING
You could lose control of the vehicle while
driving if you:
Radjust
the driver's seat, steering wheel
or mirror
Rfasten the seat belt.
There is a risk of an accident.
Adjust the driver's seat, steering wheel or
mirror and fasten the seat belt before
starting the engine.
G WARNING
Children could become trapped by the
steering wheel if they adjust it. There is a
risk of injury.
When leaving the vehicle, always take the
key with you and lock the vehicle. Never
leave children unattended in the vehicle.
: Release lever
; To adjust the steering wheel height
X
Push release lever : down completely.
The steering column is unlocked.
X Set desired steering wheel height ;.
X Push release lever : up completely.
The steering column is locked.
X Check if the steering column is locked.
To do so, try and push the steering wheel
up or down.
Adjusting the steering wheel
G WARNING
The steering wheel may move unexpectedly
if you adjust it while driving. This could
cause you to lose control of the vehicle.
There is a risk of an accident.
Make sure that the steering wheel is locked
before driving off. Never unlock the steering wheel when the vehicle is in motion.
Z
>> Seats, steering wheel and mirrors.
Problems with the seat heating
Mirrors
84
Mirrors
Adjusting the exterior mirrors manually
>> Seats, steering wheel and mirrors.
Rear-view mirror
X
X
Anti-dazzle mode: pivot anti-dazzle
switch : forwards or back.
To adjust the mirror: move lever : to the
right or left, up or down.
Adjusting the exterior mirrors electrically
Exterior mirrors
Important safety notes
G WARNING
You could lose control of the vehicle while
driving if you:
Radjust
the driver's seat, steering wheel
or mirror
Rfasten the seat belt.
There is a risk of an accident.
Adjust the driver's seat, steering wheel or
mirror and fasten the seat belt before
starting the engine.
G WARNING
The exterior mirrors reduce the size of the
image. Objects visible in the mirrors are
closer than they appear. You could misjudge
the distance from road users driving
behind you when changing lanes, for
instance. There is a risk of an accident.
You should therefore always look over your
shoulder to determine the actual distance
from road users driving behind you.
X
Turn the key to position 1 or 2 in the
ignition (Y page 115).
X To select an exterior mirror: turn control = to position 1 for the left exterior mirror or to position 2 for the
right exterior mirror.
X To adjust the mirror: move control = to
the right or left, up or down.
The exterior mirrors can be heated by
switching on the rear window heating
(Y page 109).
Exterior mirror pushed out of position
If an exterior mirror has been pushed forwards or backwards out of position, push
the exterior mirror into the correct position manually.
85
Useful information ............................ 86
Exterior lighting .............................. 86
Interior lighting .............................. 90
Replacing bulbs ................................ 91
>> Lights and windscreen wipers.
Windscreen wipers ............................ 95
86
Exterior lighting
Useful information
Converting to symmetrical dipped beam
i This Owner's Manual describes all models, series and optional equipment for
your vehicle that were available at the
time of going to press. Country-specific
differences are possible. Note that your
vehicle may not be fitted with all features described. This is also the case for
systems and functions relevant to safety.
i Read the information on qualified spe-
>> Lights and windscreen wipers.
cialist workshops: (Y page 21).
X
X
Exterior lighting
General notes
For reasons of safety, smart recommends
that you drive with the lights switched on
even during the daytime. In some countries, operation of the headlamps varies
due to legal requirements and selfimposed obligations.
Driving abroad
General notes
If your journey takes you to countries where
vehicles are driven on the opposite side of
the road to the country in which the vehicle
is registered, your headlamps must be
switched to symmetrical dipped beam as
soon as possible after crossing the border.
This prevents oncoming traffic from being
dazzled. Symmetrical lights do not illuminate as large an area of the edge of the carriageway.
Open the service cover (Y page 208).
Turn the screw with an appropriate tool
one quarter of a turn toward °.
Have the correct setting of the dipped beam
headlamps checked at a qualified specialist workshop.
Converting to asymmetrical dipped beam
after returning
Convert the headlamps back to asymmetrical dipped beam as soon as possible after
crossing the border.
X Open the service cover (Y page 208).
X Turn the screw with an appropriate tool
one quarter of a turn toward q to the
original position.
Have the correct setting of the dippedbeam headlamps checked at a qualified
specialist workshop.
Exterior lighting
Exterior lighting settings
Operation
87
When in the à position the exterior
lighting switches off automatically if you:
Rswitch
off the engine
the driver's door
Rlock the vehicle
Rdo not switch on the main-beam headlamps
Ropen
:
;
3$
4T
5K
6Ã
7L
Combination switch control
Marking
Lights off
Side lamp, parking lamp, licence
plate lighting
Main-beam headlamps
Automatic headlamp mode, controlled by the light sensor
Dipped-beam headlamps
Marking
Combination switch middle ring
Ì N Foglamps
Í R Rear foglamp
à is the preferred light switch setting.
The light setting is automatically selected
according to the brightness of the ambient
light (exception: poor visibility due to
weather conditions such as fog, snow or
spray):
RWith the engine running: depending on
the ambient light conditions, the daytime driving lights or the parking and
dipped-beam headlamps are switched on
or off automatically
X To switch on automatic headlamp mode:
turn combination switch control : until
à is at marking ;.
G WARNING
When the light switch is set to Ã, the
dipped-beam headlamps may not be
switched on automatically if there is fog,
snow or other causes of poor visibility due
to the weather conditions such as spray.
There is a risk of an accident.
In such situations, turn the light switch to
L.
D
E
If you hear a warning tone when you leave
the vehicle, the lights may still be
switched on.
X
Turn combination switch control :
until à or $ is at marking ;.
The automatic headlamp feature is only an
aid. The driver is responsible for the
vehicle's lighting at all times.
The daytime driving lights improve the
detectability of your vehicle during the
day.
When the dipped-beam headlamps are
switched on, the L indicator lamp in the
instrument cluster lights up and the daytime driving lights switch off.
Z
>> Lights and windscreen wipers.
Automatic headlamp mode
Exterior lighting
88
Dipped-beam headlamps
Rear foglamp
X
X
To switch on: turn combination switch
control : until L is at marking ;.
The L indicator lamp in the instrument cluster lights up.
Side lamps
X
To switch on: turn combination switch
control : until T is at marking ;.
>> Lights and windscreen wipers.
Foglamps
Only vehicles with front foglamps have the
"Foglamps" function.
X To switch on: make sure that the side
lamps or dipped-beam headlamps are
switched on.
X Turn combination switch middle ring E
until marking D is at N.
The N indicator lamp in the instrument cluster lights up.
After releasing, the middle ring returns
automatically back to the neutral position.
X To switch off: turn combination switch
middle ring E until marking D is at
N.
The N indicator lamp in the instrument cluster goes out.
After releasing, the middle ring returns
automatically back to the neutral position.
i If you switch off the engine (only in the
à position) or turn off the lights, the
foglamps are also switched off.
To switch on: make sure that the side
lamps or dipped-beam headlamps are
switched on.
X Turn combination switch middle ring E
until marking D is at R.
The R indicator lamp in the instrument cluster lights up.
After releasing, the middle ring returns
automatically back to the neutral position.
X To switch off: turn combination switch
middle ring E until marking D is at
R.
The R indicator lamp in the instrument cluster goes out.
After releasing, the middle ring returns
automatically back to the neutral position.
i If you switch off the engine (only in the
à position) or turn off the lights, the
rear foglamps are also switched off.
Adjusting the headlamp range
The headlamp range control allows you to
adjust the cone of light from the headlamps
to suit the vehicle load. The cone of light
changes when seats are occupied or when
the luggage compartment is loaded or
unloaded. This can impair visibility and
dazzle oncoming traffic.
Exterior lighting
89
direction of arrow : (right turn signal)
or ; (left turn signal).
Switching on the main-beam headlamps
and headlamp flasher
Main-beam headlamps
Driver's seat occupied or
driver's seat and frontpassenger seat occupied
1
Other loading
2, 3 and Settings are not required
4
X
Turn the ignition key to position 2 in the
ignition lock or start the engine.
X Turn headlamp range control : to the
position which corresponds to the load
in your vehicle.
Switching on the turn signals
X
To switch on: start the engine.
Turn the combination switch control
until K or à (if available) is at
the marking.
X Press the combination switch beyond the
pressure point in the direction of
arrow :.
The K indicator lamp in the instrument cluster lights up.
X To deactivate: move combination
switch : back to its normal position.
The K indicator lamp in the instrument cluster goes out.
X
Headlamp flasher
X
X
Start the engine.
To indicate briefly: press the combination switch briefly to the pressure point
in the direction of arrow : (right turn
signal) or ; (left turn signal).
The corresponding turn signal flashes
three times.
X To indicate: press the combination
switch beyond the pressure point in the
To switch on: pull the combination
switch in the direction of arrow ;.
X
Z
>> Lights and windscreen wipers.
g
90
Interior lighting
Hazard warning lamps
Interior lighting
>> Lights and windscreen wipers.
Overview
The hazard warning lamps automatically
switch on if:
Ran
airbag is deployed
Rthe vehicle decelerates rapidly from a
speed of above 70 km/h and comes to a
standstill
X To switch on the hazard warning lamps:
press button :.
All turn signals flash. If you now switch
on a turn signal using the combination
switch, only the turn signal lamp on the
corresponding side of the vehicle will
flash.
X To switch off the hazard warning lamps:
press button :.
The hazard warning lamps switch off automatically if the vehicle reaches a speed of
above 10 km/h again after a full brake
application.
i The hazard warning lamps still operate
if the ignition is switched off.
Headlamps misted up on the inside
Certain climatic and physical conditions
may cause moisture to form in the headlamp. This moisture does not affect the
functionality of the headlamp.
: Interior lighting
; Depending on the position of the
switch:
Interior lighting switched on
Automatic interior lighting control on
Interior lighting switched off
The interior lighting is switched on when a
door is open: if the corresponding door is
closed correctly the interior lighting goes
out.
Interior lighting control
If the doors are unlocked with the remote
control, the interval timer for the interior
lighting is triggered. The interval timer
restarts when a door is opened.
The front interior lighting and the luggage
compartment light go out gradually.
The interior lighting interval timer is
switched off:
Rif
a door remains open, the interior
lighting switches off after 15 minutes
without dimming
Rif all doors (with additional locking
mechanism) are closed, the interior
lighting switches off after 15 seconds
Replacing bulbs
are closed, the interior lighting
switches off after 3 to 4 minutes
Ras soon as the engine is started and for as
long as the engine is running
Replacing bulbs
Important safety notes
G WARNING
Bulbs, lamps and plug connectors can
become very hot during use. When replacing
a bulb, you could burn yourself on these
components. There is a risk of injury.
Allow these components to cool down before
replacing the bulb.
replace these bulbs yourself. Contact a
qualified specialist workshop which has
the necessary specialist knowledge and
tools to carry out the work required.
Bulbs and lamps are an important aspect of
vehicle safety. You must therefore make
sure that these function correctly at all
times. Have the headlamp setting checked
regularly.
Overview of bulb replacement – bulbs
You can replace the following bulbs. The
details for the bulb type can be found in the
legend.
Do not use a bulb that has been dropped or if
its glass tube has been scratched.
The bulb may explode if:
Ryou
touch it
is hot
Ryou drop it
Ryou scratch it
Only operate bulbs in enclosed lamps
designed for that purpose. Only fit spare
bulbs of the same type and the specified
voltage.
Marks on the glass tube reduce the service
life of the bulbs. Do not touch the glass tube
with your bare hands. If necessary, clean
the glass tube when cold with alcohol or
spirit and rub it off with a lint-free cloth.
Protect bulbs from moisture during operation. Do not allow bulbs to come into contact with liquids.
Replace only the bulbs listed (Y page 91).
If you require assistance replacing bulbs,
consult a qualified specialist workshop.
If the new bulb still does not light up, consult a qualified specialist workshop.
The daytime driving lights and part of the
rear light clusters of your vehicle are
equipped with LED light bulbs. Do not
Rit
: Dipped-beam/main-beam headlamp:
H4 60/55 W
; Turn signal lamp: PY 21 W
= Foglamps: H16
Tail lamps
: Tail lamp/brake lamp: P 21 5 W
; Rear foglamp: P 21 W
= Reversing lamp: W 16 W
? Turn signal lamp: PY 21 W
Z
>> Lights and windscreen wipers.
Rif all doors (without locking mechanism)
91
92
Replacing bulbs
>> Lights and windscreen wipers.
Tail lamps (vehicles with partial LEDs)
: Turn signal lamp: PY 21 W
; Reversing lamp: W 16 W
: Interior lighting: W 5 W
Replacing the front bulbs
Turn signals
: Licence plate lighting: W 5 W
X
To remove the cover in the front wheel
arch: switch off the lighting system.
X Turn the front wheels inwards.
X Press spring clip : down.
X Slide cover ; back and remove it.
: Side turn signal lamps: WY 5 W
Replacing bulbs
X
Turn bulb holder : anti-clockwise and
remove.
X Take the bulb out of bulb holder :.
X Insert the new bulb into bulb holder :.
X Insert bulb holder : and turn it clockwise until it engages.
X To fit the cover in the front wheel arch:
insert cover ; again and lock in place.
93
Front foglamps
Due to their location, have the bulbs in the
front foglamps changed at a qualified specialist workshop.
X
Switch off the lights.
Remove the two screws : at the bottom of
the front wheel arch using a suitable
tool.
X Bend back the cover using your hand.
X Turn the bulb holder anti-clockwise and
remove it.
X Take the bulb out of the bulb holder.
X Insert the new bulb into the bulb holder.
X Insert the bulb holder and turn it clockwise until it engages.
X Bend the cover back into position.
X Tighten the two screws : again.
X
X
Switch off the lights.
Open the service cover (Y page 208).
X Remove cover :.
X Pull out the connector.
X Simultaneously press retainer ;
forward and to the right and then remove
the lamp.
X Insert the new bulb and engage it in
place.
X Insert the connector.
X Position cover : and press into place.
X
Side turn signal lamps
Z
>> Lights and windscreen wipers.
Dipped-beam/main-beam headlamps
Replacing bulbs
94
>> Lights and windscreen wipers.
X
Insert a flat tool into recess : and lever
side turn signal lamp ; forwards and
out.
X Remove the bulb holder from side turn
signal lamp ; by turning it a quarter
turn anti-clockwise.
X Pull the bulb out of the bulb holder.
X Insert the new bulb into the bulb holder.
X Insert the bulb holder into side turn signal lamp ; and turn it a quarter turn
clockwise.
X Insert side turn signal lamp ;.
Replacing the rear bulbs
Tail lamps
X
Switch off the lights.
X To remove: open the upper and lower tailgate (Y page 71).
X
Bulb holder
: Tail lamp/brake lamp (vehicles without
partial LEDs)
; Turn signals
= Reversing lamp
? Rear foglamp (vehicles without partial
LEDs)
X
Unclip four bulb holder tabs A and
carefully remove the bulb holder.
X Pull out the corresponding bulb.
X Insert the new bulb.
X Insert the bulb holder again.
Four bulb holder tabs A must audibly
engage.
X Insert the connector.
X Insert the lamp again.
X Tighten the two screws : on the tail
lamp again.
Licence plate lighting
Remove two screws : on the tail lamp
using a suitable slotted screwdriver.
X Carefully take out the lamp.
X To release the connector: insert a suitable slotted screwdriver under the plastic hanger, lift a small plastic piece
upwards and remove the connector.
X
To remove: release catch : of the lamp
lens using a suitable tool.
X Remove the lamp lens.
Windscreen wipers
95
scratch the glass if wiping takes place
when the windscreen is dry.
If it is necessary to switch on the windscreen wipers in dry weather conditions,
always operate them using washer fluid.
! If the windscreen wipers leave smears
X
Take bulb : out of the bulb holder.
Insert the new bulb into the bulb holder.
X Re-insert the lamp lens into the licence
plate lamp.
X
! Vehicles with a rain sensor: if the
windscreen becomes dirty in dry weather
conditions, the windscreen wipers may
be activated inadvertently. This could
damage the windscreen wiper blades or
scratch the windscreen.
For this reason, you should always switch
off the windscreen wipers in dry weather.
Replacing the interior lighting
X
Remove lamp lens : with a flat tool, e.g.
a screwdriver.
X Take the bulb to be replaced out of the
bulb holder.
X Insert the new bulb into the bulb holder.
X Insert lamp lens :.
Combination switch
: Control for wiping frequency and sen-
sitivity of the rain sensor
2 0 Windscreen wipers off
3 © Intermittent wipe
à Automatic wipe (rain sensor)
Windscreen wipers
4 1 Continuous wipe, slow
5 2 Continuous wipe, fast
Switching the windscreen wipers
on/off
B î Wipes with washer fluid
! Do not operate the windscreen wipers
when the windscreen is dry, as this could
damage the wiper blades. Moreover, dust
that has collected on the windscreen can
X
To switch on: turn the key to position 1 or
2 in the ignition lock (Y page 115).
X Press the combination switch to the ©
position or 1.
or
Z
>> Lights and windscreen wipers.
on the windscreen after the vehicle has
been washed in an automatic car wash,
this may be due to wax or other residue.
Clean the windscreen with washer fluid
after an automatic car wash.
Windscreen wipers
96
X
Start the engine (Y page 115).
Press the combination switch down or up
to the corresponding position.
X To wipe with washer fluid î: pull the
combination switch towards the steering
wheel.
X
>> Lights and windscreen wipers.
X
Switching the rear window wiper on/off
To switch off: press the combination
switch to position 0.
Position 2 changes to position 1 when the
engine is stopped.
In position 1 or in the © position, the
windscreen wipers stop automatically when
the engine is stopped and the driver's door
is opened.
Vehicles with a rain sensor: in position
à the windscreen wipers stop automatically when the engine is stopped.
The windscreen will no longer be wiped
properly if the wiper blades are worn. This
could prevent you from observing the traffic conditions.
Intermittent wipe
Vehicles with a rain sensor: the appropriate wiping frequency is automatically set
according to the intensity of the rain. With
intermittent wiping you can also adjust the
sensitivity of the rain sensor using control :. When the sensitivity is set to high,
the windscreen wiper wipes more frequently.
X To switch on: start the engine
(Y page 115).
X Press the combination switch to the Ã
position.
The windscreen wipers sweep once.
Combination switch
: Control
2 $ Rear window wiper off
3 è Rear window wiper on
4 ô Wiping with washer fluid
X
Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition
lock or start the engine (Y page 115).
X Turn control : on the combination
switch to the corresponding position.
Replacing the wiper blades
Important safety notes
G WARNING
If the windscreen wipers begin to move
while you are changing the wiper blades,
you can be trapped by the wiper arm. There
is a risk of injury.
Always switch off the windscreen wipers
and ignition before changing the wiper
blades.
! To avoid damaging the windscreen
wiper blades, make sure that you touch
only the wiper arm of the windscreen
wiper.
! Never open the service cover/tailgate
if a windscreen wiper arm has been folded away from the windscreen/rear window.
Windscreen wipers
X
Press the two release clips ; on mounting ? in the direction of arrow = and
pull away from the wiper arm.
X Slide wiper blade : in the direction of
arrow A until the wiper blade securing
hook is revealed.
X Remove wiper blade :.
Fitting the wiper blades
Replacing the windscreen wiper blades
Removing the wiper blades
Turn the key to position 1 or 2 in the
ignition lock (Y page 115).
X Press the combination switch to the 5
position (Y page 95).
The wiper arms move slowly upwards.
X When the wiper arms are vertical in relation to the service cover, turn the key to
position 0 and remove it from the ignition lock.
X Fold the wiper arm away from the windscreen.
X
X
Slide new wiper blade : in the direction of arrow ? onto mounting = of
wiper arm ;.
Wiper blade : engages.
X Make sure that wiper blade : is seated
correctly.
X Fold wiper arm ; back onto the windscreen.
Replacing the rear window wiper blade
Removing the wiper blades
X
X
Remove the key from the ignition lock.
Fold wiper arm : away from the rear
window until it engages.
Z
>> Lights and windscreen wipers.
Never fold a windscreen wiper arm without a wiper blade back onto the windscreen/rear window.
Hold the windscreen wiper arm firmly
when you change the wiper blade. If you
release the windscreen wiper arm without a wiper blade and it falls onto the
windscreen/rear window, the windscreen/rear window may be damaged by
the force of the impact.
smart recommends that you have the wiper
blades changed at a qualified specialist
workshop.
97
Windscreen wipers
98
X
Turn wiper blade ; in the direction of
the arrow until it is released from the
retainer on the wiper arm.
X Remove wiper blade ;.
Fitting a wiper blade
>> Lights and windscreen wipers.
X
Push new wiper blade ; onto wiper
arm : until you feel it engage.
X Turn wiper blade ; parallel to wiper
arm :.
X Make sure that wiper blade ; is seated
correctly.
X Fold wiper arm : back onto the rear
window.
Windscreen wipers
99
Problems with the windscreen wipers
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
The windscreen wip- The combination switch or rain sensor is malfunctioning.
ers do not stop or con- X Stop the vehicle, paying attention to traffic conditions as
tinue wiping with the
you do so and switch off the engine.
same speed regardless X
For safety reasons, you should remove the key from the igniof a change in position lock and open the driver's door.
tion.
X Turn the key to position 1 in the ignition lock. Then try to
start the engine again.
X Have the windscreen wipers checked at a qualified specialist workshop.
The windscreen wipers are jammed.
Leaves or snow, for example, may be obstructing the windscreen
wiper movement. The wiper motor has been deactivated.
X Stop the vehicle, paying attention to traffic conditions as
you do so and switch off the engine.
X For safety reasons, you should remove the key from the ignition lock.
X Remove the cause of the obstruction.
X Switch the windscreen wipers on again after 30 seconds.
The windscreen wiper The windscreen wiper drive has stopped for safety reasons.
has stopped in the
X Have the windscreen wipers checked at a qualified specialmiddle of the windist workshop.
screen.
The windscreen wipers fail completely.
The windscreen wiper drive is malfunctioning.
X Select another wiper speed on the combination switch.
X Have the windscreen wipers checked at a qualified specialist workshop.
Z
>> Lights and windscreen wipers.
Problem
100
101
Useful information ........................... 102
Overview of climate control systems .... 102
Operating the climate control system ... 105
>> Climate control.
Adjusting the air vents ...................... 111
102
Overview of climate control systems
Useful information
i This Owner's Manual describes all models, series and optional equipment for
your vehicle that were available at the
time of going to press. Country-specific
differences are possible. Note that your
vehicle may not be fitted with all features described. This is also the case for
systems and functions relevant to safety.
i Read the information on qualified spe-
>> Climate control.
cialist workshops: (Y page 21).
Overview of climate control systems
General notes
Observe the settings recommended on the
following pages. The windows could otherwise mist up.
To prevent the windows from misting up:
Rswitch
off climate control only briefly
on air-recirculation mode only
briefly
Rair-conditioning system/automatic climate control: switch on the cooling with
air dehumidification function
Rswitch on the "demist windscreen" function briefly, if required
The heating, air-conditioning system and
the automatic climate control regulate the
temperature and humidity in the vehicle
interior. They also filter undesirable substances out of the air.
The heating, air-conditioning system and
automatic climate control can only be
operated when the engine is running. They
only function optimally when the side windows are closed.
Rswitch
i Ventilate the vehicle for a brief period
during warm weather. This will speed up
the cooling process and the desired
interior temperature will be reached
more quickly.
i The integrated filter can filter out
most particles of dust and as well as pollen. With automatic climate control,
odours carried in the air are also
reduced. A clogged filter reduces the
amount of air supplied to the vehicle
interior. For this reason, you should
always observe the interval for replacing the filter, which is specified in the
Service Booklet. As it depends on environmental conditions, e.g. heavy air
pollution, the interval may be shorter
than stated in the Service Booklet.
Overview of climate control systems
103
Heating/air-conditioning system control panel
(Y page 106)
= Sets the airflow (Y page 108)
? Switches the rear window heating on/off (Y page 109)
Switches the exterior mirror heating on/off (for vehicles with heated exterior mirrors only)
A Sets the temperature (Y page 107)
B Switches the air-recirculation mode on/off (Y page 111)
Notes on using the heating/air-conditioning system
Heating/air-conditioning system
Below, you can find a number of tips and
recommendations for optimum use of the
heating/air-conditioning system.
RSwitch on climate control by turning
control = clockwise to the desired
position (except position 0).
RChange the temperature settings in small
increments only.
To increase and reduce the temperature
turn control A clockwise or anti-clockwise.
RRecommendation for demisting front
windows at low exterior temperatures or
in rain: switch air distribution control : to the z position. Deactivate
air-recirculation mode À. Turn airflow control = to position 4.Turn tem-
perature control A clockwise as far as
possible.
Only use the "Windscreen demisting"
function briefly until the windscreen is
clear again.
RRecommendation for rapid cooling or
heating of the vehicle interior: briefly
set airflow control = to 3 or 4.
RRecommendation for a constant interior
temperature: set air flow control = to
position 1 or 2.
ROnly use the air-recirculation mode
briefly, e.g. if there are unpleasant outside odours or when in a tunnel. The windows could otherwise mist up as no fresh
air is drawn into the vehicle in airrecirculation mode.
Automatic start/stop system
During automatic engine switch-off, the
climate control only operates at a reduced
capacity. If you require the full climate
>> Climate control.
: Sets the air distribution (Y page 107)
; Switches cooling with air dehumidification on/off (air-conditioning system only)
104
Overview of climate control systems
>> Climate control.
control output, you can switch off the automatic start/stop system by pressing the
automatic start/stop system button
(Y page 119).
Operating the climate control system
105
Automatic climate control panel
= Switches the air-recirculation mode on/off (Y page 111)
? Switches the rear window heating on/off (Y page 109)
A
B
C
D
E
F
Switches the exterior mirror heating on/off (for vehicles with heated exterior mirrors only)
Sets the air distribution (Y page 107)
Sets climate control to automatic mode (Y page 107)
Switches the climate control on/off (Y page 105)
Switches cooling with air dehumidification on/off (Y page 106)
Reduces the airflow (Y page 108)
Sets the temperature (Y page 107)
Optimum use of automatic climate control
Automatic climate control
Below, you can find a number of notes and
recommendations to help you use climate
control optimally.
RActivate climate control primarily
using the à button.
RSet the temperature to 22 †.
ROnly use the "Windscreen demisting"
function briefly until the windscreen is
clear again.
ROnly use the air-recirculation mode
briefly, e.g. if there are unpleasant outside odours or when in a tunnel. The windows could otherwise mist up as no fresh
air is drawn into the vehicle in airrecirculation mode.
Automatic start/stop system
During automatic engine switch-off, the
climate control only operates at a reduced
capacity. If you require the full climate
control output, you can switch off the automatic start/stop system by pressing the
automatic start/stop system button
(Y page 119).
Operating the climate control system
Switching the climate control on/off
General notes
When the climate control is switched off,
the air supply and air circulation are also
switched off. The windows could mist up.
>> Climate control.
: Increases the airflow (Y page 108)
; Demists the windscreen (Y page 108)
Operating the climate control system
106
Therefore, only switch off climate control
briefly.
Switching the sound on/off
>> Climate control.
Heating/air-conditioning system
X Start the engine (Y page 115).
X To switch on: turn airflow control =
clockwise to the desired position
(except position 0) (Y page 103).
X To switch off: turn airflow control =
anti-clockwise to position 0
(Y page 103).
Automatic climate control
Turn the key to position 1 or 2 in the
ignition lock or start the engine
(Y page 115).
X To switch on: press the à button.
The indicator lamp under the à button
lights up.
or
X Press the ó button.
or
X Press the ¬ button.
X To switch off: press the ^ button.
The indicator lamp under the ^ button
lights up.
or
X Press the ô button repeatedly until
all the indicator lamps go out.
X
Switching cooling with air dehumidification on/off
General notes
The "Cooling with air-dehumidification"
function is only available with the airconditioning system or automatic climate
control.
If you deactivate the "Cooling with airdehumidification" function, the air
inside the vehicle will not be cooled. The
air inside the vehicle will also not be
dehumidified. The windows can mist up
more quickly. Therefore, only switch off
cooling with air dehumidification for a
short period.
The cooling with air dehumidification
function is only available when the engine
is running. The air inside the vehicle is
cooled and dehumidified according to the
temperature selected.
The "Cooling with air-dehumidification"
function does not operate at low outside
temperatures.
Condensation may drip from the underside
of the vehicle when cooling mode is active.
This is normal and not a sign that there is a
malfunction.
Switching the sound on/off
Air-conditioning system
X Start the engine (Y page 115).
X Set airflow control = clockwise to position 1 or higher (Y page 108).
X To switch on: press the ¿ button.
The indicator lamp in the ¿ button
lights up.
X To switch on: press the ¿ button.
The indicator lamp in the ¿ button
goes out.
Automatic climate control
X Start the engine (Y page 115).
X To switch on: press buttons ó and
¿.
The indicator lamp under the ¿ button
lights up.
X To switch off: press the ¿ button.
The indicator lamp under the ¿ button
goes out.
Operating the climate control system
General notes
This function is only available with automatic climate control.
In automatic mode, the set temperature is
maintained automatically at a constant
level. The system automatically regulates
the temperature of the dispensed air, the
airflow and the air distribution.
Setting automatic mode
X
Turn the key to position 1 or 2 in the
ignition lock or start the engine
(Y page 115).
X To switch on: press the à button.
The indicator lamp under the à button
lights up.
X To switch to manual mode: press the ó
or ô button.
or
X Press the Á, P or O button.
or
X Press the ¬ button.
The indicator lamp under the à button
goes out.
i If you adjust one of the functions by
hand, the indicator lamp under the Ã
button goes out. All other functions continue to be regulated automatically.
Setting the temperature
Heating/air-conditioning system
X
X
Start the engine (Y page 115).
To increase or reduce: turn temperature
control A clockwise or anti-clockwise
(Y page 103).
Change the temperature settings in small
increments only.
Automatic climate control
X
X
Start the engine (Y page 115).
To increase or reduce: push temperature
slider F to the right or left (Y page 105).
For the maximum or minimum temperature, push slider F completely to the
right or left (Y page 105).
Only change the temperature setting in
small increments. Start at 22 †.
Setting the air distribution
Air distribution settings
Heating/air-conditioning system
z Directs the airflow through the
demister vents
a Directs the airflow through the footwell and demister vents
O Directs the airflow through the footwell air vents
S Directs the airflow through the
centre, side and footwell vents
P Directs the airflow through the
centre and side air vents
i Recommendation for air distribution
in winter: set thea setting.
Recommendation for air distribution in
summer: set the P setting.
Automatic climate control
Á Directs the airflow through the
demister vents
P Directs the airflow through the
centre and side air vents
O Directs the airflow through the footwell air vents
i You can also activate several of the air
distribution settings simultaneously. In
order to do this, press several of the air
distribution buttons. The air is then
routed through different air vents.
>> Climate control.
Setting climate control to automatic
mode
107
Operating the climate control system
108
Recommendation for air distribution in
winter: set theÁ and O settings.
Recommendation for air distribution in
summer: set the P setting.
Setting the air distribution
Heating/air-conditioning system
X Start the engine (Y page 115).
X Turn air distribution control : clockwise or anti-clockwise until the indicator is at the desired position
(Y page 103).
>> Climate control.
i You can turn the indicator to a position
between two symbols. There are intermediate levels between the air distribution positions.
Automatic climate control
X Start the engine (Y page 115).
X Press one or more of the Á, O or
P buttons.
The indicator lamp next to the respective button selected lights up.
Setting the airflow
Heating/air-conditioning system
X
X
Start the engine (Y page 115).
To increase or reduce: turn airflow control = clockwise or anti-clockwise to
one of the four detents (Y page 103).
Automatic climate control
X
Start the engine (Y page 115).
To increase: press the ó button.
With each press of the ó button, one
indicator lamp next to the airflow buttons lights up.
X To decrease: press the ô button.
With each press of the ô button, one
indicator lamp next to the airflow buttons goes out.
X
Demisting the windscreen
General notes
You can use this function to demist the
windscreen or to demist the inside of the
windscreen and the side windows.
i You should only select the "Windscreen
demisting" function until the windscreen is clear again.
Switching the sound on/off
Heating/air-conditioning system
X Start the engine (Y page 115).
X To switch on: turn air distribution control : to the z position (Y page 103) .
X Turn airflow control = to position 4
(Y page 103).
X Turn temperature control A clockwise
as far as possible (Y page 103).
X Slide air distribution control B to the
right (Y page 103).
X To switch off: turn air distribution control : to the desired position (apart
from the z position) (Y page 103).
X Turn air distribution control = and
temperature control A anti-clockwise
to the desired position (Y page 103).
Automatic climate control
X Turn the key to position 1 or 2 in the
ignition lock or start the engine
(Y page 115).
X To switch on: press the ¬ button.
The indicator lamp above the ¬ button
lights up. Automatic mode à is deactivated.
The ¬ "Demist windscreen" function
switches the automatic climate control
to the following functions:
Rcooling
Rhigh
with air dehumidification on
airflow
Operating the climate control system
Rair distribution to the windscreen and
i You should only select this setting
front side windows
Rair-recirculation mode off
X To switch off: press the ¬ button.
or
X Press the à button.
or
X Press the À button.
or
X Press the Á, P or O button.
The indicator lamp above the ¬ button
goes out.
The rear window heating is turned off.
until the windscreen is clear again.
Windows misted up on the inside
Heating/air-conditioning system
X Air-conditioning system: activate the
¿ "Cooling with air dehumidification" function.
X If the windows continue to mist up, activate the "Windscreen demisting" function (Y page 108).
i You should only select this setting
until the windscreen is clear again.
Automatic climate control
X Activate the ¿ cooling with air dehumidification function.
X Activate automatic mode Ã.
X If the windows continue to mist up, activate the "Windscreen demisting" function ¬.
i You should only select this setting
until the windscreen is clear again.
Windows misted up on the outside
Heating/air-conditioning system
Activate the windscreen wipers.
X Set the air distribution to z.
X
Automatic climate control
X Activate the windscreen wipers.
X Set the air distribution to ¬.
i You should only select this setting
until the windscreen is clear again.
Rear window heating
General notes
The rear window heating has a high current
draw. You should therefore switch it off as
soon as the window is clear.
The rear window heating can only be
switched on and off when the engine is running.
The rear window heating automatically
switches off after approximately
10 minutes.
Vehicles with heated exterior mirrors:
when you switch on the rear window heating,
the exterior mirrors are also heated. When
the rear window heating is switched off,
the exterior mirror heating will also turn
off.
Switching the sound on/off
Heating/air-conditioning system
X Start the engine (Y page 115).
X To switch on: press the ¤ button.
The indicator lamp in the ¤ button
lights up.
X To switch off: press the ¤ button.
The indicator lamp in the ¤ button
goes out.
>> Climate control.
Demisting the windows
109
110
Operating the climate control system
>> Climate control.
Automatic climate control
X Start the engine (Y page 115).
X To switch on: press the ¤ button.
The indicator lamp above the¤ button
lights up.
X To switch off: press the ¤ button.
The indicator lamp above the ¤ button
goes out.
Adjusting the air vents
111
Problems with the rear window heating
Problem
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
The rear window heat- The battery has not been sufficiently charged.
ing has switched off
X Switch off any consumers that are not required, e.g. reading
prematurely or cannot
lamps, interior lighting or the seat heating.
be activated.
When the battery is sufficiently charged, the rear window
heating can be activated again.
General notes
You can deactivate the flow of fresh air if
you are in a tunnel or if unpleasant odours
are entering the vehicle from outside. The
air already inside the vehicle will then be
recirculated.
If you switch on air-recirculation mode,
the windows can mist up more quickly, in
particular at low temperatures. Only use
air-recirculation mode briefly to prevent
the windows misting up.
Switching the sound on/off
Heating/air-conditioning system
Start the engine (Y page 115).
X To switch on: slide control B to the left
(Y page 103).
X To switch off: slide control B to the
right (Y page 103).
X
Automatic climate control
Start the engine (Y page 115).
X To switch on: press the À button.
The indicator lamp above theÀ button
lights up.
X To switch off: press the À button.
or
X Press the ¬ button.
X
or
X Press the à button.
The indicator lamp above the À button
goes out.
Adjusting the air vents
Important safety notes
G WARNING
Very hot or very cold air can flow from the
air vents. This could result in burns or
frostbite in the immediate vicinity of the
air vents. There is a risk of injury.
Make sure that all vehicle occupants always
maintain a sufficient distance to the air
outlets. If necessary, redirect the airflow
to another area of the vehicle interior.
G WARNING
If you pour cleaning fluid or disinfectant
into the vehicle's ventilation system, it
may ignite. There is a risk of fire.
Never spray these or other agents into the
ventilation system. Always have work on the
ventilation system carried out at a qualified specialist workshop.
Z
>> Climate control.
Switching the air-recirculation mode
on/off
Adjusting the air vents
112
In order to ensure the direct flow of fresh
air through the air vents into the vehicle
interior, please observe the following
notes:
the air inlet between the service
cover and the windscreen free of blockages, such as ice, snow or leaves.
Rnever cover the vents or ventilation
grilles in the vehicle interior.
X
To open the centre air vent: hold centre
air vent : or ; in the middle and tilt
outwards until the vent openings can be
seen.
Rkeep
Setting the side air vents
i For optimum climate control in the
vehicle, open the air vents fully.
>> Climate control.
Setting the centre air vents
X
X
To adjust the air direction: hold centre
air vent : or ; in the middle and turn
and/or tilt it in the desired direction
up, down, to the left or to the right.
X To close the centre air vent: hold centre
air vent : or ; in the middle and tilt
inwards until the vent openings can no
longer be seen.
To adjust the air direction: hold side air
vent ; in the middle and turn and/or tilt
in the desired direction up, down, to the
left or to the right.
X To close the side air vent: hold side air
vent ; in the middle and tilt inwards
until the vent openings can no longer be
seen.
X To open the side air vent: hold side air
vent ; in the middle and tilt outwards
until the vent openings can be seen.
Demister vent : cannot be adjusted.
113
Useful information ........................... 114
Driving .......................................... 114
Manual transmission ......................... 121
Automatic transmission .................... 122
Refuelling ...................................... 130
Parking ......................................... 132
Driving tips ................................... 134
Driving systems ............................... 139
>> Driving and parking.
Running-in notes ............................. 114
114
Driving
>> Driving and parking.
Useful information
i This Owner's Manual describes all models, series and optional equipment for
your vehicle that were available at the
time of going to press. Country-specific
differences are possible. Note that your
vehicle may not be fitted with all features described. This is also the case for
systems and functions relevant to safety.
i Read the information on qualified specialist workshops: (Y page 21).
Running-in notes
RDo
not shift down a gear manually in
order to brake.
RVehicles with automatic transmission:
if possible, do not depress the accelerator pedal beyond the pressure point
(kickdown).
RVehicles with automatic transmission:
ideally drive in program E for the first
1500 km.
After 1500 km, you may gradually bring the
vehicle up to full road and engine speeds.
You should also observe these notes on running-in if the engine or parts of the drive
train on your vehicle have been replaced.
Observe the maximum permissible speed.
Important safety notes
In certain driving and driving safety systems, the sensors adjust automatically
while a certain distance is being driven
after the vehicle has been delivered or
after repairs. Full system effectiveness is
not reached until the end of this teach-in
procedure.
New or replaced brake pads/linings and
discs only reach their optimum braking
effect after several hundred kilometres of
driving. Compensate for the reduced braking effect by applying greater force to the
brake pedal.
The first 1500 km
Driving
Important safety notes
G WARNING
Objects in the driver's footwell may
restrict the clearance around the pedals or
block a depressed pedal. This jeopardises
the operating and road safety of the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident.
Stow all objects securely in the vehicle so
that they do not get into the driver's footwell. Always fit the floormats securely and
as prescribed in order to ensure that there
is always sufficient room for the pedals. Do
not use loose floormats and do not place
several floormats on top of one another.
If you treat the engine with sufficient care
from the very start, you will be rewarded
with excellent performance for the
remainder of the engine's life.
Unsuitable footwear can hinder correct
usage of the pedals, e.g.:
RDrive
Rshoes
at varying vehicle speeds and
engine speeds for the first 1500 km.
RAvoid overstraining the vehicle during
this period, e.g. driving at full throttle.
RChange gear in good time, before the rev
counter needle is Ô of the way to the red
area of the rev counter.
G WARNING
with thick soles
with high heels
Rslippers
There is a risk of an accident.
Wear suitable footwear to ensure correct
usage of the pedals.
Rshoes
Driving
G WARNING
If the parking brake has not been fully
released when driving, the parking brake
can:
Roverheat
and cause a fire
Rlose its hold function.
There is a risk of fire and an accident.
Release the parking brake fully before
driving off.
! Do not warm up the engine when the
vehicle is stationary. Drive off immediately. Avoid high engine speeds and
driving at full throttle until the engine
has reached its operating temperature.
Only shift the automatic transmission to
the desired drive position when the
vehicle is stationary.
Where possible, avoid spinning the
drive wheels when pulling away on slippery roads. You could otherwise damage
the drive train.
Key positions
g To remove the key
1 Power supply for some consumers, such
as the windscreen wipers
2 Ignition (power supply for all consum-
ers) and drive position
3 To start the engine
The steering wheel is locked when the key
is removed from the ignition lock.
Starting the engine
Important safety notes
G WARNING
If children are left unsupervised in the
vehicle, they could:
Ropen
doors, thereby endangering other
persons or road users
Rget out and be struck by oncoming traffic
Roperate vehicle equipment and become
trapped, for example
In addition, the children could also set the
vehicle in motion, for example, if they:
Rrelease
the parking brake
the automatic transmission out of
park position P or shift manual transmission into neutral
Rstart the engine
There is a risk of an accident and injury.
When leaving the vehicle, always take the
key with you and lock the vehicle. Never
leave children and animals unattended in
Rshift
Z
>> Driving and parking.
G WARNING
If you switch off the ignition while driving, safety-relevant functions are only
available with limitations, or not at all.
This could affect, for example, the power
steering and the brake boosting effect. You
will require considerably more effort to
steer and brake. There is a risk of an accident.
Do not switch off the ignition while driving.
115
Driving
116
>> Driving and parking.
the vehicle. Keep the keys out of the reach
of children.
i You can start the engine in transmission positions P and N.
In order to start the engine in transmission position N you must depress the
brake pedal and keep it depressed.
G WARNING
Combustion engines emit poisonous
exhaust gases such as carbon monoxide.
Inhaling these exhaust gases leads to poisoning. There is a risk of fatal injury.
Therefore never leave the engine running
in enclosed spaces without sufficient ventilation.
G WARNING
Flammable materials introduced through
environmental influence or by animals can
ignite if in contact with the exhaust system
or parts of the engine that heat up. There is
a risk of fire.
Carry out regular checks to make sure that
there are no flammable foreign materials
in the engine compartment or in the exhaust
system.
! Do not depress the accelerator when
starting the engine.
i The engine runs at a higher engine
speed during a cold start so that the catalytic converter can reach operating
temperature more quickly. The sound of
the engine may change as a result.
Manual transmission
X
Depress the brake pedal and keep it
depressed.
X Depress the clutch pedal fully.
X Engage neutral.
Automatic transmission
X
Shift the transmission to position P
(Y page 123).
The transmission position display in the
multifunction display shows P
(Y page 123).
Starting procedure
X
Turn the key to position 3 in the ignition
lock (Y page 115) and release it as soon as
the engine is running.
Pulling away
General notes
G WARNING
Vehicles with automatic transmission:
If the engine speed is above the engine
idling speed and you then engage transmission position D or R, the vehicle may
accelerate suddenly. There is a risk of an
accident.
When engaging transmission position D or
R, always keep the brake pedal firmly
depressed and do not depress the accelerator pedal at the same time.
! Vehicles with manual transmission:
change gear in good time and avoid spinning the wheels. You could otherwise
damage the vehicle.
! Release the parking brake before driving off. The parking brake can otherwise
overheat, malfunction and wear out
quickly.
Accelerate gently when pulling away.
The vehicle locks centrally once you have
pulled away.
You can open the doors from the inside at
any time.
You can also deactivate the automatic locking feature (Y page 69).
Driving
Rthe
ignition is switched on
Ryou depress the brake pedal and keep it
depressed and
Ryou press release button on the selector
lever (Y page 123).
Only then is the shift lock released.
Automatic start/stop system
Introduction
The automatic start/stop system switches
the engine off automatically if the vehicle
is stopped under certain conditions.
When pulling away again, the engine starts
automatically. The automatic start/stop
system thereby helps you to reduce the fuel
consumption and emissions of your vehicle.
i Vehicles with automatic transmission:
transmission shifts take place at higher
engine speeds after a cold start. This
helps the catalytic converter to reach its
operating temperature more quickly.
General notes
Hill start assist
Hill start assist helps you when pulling
away forwards or in reverse on an uphill
gradient. It holds the vehicle for a short
time after you have removed your foot from
the brake pedal. This gives you enough time
to move your foot from the brake pedal to
the accelerator pedal and depress it before
the vehicle begins to roll.
G WARNING
After a while, hill start assist no longer
holds the vehicle and it may roll away.
There is a risk of an accident and injury.
Therefore, quickly move your foot from the
brake pedal to the accelerator pedal. Never
leave the vehicle when it is held by hill
start assist.
: Start/stop display (conditions are met)
; Start/stop display (conditions not met)
The automatic start/stop system is automatically activated when you start the
engine with the key.
The indicator lamp in the automatic start/
stop system button lights up if the automatic start/stop system has been deactivated manually (Y page 119) or as the result
of a malfunction.
Hill start assist is not active if:
Ryou
pull away on level ground
Ryou pull away in a forward gear on a down-
hill slope
vehicles with automatic transmission, the transmission is in position N.
Rthe parking brake is engaged.
Resp® is malfunctioning.
Ron
Z
>> Driving and parking.
Vehicles with automatic transmission: you
can only shift the transmission from position P to the desired transmission position
if:
117
118
Driving
>> Driving and parking.
Automatic start/stop function
General notes
If the automatic start/stop system automatically switches off the engine, the è
symbol is shown in the instrument cluster.
This is the case if, among other things:
Rthe
indicator lamp in the automatic
start/stop system button does not light
up
Rthe outside temperature is within the
range that is suitable for the system
Rthe engine is at normal operating temperature
Rthe set temperature for the vehicle interior has been reached
Rthe battery is sufficiently charged
Rthe system detects that the windscreen is
not misted up when the air-conditioning
system is switched on
Rthe tailgate is closed
Rthe driver's door is closed and the driver's seat belt is fastened
If not all conditions for automatic start/
stop system are fulfilled, the ç symbol
is shown.
i All of the vehicle's systems except the
climate control remain active when the
engine is switched off automatically.
This is also the case if you exit the vehicle. If you wish to exit the vehicle,
always turn off the ignition and secure
the vehicle against rolling away.
i The è symbol flashes and a warning
tone sounds if:
Rthe
automatic start/stop system
switches the engine off automatically,
and
Ryou take off your seat belt, and
Ryou open the driver's door
Vehicles with a colour display: in addition, the When exiting: remove key
warning message appears.
Vehicles with manual transmission
The automatic start/stop system switches
the engine off automatically if you stop the
vehicle.
X
Brake the vehicle.
Engage neutral (Y page 121).
X Release the clutch pedal.
The engine is switched off automatically.
X
Vehicles with automatic transmission
If the vehicle is stopped in transmission
position D or N, the ECO start/stop function
switches off the engine automatically.
i This is also the case if you have manually activated the switch.
Automatic engine start
General notes
The engine is started automatically if you:
Ryou
switch off the automatic start/stop
system by pressing the automatic start/
stop system button
Ryou open the tailgate
Rthe vehicle starts to roll
Rthe temperature in the vehicle interior
deviates from the set range
Rthe system detects moisture on the windscreen when the air-conditioning system
is switched on
Rthe battery's charge status is too low
Vehicles with manual transmission
! Only engage gear when the clutch pedal
is depressed.
The engine is started automatically if you
depress the clutch pedal.
Driving
119
Vehicles with automatic transmission
The engine is started automatically if you:
the brake pedal when in transmission position D or N
Rrelease the brake pedal with manual
transmission activated
Rmove the transmission out of position P
Shifting the transmission to position P
does not start the engine.
>> Driving and parking.
Rrelease
Switching the automatic start/stop system on and off
X
To deactivate: press automatic start/
stop system button ;.
Indicator lamp : lights up.
X
To activate: press automatic start/stop
system button ;.
Indicator lamp : goes out.
i If indicator lamp : is on, the automatic start/stop system has been deactivated manually or as the result of a
malfunction. The engine will then not be
switched off automatically when the
vehicle stops.
Z
120
Driving
>> Driving and parking.
Problems with the engine
Problem
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
The engine does not
start. The starter
motor can be heard.
RThere
is a malfunction in the engine electronics.
is a malfunction in the fuel supply.
X Switch off the engine before attempting to start the engine
again (Y page 133).
X Try to start the engine again (Y page 115). Avoid excessively
long and frequent attempts to start the engine, as this will
drain the battery.
RThere
If the engine does not start after several attempts:
X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
The engine does not
start. The starter
motor can be heard.
The fuel gauge indicates empty.
The fuel tank is empty.
Refuel the vehicle.
X
The engine does not
The on-board voltage is too low because the battery is too weak
start. You cannot hear or discharged.
the starter motor.
X Jump-start the vehicle (Y page 228).
If the engine does not start despite attempts to jump-start it:
Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
X
The starter motor was exposed to a thermal load that was too
high.
X Allow the starter motor to cool down for approximately two
minutes.
X Try to start the engine again.
If the engine still does not start:
Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
X
The engine is not run- There is a malfunction in the engine electronics or in a
ning smoothly and is mechanical component of the engine management system.
misfiring.
X Only depress the accelerator pedal slightly.
Otherwise, non-combusted fuel may get into the catalytic
converter and damage it.
X Have the cause rectified immediately at a qualified specialist workshop.
Problem
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
The coolant temperature exceeds 110 †.
The red coolant temperature warning
lamp comes on while
the engine is running.
A warning tone also
sounds.
Vehicles with a colour display: the Stop
Switch off engine
message appears.
The coolant level is too low. The coolant is too hot and the
engine is no longer being cooled sufficiently.
X Stop as soon as possible and allow the engine and the coolant
to cool down.
X Check the coolant level (Y page 210). Observe the warning
notes as you do so and top up the coolant if necessary.
If the coolant level is correct, the engine radiator fan may be
faulty. The coolant is too hot and the engine is no longer being
cooled sufficiently.
X If the coolant temperature is below 110 †, you can continue
driving to the nearest qualified specialist workshop.
X Avoid heavy loads on the engine as you do so, e.g. driving in
mountainous terrain and stop-start traffic.
Manual transmission
Gear lever
! Only engage gear when the clutch pedal
is depressed.
! If you shift to 5th gear, you must ensure
that the gear lever is firmly pushed to
the right. Otherwise, you could shift
unintentionally into 3rd gear and damage the transmission.
If you shift down at too high a speed
(transmission braking), this can cause
the engine to overrev, leading to engine
damage.
Do not use the clutch bite point to keep
the vehicle stationary on uphill gradients. There is otherwise a risk of damaging the clutch.
1 - 5 Forward gears
k
Reverse gear
Shifting to neutral
! On long and steep downhill gradients,
especially if the vehicle is laden, you
must shift into gear 1, 2 or 3 in good time.
By doing so, you will make use of the
braking effect of the engine. This
relieves the load on the brake system and
prevents the brakes from overheating and
wearing too quickly.
Z
121
>> Driving and parking.
Manual transmission
Automatic transmission
122
X
>> Driving and parking.
X
Depress the clutch pedal fully.
Move the gearshift lever to position :.
Engaging reverse gear
! Only shift into reverse gear R when the
vehicle is stationary. Otherwise, you
could damage the transmission.
All vehicles except for smart 66 kw Turbo
X
X
Engage neutral (Y page 121).
Press the gear lever to the right and then
pull it back.
Vehicles with a monochrome display
Vehicles with a colour display
X
smart 66 kw Turbo
X
Engage neutral (Y page 121).
Pull collar : upwards.
X Press the gear lever to the right and then
pull it back.
X
i When reverse gear is selected, the automatic start/stop system is not available.
The automatic start/stop system is not
available until you drive faster than
10 km/h again.
Additional information about the automatic start/stop system (Y page 117).
Gearshift recommendation
The gearshift recommendations assist you
in adopting an economical driving style.
Shift one gear up or down according to
gearshift recommendation : when shown
in the multifunction display of the
instrument cluster.
Further information on the transmission
display:
RVehicles
with a monochrome display
(Y page 151)
RVehicles with a colour display
(Y page 153)
Automatic transmission
Important safety notes
G WARNING
If the engine speed is above the idling
speed and you engage transmission position D or R, the vehicle could pull away
suddenly. There is a risk of an accident.
Automatic transmission
G WARNING
The automatic transmission switches to
neutral position N when you switch off the
engine. The vehicle may roll away. There is
a risk of an accident.
After switching off the engine, always
switch to parking position P. Prevent the
parked vehicle from rolling away by applying the parking brake.
Selector lever
Transmission position and drive program display
The current transmission position and
drive program appear in the multifunction
display.
: Transmission position display
; Transmission mode display
j Park position with parking lock
k Reverse gear
i Neutral
h Drive
X
To shift transmission position: press
release button : and shift the gear
lever to the desired transmission position.
When you shift the transmission from positions N or P to position R, the ignition must
also be switched on.
i When you shift the transmission from
positions D or R to position N, you do not
need to press release button :.
Z
>> Driving and parking.
When engaging transmission position D or
R, always firmly depress the brake pedal
and do not simultaneously accelerate.
123
124
Automatic transmission
Transmission positions
>> Driving and parking.
B
C
Park position
This prevents the vehicle from
rolling away when stopped.
Only shift the transmission into
position P (Y page 123) when the
vehicle is stationary. The parking lock should not be used as a
brake when parking. Always apply
the parking brake in addition to
the parking lock in order to
secure the vehicle.
In the event of a malfunction of
the vehicle's electronics, the
transmission may lock. Information on manually disconnecting
the selector lever lock
(Y page 129).
Have the vehicle electronics
checked immediately at a qualified specialist workshop.
Reverse gear
Only shift the transmission into
position R when the vehicle is
stationary.
Neutral
Do not shift the transmission to N
while driving. Otherwise, the
automatic transmission could be
damaged.
No power is transmitted from the
engine to the drive wheels.
Releasing the parking brake and
brake pedal will allow you to
move the vehicle freely, e.g. to
push it or tow it away.
If esp® is deactivated or faulty:
shift the transmission to position N if the vehicle is in danger
of skidding, e.g. on icy roads.
A
! Rolling in neutral N can lead
to damage to the transmission.
Drive
The automatic transmission
changes gear automatically. All
forward gears are available.
7
Driving tips
Changing gear
The automatic transmission shifts to the
individual gears automatically when it is
in transmission position D. Gearshifting
is determined by:
Rthe
selected drive program
position of the accelerator pedal
Rthe road speed
Rthe
Accelerator pedal position
Your style of driving influences how the
automatic transmission shifts gear:
Rlittle
Rmore
throttle: early upshifts
throttle: late upshifts
Kickdown
If you want maximum acceleration, use
kickdown:
X
Depress the accelerator pedal beyond the
pressure point.
The transmission shifts to a lower gear
depending on the engine speed.
X Ease off the accelerator pedal once the
desired speed is reached.
The automatic transmission shifts back
up.
Rocking the vehicle free
Shifting back and forth between transmission positions D and R can help to free up
the vehicle if it gets stuck in mud or snow.
X Shift the selector lever alternately
between positions D and R.
The vehicle's engine management system
limits the speed to a maximum of 9 km/h
when shifting back and forth.
Program selector button
The program selector button allows you to
choose between drive programs with different driving characteristics.
The automatic transmission switches to
drive program E every time the engine is
started.
X
Press program selector button : to
change the drive program.
The letter of the selected drive program
appears in the multifunction display.
E Economy
Comfortable, economical
driving
S Standard
Dynamic, agile driving
More information on drive programs
(Y page 125).
Driving programs
Drive program E (Economy)
Drive program E is characterised by the
following:
Rcomfort-oriented
engine settings
Roptimal fuel consumption resulting from
the automatic transmission shifting up
sooner
Rthe automatic transmission shifting up
sooner. This results in the vehicle being
driven at lower engine speeds and the
wheels being less likely to spin
Drive program S (standard)
Drive program S is characterised by the
following:
Rthe
automatic transmission shifting up
later.
Ras a result of the later automatic transmission shift points, the fuel consumption possibly being higher.
Manual gearshifting
General notes
You can shift the gears manually using
either the selector lever or the gearshift
paddles. The transmission must be in position D.
Z
125
>> Driving and parking.
Automatic transmission
Automatic transmission
>> Driving and parking.
126
If it is permissible, the automatic transmission shifts to the next highest or next
lowest gear.
To use manual gearshifting, you have two
possibilities:
Rlong-term
Short-term setting (vehicles with Sports
package)
setting
Rshort-term setting (vehicles with Sports
package)
If you activate the manual gearshift setting, the currently selected gear is shown
in the multifunction display instead of D.
Long-term setting
X
X
X
X
To activate: shift the selector lever to D.
Push the selector lever to the left.
To activate: shift the selector lever to D.
Pull gearshift paddle : or ;.
The short-term setting remains active for a
certain length of time. Under certain conditions this minimum time is increased,
e.g. in the case of lateral acceleration,
during an overrun phase or while driving
on steep terrain.
X To deactivate: pull and hold gearshift
paddle ;.
or
X Change the transmission position with
the selector lever.
or
X Change the drive program with the program selector button.
Shifting with the selector lever
X
To deactivate: push the selector lever to
the right.
Automatic transmission
To shift up: push the selector lever in the
q direction.
The automatic transmission shifts up to
the next gear.
The automatic transmission automatically shifts up in order to prevent damage to the engine:
Rwhen
the maximum engine speed of the
currently engaged gear has been
reached and
Ryou depress the accelerator pedal.
X To shift down: pull the selector lever in
the ± direction.
The automatic transmission shifts down
to the next gear.
Downshifting occurs automatically while
coasting.
If the engine exceeds the maximum
engine speed when shifting down, the
automatic transmission protects against
engine damage by not shifting down.
The automatic transmission automatically shifts up in order to prevent damage to the engine:
Rwhen
the maximum engine speed of the
currently engaged gear has been
reached and
Ryou depress the accelerator pedal.
X To shift down: pull gearshift paddle :.
The automatic transmission shifts down
to the next gear.
Downshifting occurs automatically while
coasting.
If the engine exceeds the maximum
engine speed when shifting down, the
automatic transmission protects against
engine damage by not shifting down.
Gearshift recommendation
The gearshift recommendations assist you
in adopting an economical driving style.
Shifting with gearshift paddles (vehicles with Sports package)
Vehicles with a monochrome display
X
To shift up: pull gearshift paddle ;.
The automatic transmission shifts up to
the next gear.
Vehicles with a colour display
Z
>> Driving and parking.
X
127
Automatic transmission
128
>> Driving and parking.
X
Shift one gear up or down according to
gearshift recommendation : when shown
in the multifunction display of the
instrument cluster.
Further information on the transmission
display:
RVehicles
with a monochrome display
(Y page 151)
RVehicles with a colour display
(Y page 153)
Kickdown
If you want maximum acceleration, you can
also change the kickdown to be manually
switched on:
X
Depress the accelerator pedal beyond the
pressure point.
The transmission shifts to a lower gear
depending on the engine speed.
X Shift back up once the desired speed is
reached.
i If you apply full throttle, the automatic
transmission shifts up to the next gear
when the maximum engine speed is
reached. This prevents the engine from
overrevving.
Automatic transmission
129
Problem
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
The transmission has
problems shifting
gear.
The transmission is losing oil.
X Have the transmission checked at a qualified specialist
workshop immediately.
>> Driving and parking.
Problems with the transmission
The acceleration
The transmission is in emergency mode.
ability is deteriorat- X Stop.
ing.
X Shift the transmission to position P.
The transmission no
X Switch off the engine.
longer shifts into all
X Wait at least ten seconds before restarting the engine.
of the gears.
X Shift the transmission to position D.
Reverse gear can no
X Have the transmission checked at a qualified specialist
longer be engaged.
workshop immediately.
Manually releasing the selector lever
lock
You can manually release the selector level
lock in the event of an electrical malfunction. This is the case, for example, when
you want to release the parking brake while
towing away the vehicle and then apply it
again.
X
Apply the parking brake.
Prise out cover : at lower edge ; with
a flat, blunt object (e.g. a screwdriver
wrapped in cloth).
X Pull cover : in the direction of the
arrow.
X
! Do not use any sharp-edged objects to
prise out the cover from the centre console. Otherwise, the cover or the centre
console could be damaged.
X
Pull yellow release = behind the trim up
and simultaneously press release button ? on the selector lever.
X Shift the selector lever to N or P.
Z
130
Refuelling
Refuelling
>> Driving and parking.
Important safety notes
G WARNING
Fuel is highly flammable. If you handle fuel
incorrectly, there is a risk of fire and
explosion.
You must avoid fire, naked flames, creating
sparks and smoking. Switch off the engine
and, if applicable, the auxiliary heating
before refuelling.
G WARNING
Fuels are poisonous and hazardous to
health. There is a danger of injury.
Do not swallow fuel or let it come into contact with skin, eyes or clothing. Do not
inhale fuel vapours. Keep fuels out of the
reach of children.
If you or others come into contact with fuel,
observe the following:
RWash
the fuel off any affected areas of
skin with water and soap immediately.
RIf you get fuel in your eyes, rinse them
thoroughly with clean water immediately. Seek immediate medical attention.
RIf fuel is swallowed, seek immediate
medical attention. Do not induce vomiting.
RChange any clothing that has come into
contact with fuel immediately.
G WARNING
Electrostatic charge can cause sparks and
thereby ignite fuel vapours. There is a risk
of fire and explosion.
Always touch the vehicle body before opening the fuel filler flap or touching the fuel
pump nozzle. This discharges any electrostatic charge that may have built up.
Do not get into the vehicle again during the
refuelling process. Otherwise, electrostatic charge could build up again.
! Do not use diesel to refuel vehicles
with a petrol engine. Do not switch on the
ignition if you accidentally refuel with
the wrong fuel. Otherwise, the fuel will
enter the fuel system. Even small amounts
of the wrong fuel can result in damage to
the fuel system and the engine. Notify a
qualified specialist workshop and have
the fuel tank and fuel lines drained completely.
! Overfilling the fuel tank could damage
the fuel system.
! Take care not to spill any fuel on painted surfaces. You could otherwise damage
the paintwork.
! Use a filter when adding fuel from a fuel
can. The fuel lines and/or the diesel
injection system could otherwise be
blocked by particles from the fuel can.
If you overfill the fuel tank, some fuel may
spray out when you remove the fuel pump
nozzle.
For further information on fuel and fuel
quality (Y page 261).
Refuelling
General notes
The fuel filler flap is unlocked or locked
automatically when you lock or unlock the
vehicle with the key.
The position of the fuel filler cap is displayed 8 in the instrument cluster. The
arrow next to the filling pump indicates
the side of the vehicle.
Refuelling
131
>> Driving and parking.
Opening the fuel filler flap
: To open the fuel filler flap
; To attach the fuel filler cap
= Fuel type instruction label
X
Switch off the engine.
Remove the key from the ignition lock.
X Open the fuel filler flap in the direction
of arrow :.
X Turn the fuel filler cap anti-clockwise
and remove it.
X Hang the fuel filler cap on the hook on the
inside of the fuel filler flap.
X Completely insert the filler neck of the
fuel pump nozzle into the tank, hook in
place and refuel.
X Only fill the tank until the pump nozzle
switches off.
i Do not add any more fuel after the pump
stops filling for the first time. Otherwise, fuel may leak out.
X
Closing the fuel filler flap
X
Replace the fuel filler cap on the filler
neck and turn it clockwise.
X Close the fuel filler flap.
i Close the fuel filler flap before locking the vehicle.
Z
132
Parking
>> Driving and parking.
Problems with the fuel and fuel tank
Problem
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
Fuel is leaking from
the vehicle.
The fuel line or the fuel tank is faulty.
G WARNING
There is a risk of fire or explosion.
X Turn the key to position 0 in the ignition lock and remove it
immediately (Y page 115).
X Do not restart the engine under any circumstances.
X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
The fuel filler flap
cannot be opened.
The fuel filler flap is not unlocked.
X Unlock the vehicle (Y page 65).
The key battery is discharged or nearly discharged.
X Unlock the vehicle using the key element in the emergency
lock (Y page 70).
The fuel filler flap is unlocked, but the opening mechanism is
jammed.
X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Parking
Important safety notes
G WARNING
Flammable material such as leaves, grass or
twigs may ignite if they come into contact
with hot parts of the exhaust system or
exhaust gas flow. There is a risk of fire.
Park the vehicle so that no flammable material can come into contact with hot vehicle
components. In particular, do not park on
dry grassland or harvested grain fields.
G WARNING
If you leave children unattended in the
vehicle, they may be able to set the vehicle
in motion if, for example, they:
Rrelease
the parking brake
the automatic transmission out of
park position P or shift manual transmission into neutral
Rstart the engine
In addition, they may operate vehicle
equipment and become trapped. There is a
risk of an accident and injury.
When leaving the vehicle, always take the
key with you and lock the vehicle. Never
leave children unattended in the vehicle.
Rshift
! Always secure the vehicle correctly
against rolling away. Otherwise, the
vehicle or its drivetrain could be damaged.
Rthe
parking brake must be applied.
Ra gear must be engaged on vehicles with
manual transmission.
Rthe selector lever must be in position P
on vehicles with automatic transmission.
Rthe key must be removed from the ignition lock.
Ron uphill or downhill gradients, the
front wheels must be turned towards the
kerb.
Switching off the engine
Important safety notes
G WARNING
The automatic transmission switches to
neutral position N when you switch off the
engine. The vehicle may roll away. There is
a risk of an accident.
After switching off the engine, always
switch to parking position P. Prevent the
parked vehicle from rolling away by applying the parking brake.
Vehicles with manual transmission
X
Select a gear.
Turn the key to position 0 in the ignition
lock and remove it.
The immobiliser is activated.
X Apply the parking brake.
X
133
G WARNING
If you must brake the vehicle with the parking brake, the braking distance is considerably longer and the wheels could lock.
This increases the risk of skidding and an
accident.
Only use the parking brake to brake the
vehicle when the service brake is faulty. Do
not apply the parking brake too firmly. If
the wheels lock, release the parking brake
until the wheels begin turning again.
>> Driving and parking.
To ensure that the vehicle is secured
against rolling away unintentionally:
Parking
Parking brake
General notes
G WARNING
If you leave children unattended in the
vehicle, they may be able to set the vehicle
in motion if, for example, they:
Rrelease
the parking brake
the automatic transmission out of
park position P or shift manual transmission into neutral
Rstart the engine
In addition, they may operate vehicle
equipment and become trapped. There is a
risk of an accident and injury.
When leaving the vehicle, always take the
key with you and lock the vehicle. Never
leave children unattended in the vehicle.
Rshift
The brake lights do not light up when you
brake the vehicle with the parking brake.
Vehicles with automatic transmission
X
Apply the parking brake.
Shift the transmission to position P.
X Turn the key to position 0 in the ignition
lock and remove it.
The immobiliser is activated.
X
Z
Driving tips
134
>> Driving and parking.
X
To apply: firmly pull parking brake ;
upwards.
The J indicator lamp in the instrument cluster lights up if the engine is
running.
X To release: depress the brake pedal and
keep it depressed.
X Press release button : on parking
brake ; and guide the parking brake
down to the stop.
The J indicator lamp in the instrument cluster goes out.
The parking brake is not yet engaged if:
Ra
warning tone sounds
Release parking brake message
appears in the multifunction display
(vehicles with colour display) and
Rthe J indicator lamp in the instrument cluster lights up
Rthe
Parking up the vehicle
If you leave the vehicle parked up for longer than four weeks, the battery may be
damaged by exhaustive discharging.
If you leave the vehicle parked up for longer than six weeks, it may suffer from lack
of use.
X
Visit a qualified specialist workshop
and seek advice.
i You can obtain information about
trickle chargers from a qualified specialist workshop.
Driving tips
General notes
Important safety notes
G WARNING
If you switch off the ignition while driving, safety-relevant functions are only
available with limitations, or not at all.
This could affect, for example, the power
steering and the brake boosting effect. You
will require considerably more effort to
steer and brake. There is a risk of an accident.
Do not switch off the ignition while driving.
Drive sensibly – save fuel
Observe the following tips to save fuel:
RThe tyres should always be inflated to the
recommended tyre pressure.
unnecessary loads.
RWarm up the engine at low engine speeds.
RAvoid frequent acceleration or braking.
RHave all maintenance work carried out as
indicated by the service intervals in the
Service Booklet or by the service interval display.
Fuel consumption also increases when
driving in cold weather, in stop-start
traffic and in hilly terrain.
RRemove
eco score
General notes
The eco score display provides feedback on
how economical your driving characteristics are. The eco score display assists you
in achieving the most economical driving
style for the selected settings and prevailing conditions. Consumption can be
significantly influenced by your driving
style.
In addition to driving style, the consumption is affected by many other factors, such
as:
Rload
Rtyre
pressure
start
Rchoice of route
Rthe use of electrical consumers
Rcold
These factors are not included in the eco
score display.
Vehicles with a monochrome display
from the start of the journey to its completion. Therefore, there are dynamic
changes in the percentage count at the
start of a journey. During a prolonged
driving time, these changes are smaller.
For dynamic changes, perform a manual
reset (Y page 155).
When the fuel level reaches the reserve
range, the remaining fuel storage is shown
in the multifunction display instead of the
percentage value.
For further information on the eco score
display, see (Y page 155).
Vehicles with a colour display
The percentage count in eco score display : only appears after a distance of
approx. 400 m has been covered. A higher
percentage count indicates a more economical driving style. If the ignition remains
switched off for longer than 4 hours, eco
score display : in the on-board computer
will be automatically reset.
Vehicles with manual transmission
i An economical driving style involves
driving with a moderate engine speed.
To achieve a higher value:
Robserve the gearshift recommendation
Raccelerate
moderately, especially at
higher speeds
Rdrive carefully and keep your distance
from the vehicle in front
Rrelease the accelerator pedal in good
time
Rallow the vehicle to coast without the
use of the brakes and engage neutral if
necessary
Rdrive at a constant speed and avoid
unnecessary acceleration and deceleration
Rdrive the vehicle in drive program E
(vehicles with automatic transmission).
Vehicles with automatic transmission
The percentage count in the eco score display only appears after a distance of
approx. 400 m has been covered. A higher
percentage count indicates a more economical driving style. If the ignition remains
switched off for longer than 4 hours, the eco
score display in the on-board computer
will be automatically reset.
i The eco score calculation takes into
account your driving characteristics
Z
135
>> Driving and parking.
Driving tips
>> Driving and parking.
136
Driving tips
Vehicles with manual transmission: the
percentage count in the eco score display
is an average value based on the following
three categories:
Raccelerate
(evaluation of all acceleration processes)
- The bar fills up: moderate acceleration, especially at higher speeds
- The bar empties: sporty acceleration
Ranticipatory (assessment of driving
behaviour at all times)
- The bar fills up: keep your distance,
release the accelerator early and allow
the vehicle to coast without using the
brakes. Maintain a constant speed and
avoid unnecessary acceleration and
deceleration.
- The bar empties: fluctuations in
speed, frequent braking
Rshift (evaluation of all gear changes)
- The bar fills up: observe the gearshift
recommendations in the multifunction
display.
- The bar empties: driving with the
engine speed too high or too low
Vehicles with automatic transmission: the
percentage count in the eco score display
is an average value based on the following
two categories:
Raccelerate
(evaluation of all acceleration processes)
- The bar fills up: moderate acceleration, especially at higher speeds
- The bar empties: sporty acceleration
Ranticipatory (assessment of driving
behaviour at all times)
- The bar fills up: keep your distance,
release the accelerator early and allow
the vehicle to coast without using the
brakes. Maintain a constant speed and
avoid unnecessary acceleration and
deceleration.
- The bar empties: fluctuations in
speed, frequent braking
An economical driving style involves driving with a moderate engine speed.
Vehicles with manual transmission: to
achieve a higher value in the shift category, observe the gearshift recommendations.
i On long journeys at a constant speed,
e.g. on the motorway, only the bar for
anticipatory will change.
i The eco score calculation takes into
account your driving characteristics
from the start of the journey to its completion. Therefore, there are dynamic
changes in the bars at the start of a journey. During a prolonged driving time,
these changes are smaller. For dynamic
changes, perform a manual reset
(Y page 155).
If you reset the data in the eco score display, then the data in the from start
trip computer is also reset automatically (Y page 154).
For further information on the eco score
display, see (Y page 155).
Braking
Important safety notes
G WARNING
If you shift down on a slippery road surface
in an attempt to increase the engine's
braking effect, the drive wheels could lose
their grip. This increases the risk of skidding and having an accident.
Do not shift down for additional engine
braking on a slippery road surface.
Downhill gradients
Change into a lower gear in good time on
long and steep downhill gradients. Take
particular note of this when driving a
laden vehicle.
i This also applies if you have activated
cruise control or the speed limiter.
This will use the braking effect of the
engine, so less braking will be required to
prevent the vehicle from gaining speed.
This relieves the load on the brake system
and prevents the brakes from overheating
and wearing too quickly.
Heavy and light loads
G WARNING
The braking system can overheat if you
leave your foot on the brake pedal while
driving. This increases the braking distance and could even cause the braking system to fail. There is a risk of an accident.
Never use the brake pedal as a footrest. Do
not simultaneously depress both the brake
pedal and the accelerator pedal while driving.
! Depressing the brake pedal constantly
results in excessive and premature wear
to the brake pads.
If heavy demands are made on the brakes, do
not park the vehicle immediately. Drive on
for a short while. This allows the airflow to
cool the brakes more quickly.
If the brakes have been used only moderately, you should occasionally test their
effectiveness. To do this, brake more
firmly from a higher speed, paying attention to traffic conditions. This improves
the grip of the brakes.
Wet road surfaces
If you have driven for a long time in heavy
rain without braking, there may be a
delayed reaction from the brakes when
braking for the first time. This may also
occur after a car wash or after driving
through deep water.
You have to depress the brake pedal more
firmly. Maintain a greater distance from
the vehicle in front.
After driving on a wet road or having the
vehicle washed, brake firmly while paying
attention to the traffic conditions. This
will warm up the brake discs, thereby drying them more quickly and protecting them
against corrosion.
Limited braking performance on salttreated roads
If you drive on salt-treated roads, a layer
of salt may form on the brake discs and
pads. This can increase the braking distance considerably.
RBrake occasionally to remove any salt
that may have started to build up. Ensure
that you do not endanger other road users
when doing so.
RCarefully depress the brake pedal at the
end of the journey and when starting the
next journey.
RMaintain a much greater distance to the
vehicle in front.
New brake pads/linings
New or replaced brake pads/linings and
discs only reach their optimum braking
effect after several hundred kilometres of
driving. Compensate for the reduced braking effect by applying greater force to the
brake pedal.
When having brake pads/linings fitted,
smart recommends that for safety reasons
you only use those which are approved for
smart vehicles or are of an equivalent
quality standard. Brake pads/linings
which have not been approved for smart
vehicles or which are not of an equivalent
quality could affect your vehicle's operating safety.
Z
137
>> Driving and parking.
Driving tips
138
Driving tips
Driving on wet roads
>> Driving and parking.
Aquaplaning
If water has accumulated to a certain depth
on the road surface, there is a danger of
aquaplaning occurring, even if:
Ryou
are driving at low speeds
tyres have adequate tread depth
For this reason, in the event of heavy rain
or in conditions in which aquaplaning can
occur you must drive in the following manner:
Rthe
Rlower
your speed
tyre ruts
Ravoid sudden steering movements
Rbrake carefully
Ravoid
Driving on flooded roads
! Bear in mind that vehicles travelling
in front or in the opposite direction
create waves. This may cause the maximum permissible water depth to be
exceeded.
These notes must be observed under all
circumstances. You could otherwise damage the engine, the electronics or the
transmission.
If you have to drive on stretches of road on
which water has collected, please bear in
mind that:
Rthe
water level should not exceed the
lower edge of the vehicle body in still
water
Ryou should drive no faster than walking
pace
Winter driving
G WARNING
If you shift down on a slippery road surface
in an attempt to increase the engine's
braking effect, the drive wheels could lose
their grip. This increases the risk of skidding and having an accident.
Do not shift down for additional engine
braking on a slippery road surface.
G DANGER
If the exhaust pipe is blocked or sufficient
ventilation is not possible, poisonous
exhaust gases such as carbon monoxide may
enter the vehicle. This is the case, for
example, if the vehicle gets stuck in snow.
There is a risk of fatal injury.
If you have to leave the engine running,
keep the exhaust pipe and the area around
the vehicle free of snow. Open a window on
the leeward side of the vehicle to ensure an
adequate supply of fresh air.
Have your vehicle winterproofed at a
qualified specialist workshop at the onset
of winter.
You should drive particularly carefully on
slippery road surfaces. Avoid sudden
acceleration, steering and braking
manoeuvres. Do not use cruise control.
If the vehicle threatens to skid or cannot be
stopped when moving at low speed:
X
Try to bring the vehicle under control by
using corrective steering.
X Vehicles with automatic transmission:
shift the transmission to position N.
The outside temperature indicator is not
designed to serve as an ice-warning device
and is therefore unsuitable for that purpose. Changes in the outside temperature
are displayed after a short delay.
Indicated temperatures just above the
freezing point do not guarantee that the
road surface is free of ice. The road may
still be icy, especially in wooded areas or
on bridges.
You should pay special attention to road
conditions when temperatures are around
the freezing point.
For more information on driving with snow
chains, see (Y page 243).
For more information on driving with summer tyres, see (Y page 242).
Observe the notes in the "Winter operation" section (Y page 242).
Driving systems
to lose traction and the vehicle could
then skid
Rwhen there is poor visibility, e.g. due to
fog, heavy rain or snow
If there is a change of drivers, advise the
new driver of the speed stored.
Cruise control buttons
Cruise control
General notes
Cruise control maintains a constant road
speed for you. Cruise control does not
brake the vehicle automatically. Only the
engine's braking effect is available. In
order to reduce speed and maintain distance to other road users, you need to brake
yourself. This cancels cruise control.
Use cruise control only if road and traffic
conditions make it appropriate to maintain a steady speed for a prolonged period.
You can use cruise control at speeds above
30 km/h.
: Activates/deactivates cruise control
; Stores, increases or reduces the cur-
rent speed
= Calls up the last speed stored
? Interrupts cruise control
Important safety notes
Activating cruise control
If you fail to adapt your driving style,
cruise control can neither reduce the risk
of an accident nor override the laws of
physics. Cruise control cannot take into
account road, weather or traffic conditions. Cruise control is only an aid. You are
responsible for the distance to the vehicle
in front, for vehicle speed, for braking in
good time, and for staying in lane.
Do not use cruise control:
Cruise control must be activated before it
can be used.
X Press switch : (V).
Cruise control is activated.
The V symbol appears in the multifunction display.
Rin
road and traffic conditions which do
not allow you to maintain a constant
speed (e.g. in heavy traffic or on winding
roads)
Ron smooth or slippery roads. Braking or
accelerating can cause the drive wheels
i When you switch off the engine, cruise
control remains activated and the last
speed stored is cleared.
Storing and maintaining the current
speed
When cruise control is active, you can save
the current speed starting from 30 km/h.
Z
139
>> Driving and parking.
Driving systems
Driving systems
140
>> Driving and parking.
X
Increasing or decreasing the speed
Accelerate the vehicle to the desired
speed.
X Press switch ; (®) and release it.
X Remove your foot from the accelerator
pedal.
Cruise control is activated. The vehicle
automatically maintains the stored
speed. The stored speed appears beside
the V icon in the multifunction display.
i Cruise control is not deactivated if you
i Cruise control may be unable to main-
R®:
tain the stored speed on uphill gradients. The stored speed is resumed when
the gradient evens out.
On downhill gradients, only the engine's
braking effect is available. You have to
operate the brakes yourself to reduce
speed. This cancels cruise control.
Calling up the last speed stored
G WARNING
If you call up the stored speed and this differs from your current speed, the vehicle
will accelerate. If you do not know the
stored speed, the vehicle can accelerate
unexpectedly. There is a risk of an accident.
Before you call up the stored speed, pay
attention to traffic conditions. If you do
not know the stored speed, store the desired
speed again.
X
Press button = ° and release it.
Cruise control is activated and adjusts
the vehicle's speed to the last speed
stored.
X Remove your foot from the accelerator
pedal.
i The last speed stored is cleared when
you switch off the engine.
In order to be able to increase or decrease
the speed, a speed must already have been
stored.
depress the accelerator pedal. For example, if you accelerate briefly to overtake, cruise control adjusts the vehicle's
speed to the last speed stored after you
have finished overtaking.
R−:
increases the speed
decreases the speed
X
Press switch ; (®) or (−) repeatedly
until the desired speed is reached.
The speed is gradually increased or
reduced.
or
X Press and hold switch ; (®) or (−)
until the desired speed is reached.
X Release the switch.
The new speed is stored.
Cancelling cruise control
When cruise control is switched on, you can
cancel cruise control at any time and call
up the stored speed again later.
i The last speed stored is cleared when
you switch off the engine.
X
Press button ? ± and release it.
or
X Brake
Cruise control is cancelled.
Cruise control is also cancelled when:
Ryou
engage the parking brake
depress the clutch
Resp® intervenes
Ryou
Deactivating cruise control
X
Press switch : so that the switch is set
to the middle position.
Cruise control is deactivated.
Driving systems
Limiter buttons
i Once you have activated the limiter,
cruise control is deactivated.
Limiter
General notes
The limiter helps you to avoid exceeding a
set speed. The limiter does not brake the
vehicle automatically. On long and steep
downhill gradients, especially if the vehicle is laden, you must shift to a lower gear
in time. By doing so, you will make use of
the braking effect of the engine. The limiter may be unable to prevent the stored
speed from being exceeded on downhill
gradients. In this case, the stored speed
flashes in the display and a warning tone
sounds. Brake yourself, if necessary, to
avoid exceeding the speed.
Important safety notes
If you fail to adapt your driving style, the
limiter can neither reduce the risk of an
accident nor override the laws of physics.
The limiter cannot take into account road,
weather or traffic conditions. The limiter
is only an aid. You are responsible for the
distance to the vehicle in front, for vehicle speed, for braking in good time, and for
staying in lane.
If there is a change of drivers, advise the
new driver of the speed stored.
: Activates/deactivates the limiter
; Stores, increases or reduces the cur-
rent speed
= Calls up the last speed stored
? Cancels the limiter
Activating the limiter
The limiter must be activated before the
speed limiter can be used.
X Press (LIM) switch :.
The limiter is activated.
The È symbol appears in the multifunction display.
i When you switch off the engine, the limiter remains activated and the last speed
stored is cleared.
Storing the speed
When the limiter is active, you can store
any speed starting from 30 km/h.
You can save the current driving speed or
you can set any desired speed while the
vehicle is stationary.
Saving the current driving speed
X
Accelerate the vehicle to the desired
speed.
X Press switch ; (®) and release it.
The limiter is activated. The stored
speed appears beside the È icon in
the multifunction display.
Z
>> Driving and parking.
The V symbol goes out in the multifunction display.
141
Driving systems
142
>> Driving and parking.
Setting a speed while the vehicle is stationary
X
Press switch ; (®) and release it.
The limiter is activated. The stored
speed appears beside the È icon in
the multifunction display.
Calling up the last speed stored
X
Press button = (°) and release it.
The limiter is activated.
i The last speed stored is cleared when
you switch off the engine.
Increasing or decreasing the speed
In order to be able to increase or decrease
the speed, a speed must already have been
stored.
R®: increases the speed
R−: decreases the speed
X
Press switch ; (®) or (−) repeatedly
until the desired speed is reached. The
speed is then gradually increased or
decreased.
or
X Press and hold switch ; (®) or (−)
until the desired speed is reached. The
speed will be increased or reduced in
10 km/h increments.
X Release the switch.
The new speed is stored.
Cancelling the limiter
When the limiter is activated, you can cancel it at any time and call up the stored
speed again later.
i The last speed stored is cleared when
you switch off the engine.
X
Press button ± ? and release it.
The limiter is cancelled.
Deactivating the limiter
X
Press the upper section of switch : so
that the switch is set in the middle position.
The limiter is deactivated.
The È symbol goes out in the multifunction display.
Parking aid
General notes
The rear parking aid indicates audibly the
distance between your vehicle and an
object. If you engage reverse gear when the
engine is running, the parking aid is activated automatically.
Exceeding the stored speed
You can exceed the stored limit speed at
any time, if you depress the accelerator
pedal beyond the pressure point (kickdown). When the maximum speed is exceeded, the speed display flashes and a warning tone sounds. The limiter is activated
again once the speed drops below the stored
speed and kickdown is no longer active.
The parking aid monitors the rear area of
your vehicle using three sensors : in the
rear bumper. The sensors must be free of
dirt, ice and slush. Otherwise, they may not
function correctly. Clean the sensors regularly, taking care not to scratch or damage
them.
Driving systems
Deactivating/activating the parking aid
Important safety notes
The parking aid is only an aid. It is not a
substitute for your attention to the immediate surroundings. The responsibility for
safe manoeuvring and parking remains
with you. Make sure that there are no persons, animals or objects in range while
manoeuvring and parking.
! When parking, pay particular attention
to objects above or below the sensors,
such as flower pots or trailer drawbars.
The parking aid does not detect such
objects when they are in the immediate
vicinity of the vehicle. You could damage
the vehicle or the objects.
The sensors may not detect snow and other
objects that absorb ultrasonic waves.
Ultrasonic sources such as an automatic
car wash, the compressed-air brakes of a
truck or a pneumatic drill could cause
the parking aid to malfunction.
The parking aid may not function correctly on uneven terrain.
The parking aid does not take into account
obstacles located:
X
Press button ;.
Indicator lamp : lights up. The system
is deactivated.
X Press button ; again.
Indicator lamp : goes out. The system is
reactivated.
i The parking aid is automatically activated when you start the engine.
If you engage reverse gear while the engine
is running, the parking aid is activated
automatically. An acoustic signal sounds
when reverse gear is selected.
The parking aid is deactivated:
Rwhen
a speed of 10 km/h is exceeded
gear is no longer engaged
Rreverse
Rear view camera
General notes
Rbelow
the detection range, e.g. persons,
animals or objects
Rabove the detection range, e.g. overhanging loads, tail sections or loading
ramps of goods vehicles
Reversing camera : is an optical parking
and manoeuvring aid. It shows the area
Z
>> Driving and parking.
When reverse gear is engaged the system
measures the distance between your vehicle and an object. If the proximity to the
object behind the vehicle is less than
1.20 m, a beeping sound is issued. When the
object is a maximum of 30 cm away, a continuous tone is issued.
143
>> Driving and parking.
144
Driving systems
behind your vehicle with guide lines in the
smart Media-System display.
The area behind the vehicle is displayed as
a mirror image, as in the rear-view mirror.
i The text shown in the smart Media-System display depends on the language setting. The following are examples of
reversing camera displays.
Important safety notes
The reversing camera is only an aid. It is
not a substitute for your attention to the
immediate surroundings. The responsibility for safe manoeuvring and parking
remains with you. Make sure that there are
no persons, animals or objects in range
while manoeuvring and parking.
Under the following circumstances, the
reversing camera will not function, or will
function in a limited manner:
Rif
the tailgate is open
heavy rain, snow or fog
Rat night or in very dark places
Rif the camera is exposed to very bright
light
Rif the area is lit by fluorescent light or
LED lighting (the display may flicker)
Rif there is a sudden change in temperature, e.g. when driving into a heated
garage in winter
Rif the camera lens is dirty or obstructed
Rif the rear of your vehicle is damaged. In
this event, have the camera position and
setting checked at a qualified specialist workshop
The field of vision and other functions of
the reversing camera may be restricted due
to additional accessories on the rear of the
vehicle (e.g. licence plate holder, bicycle
rack).
Rin
Activating/deactivating the reversing
camera
X
To activate: make sure that the key is in
position 2 in the ignition lock.
X Make sure that Reversing camera dis‐
play setting is selected in the smart
Media-System (see separate operating
instructions).
X Engage reverse gear.
The area behind the vehicle is shown with
guide lines in the smart Media-System
display.
To switch off: after driving forwards
briefly, the reversing camera will turn
itself off.
Messages in the display
The reversing camera may show a distorted
view of obstacles or show them incorrectly
or not at all. Obstacles are not shown by the
reversing camera in the following locations:
Rvery
close to the rear bumper
the rear bumper
Rin the area immediately above the tailgate handle
Runder
! Objects not at ground level may appear
to be further away than they actually are,
e.g.:
Rthe
bumper of a parked vehicle
drawbar of a trailer
Rthe ball coupling of a trailer tow hitch
Rthe rear section of an HGV
Ra slanted post
Use the guidelines only for orientation.
Approach objects no further than the bottom-most guideline.
Rthe
This feature warns the driver if a lane
marking is crossed inadvertently. Lane
Keeping Assist uses a camera : which is
affixed on the windscreen behind the rear
view mirror.
A warning may be given if a front wheel
passes over a lane marking. The corresponding symbol flashes for a maximum of
five seconds in the display and a warning
tone sounds.
: Guide line without turning the steering
;
=
?
A
wheel, vehicle width including the
exterior mirrors (static)
Green guide line at a distance of
approximately 1.50 m from the rear of
the vehicle
Yellow guide line at a distance of
approximately 0.7 m from the rear of the
vehicle
Red guide line at a distance of approximately 0.3 m from the rear of the vehicle
Blue guide line for the vehicle width
including the exterior mirrors, for
current steering wheel angle (dynamic)
The guide lines are shown when the transmission is in position R.
The distance specifications only apply to
objects that are at ground level.
Lane Keeping Assist
General notes
Important safety notes
G WARNING
Lane Keeping Assist cannot always clearly
identify lane markings.
In these cases, Lane Keeping Assist may:
Rgive
an unnecessary warning
give a warning
There is a risk of an accident.
Always pay particular attention to the traffic situation and keep in lane, especially
if Lane Keeping Assist alerts you.
Rnot
G WARNING
The Lane Keeping Assist warning does not
return the vehicle to the original lane.
There is a risk of an accident.
Always steer, apply the brakes or accelerate the vehicle yourself, especially if Lane
Keeping Assist alerts you.
If you fail to adapt your driving style, Lane
Keeping Assist can neither reduce the risk
of an accident nor override the laws of
physics. Lane Keeping Assist cannot take
into account road, weather or traffic conditions. Lane Keeping Assist is only an
aid. You are responsible for the distance to
the vehicle in front, for vehicle speed, for
braking in good time, and for staying in
lane.
Lane Keeping Assist does not keep your
vehicle in its lane.
Z
145
>> Driving and parking.
Driving systems
146
Driving systems
>> Driving and parking.
The system may be impaired or may not
function if:
Rthere
is poor visibility, e.g. due to
insufficient illumination of the road, or
due to snow, rain, fog or spray
Rthere is glare, e.g. from oncoming traffic, the sun or reflection from other
vehicles (e.g. if the road surface is wet)
Rthe windscreen is dirty, misted up, damaged or covered, for instance by a
sticker, in the vicinity of the camera
Rno, or several, unclear lane markings are
present for one lane, e.g. in a construction area
Rthe lane markings are worn away, dark or
covered up, e.g. by dirt or snow
Rthe distance to the vehicle in front is too
small and the lane markings thus cannot
be detected
Rthe lane markings change quickly, e.g.
lanes branch off, cross one another or
merge
Rthe road is narrow and winding
Rthere are highly variable shade conditions on the road
No warning occurs if:
Ra
lane marking is crossed at speed
have switched on the turn signals. In
this case, the warnings are suppressed
for a certain period of time
Ryou cut the corner on a sharp bend
Ryou
Activating/deactivating Lane Keeping
Assist
Vehicles with a colour display:
X
To switch on: press button ;.
Indicator lamp : goes out. In the display, the à symbol and the Lane
Keeping Assist on message appear.
If you drive at speeds above 70 km/h and
lane markings are detected, Lane Keeping Assist is operational. The à symbol appears in the display with a green
background.
X To deactivate: press button ;.
Indicator lamp : lights up. The Ã
symbol in the display goes out. Lane
Keeping Assist is deactivated. The Lane
Keeping Assist off message appears in
the display.
Vehicles with a monochrome display
X
To switch on: press the ; button.
Indicator lamp : goes out. The Ã
symbol appears in the display.
If you drive at speeds above 70 km/h and
lane markings are detected, Lane Keeping Assist is operational. The ¤ symbol appears in the display.
X To deactivate: press button ;.
Indicator lamp : lights up. The Ã
symbol in the display goes out. Lane
Keeping Assist is deactivated.
i Your selection remains stored when you
switch off the engine.
Useful information ........................... 148
Important safety notes ...................... 148
Displays and operation ..................... 148
Menus and submenus ......................... 154
Display messages (on-board computer
with monochrome display) .................. 162
Display messages (on-board computer
with colour display) ......................... 167
Warning and indicator lamps in the
instrument cluster ........................... 184
>> On-board computer and displays.
147
148
Displays and operation
>> On-board computer and displays.
Useful information
i This Owner's Manual describes all models, series and optional equipment for
your vehicle that were available at the
time of going to press. Country-specific
differences are possible. Note that your
vehicle may not be fitted with all features described. This is also the case for
systems and functions relevant to safety.
i Read the information on qualified specialist workshops: (Y page 21).
Important safety notes
G WARNING
Operating the integrated information systems and communications equipment in the
vehicle while driving will distract you
from traffic conditions. You could then
lose control of the vehicle. There is a risk
of an accident.
Only operate these devices if road traffic
conditions permit. If you are unsure about
the surrounding conditions, pull over to a
safe location and make entries only while
the vehicle is stationary.
You must observe the legal requirements
for the country in which you are currently
driving when operating the on-board computer.
G WARNING
If the instrument cluster has failed or malfunctioned, you may not recognise function
restrictions relevant to safety. The operating safety of your vehicle may be
impaired. There is a risk of an accident.
Drive on carefully. Have the vehicle
checked at a qualified specialist workshop
immediately.
The on-board computer only shows display
messages and/or warnings from certain
systems in the display. You should there-
fore make sure your vehicle is operating
safely at all times. Otherwise, you may
cause an accident by driving a vehicle that
is not operating reliably.
If the operating safety of your vehicle
impaired, park the vehicle as soon as possible paying attention to road and traffic
conditions. Contact a qualified specialist
workshop.
Observe the notes in the overview of warning and indicator lamps in the instrument
cluster:
ROn-board
computer with a monochrome
display (Y page 28)
ROn-board computer with a colour display
(Y page 30)
Displays and operation
Instrument cluster lighting
Instrument cluster lighting includes illumination of the instrument cluster, the
additional instruments on the dashboard,
the displays and the controls.
The instrument cluster lighting is
switched automatically between day and
night lighting depending on the ambient
light conditions (Y page 87).
On vehicles with a colour display, you can
also set the brightness of the instrument
cluster lighting to different levels in the
on-board computer (Y page 158).
Speedometer
If you turn the key to position 2 in the
ignition lock, the warning and indicator
lamps in the instrument cluster will
briefly light up for a lamp test. During the
lamp test, the illuminated speedometer
needle moves in the speedometer.
The on-board computer with a colour display can show a digital speedometer in the
display. The digital speedometer can be
hidden/displayed and its speed unit
selected (Y page 159).
Fuel gauge
Outside temperature display
You should pay special attention to road
conditions when temperatures are around
the freezing point.
Bear in mind that the outside temperature
display indicates the temperature measured and does not record the road temperature.
The display shows the outside temperature
on the far right in the header:
Fuel level indicator (example: monochrome display)
display (Y page 151)
display (Y page 153)
Changes in the outside temperature are
displayed after a short delay.
If the outside temperature has fallen below
3 †, the Ò symbol is shown beside the
outside temperature display.
At outside temperatures between -3 † and
3 †:
Rmonochrome
Rcolour
Rthe
Ò symbol flashes for about
1 minute in the monochrome display and
then remains on continuously.
Rthe colour display also shows a display
message next to the Ò symbol
(Y page 173).
For an on-board computer with colour display, you can set the temperature unit of the
outside temperature display (Y page 160).
Fuel level indicator (example: colour display)
: Reserve fuel display
; Fuel gauge
= Fuel filler flap location indicator
u The fuel filler cap is located on
the right
? 6 Reserve fuel (yellow)
Fuel gauge ; is shown in the display as a
segment display with eight segments.
When the fuel level falls below the reserve
range of 5.0 l, the last illuminated segment
of the fuel display will flash and a warning
tone will sound. Reserve fuel display :
will also appear. The reserve fuel display
shows the numeric value of the remaining
fuel level in 0.5 l increments.
With a colour display:
symbol ? also appears in yellow
display message is also shown
(Y page 175).
R6
Ra
Z
149
>> On-board computer and displays.
Displays and operation
150
Displays and operation
>> On-board computer and displays.
Additional instruments on the dashboard
On-board computer with a monochrome
display
Operating the on-board computer
! Do not drive in the overrevving range.
Doing so will damage the engine.
H Environmental note
Avoid excessive engine speeds. This
unnecessarily increases the fuel consumption of your vehicle and harms the environment as a result of increased emissions.
The overrevving range of the engine is
shown with dashed lines in the orange
marking of rev counter :. The fuel supply
is interrupted to protect the engine when
the overrevving range is reached.
Dashboard clock ; is synchronised with
the clock in the on-board computer.
Rev counter :, together with dashboard
clock ;, can be rotated approximately 60°
on the dashboard.
For vehicles with a colour display, you can
also set the brightness of the instrument
cluster lighting to different levels
(Y page 158).
: Monochrome display
; Buttons on the multifunction lever
X
To activate the on-board computer:
unlock the vehicle and open a door.
If you do not subsequently lock the door,
the on-board computer will remain
active for approximately 15 minutes
without any further activity.
or
X Turn the key to position 1 in the ignition
lock.
You can control the display and the settings
in the on-board computer using buttons ;
on the multifunction lever.
Buttons ; on the multifunction lever
´
Press briefly:
RTo scroll forward at menu level
RTo
gradually increase the
value in the sub-menus
Press and hold:
C
RTo
E
switch directly to the trip
meter at menu level
RTo quickly increase the value
in the sub-menus
a
B
D
F
G
Press briefly:
RTo
confirm the setting in the
sub-menu
Press and hold:
Current fuel consumption (Y page 152)
Service display (Y page 211)
Restarts the tyre pressure monitor
(Y page 246)
6 Fuel level (Y page 149)
eco score display (Y page 134)
Reserve fuel display (Y page 149)
b Brake lamp failure warning lamp
(Y page 162)
Total distance recorder
V Cruise control (Y page 139)
È Limiter
Vehicles with automatic transmission
RTo reset the value at menu level
or call up the sub-menu
Monochrome display
Vehicles with manual transmission
: Time (Y page 152)
; Drive program (Y page 123)
= u Gearshift recommendation
(Y page 122)
? Transmission display
: Time (Y page 152)
; Transmission display
u Gearshift recommendation
(Y page 122)
¿ Standard display
S Transmission malfunction
(Y page 164)
= ¤ Lane Keeping Assist indicator
lamp (Y page 145)
? Outside temperature display
(Y page 149)
A Trip meter (Y page 152)
A
B
C
D
E
h Standard display or
= Gear indicator (manual mode)
S Transmission malfunction
(Y page 164)
¤ Lane Keeping Assist indicator
lamp (Y page 145)
Outside temperature display
(Y page 149)
Trip meter (Y page 152)
Current fuel consumption (Y page 152)
Service display (Y page 211)
Restarts the tyre pressure monitor
(Y page 246)
6 Fuel level (Y page 149)
Z
151
>> On-board computer and displays.
Displays and operation
Displays and operation
>> On-board computer and displays.
152
F eco score display (Y page 134)
Reserve fuel display (Y page 149)
G b Brake lamp failure warning lamp
(Y page 162)
H Total distance recorder
I V Cruise control (Y page 139)
È Limiter
Menus and multi-displays
Overview
The arrangement of the menus and displays
can be envisaged as a circle.
X
To scroll: repeatedly press the ´ button on the multifunction lever.
The menu functions/displays are shown
one after the other.
i If the ´ button is pressed and held
for approximately 3 seconds, the trip
meter appears directly on the display.
Depending on the vehicle equipment, you
can call up the following menus/displays
one after the other:
Rdisplay
and reset the trip meter
(Y page 152)
Rdisplay the current fuel consumption
(Y page 152)
Rdisplay the service due date
(Y page 211)
Rset the time menu (Y page 152)
RRestarting the tyre pressure monitor
(Y page 246)
Resetting values
You can reset the trip meter data and the
eco score display (Y page 134). You can only
reset the eco score if the display is showing the current fuel consumption.
X Repeatedly press the ´ button on the
multifunction lever until the display
shows the trip meter data or the current
fuel consumption.
X Press and hold the b button on the
multifunction lever.
The trip meter value or the eco score
display flashes for approx. 3 seconds.
The data is then reset.
The count in the eco score display only
reappears once a distance of approx.
400 m has been covered. If the ignition
remains switched off for longer than four
hours, the eco score display in the onboard computer will be automatically
reset.
X When the value has been reset, release
the b button.
If you release the b button earlier,
the data shown will not change.
Current fuel consumption
When the vehicle is stationary or up to a
speed of approximately 5 km/h, the display
shows the current fuel consumption as a
numeric value in l/h.
Setting the time
X Repeatedly press the ´ button on the
multifunction lever until the display
shows the ° symbol alongside the
time.
X Press and hold the b button on the
multifunction lever until the hour value
flashes.
X Press ´ to set the hour and confirm
the selection with b.
The minute value flashes.
X Press ´ to set the minutes and b to
confirm the selection.
The display will show the time selected.
i If the ´ button on the multifunction
lever is pressed and held when setting
the time, the numerical values will
change continuously.
On-board computer with a colour display
Operating the on-board computer
Left control panel ;
9
:
Press briefly:
RTo
scroll through a menu
RTo scroll through a sub-menu or
list
Press and hold:
switch directly to the Dis‐
tance menu at menu level
RTo switch directly to the back
function at the submenu level
RTo
a
RTo
confirm the selection
certain menus, to switch to
the Reset values? function
RTo hide the display message
RIn
Colour display
: Colour display
; Left control panel
X
To activate the on-board computer:
unlock the vehicle and open a door.
If you do not subsequently lock the door,
the on-board computer will remain
active for approximately 15 minutes
without any further activity.
or
X Turn the key to position 1 in the ignition
lock.
You can control the display and the settings
in the on-board computer using the steering wheel buttons on left control panel ;.
: Time (Y page 157)
; Ã Lane Keeping Assist indicator
lamp (Y page 145)
= Digital speedometer (Y page 159)
? Outside temperature display
(Y page 149)
A Display field for display messages,
menus and lists
B 6 Reserve fuel display (Y page 149)
C 6 Fuel level (Y page 149)
D Transmission display
Vehicles with manual transmission:
¿ Standard display
Z
153
>> On-board computer and displays.
Displays and operation
>> On-board computer and displays.
154
Menus and submenus
Vehicles with automatic transmission:
h Standard display with drive program or = Gear indicator (manual
mode)
u Gearshift recommendation
(Y page 122)
S Transmission malfunction
(Y page 183)
E V Cruise control (Y page 139)
È Limiter
Menus and submenus
Menu overview
The arrangement of the menus and displays
can be envisaged as a circle.
At the menu level, a segment display is
shown on the right side of the display to
help navigation. The segment marked corresponds with the list position of the menu
in the following list. For long lists within
the menus and submenus, a scroll bar on the
right side of the display serves to assist
orientation.
Operating the on-board computer
(Y page 153).
Depending on the vehicle equipment, you
can call up the following menus one after
the other:
Odometer menu
Example: distance
X
To show: press the 9 or : button on
the steering wheel to select the trip
meter display.
The display shows trip meter : and total
distance recorder ;.
X To reset the data: press the a button
on the steering wheel.
X Press the 9 or : button to select
yes and press the a button to confirm.
The trip meter is reset.
You can change the unit for the trip meter
in the Display submenu (Y page 159).
Trip computer menu "From start" or
"From reset"
RDistance
menu (Y page 154)
start trip computer menu
(Y page 154)
Rfrom reset trip computer menu
(Y page 154)
Reco score from start menu
(Y page 155)
RFuel consumption menu (Y page 156)
RCoolant temperature menu
(Y page 156)
RMessages and service menu
(Y page 156)
RSettings menu (Y page 157)
Rfrom
Example: trip computer "From start"
: Elapsed time
; Distance
= Average speed
? Average fuel consumption
X
To display: press the 9 or : button
on the steering wheel to select the from
start or from reset trip computer
menu.
If you reset the data in the from start trip
computer, the eco score display in the on-
board computer is also reset automatically
(Y page 155).
Vehicles with a smart Media-System: if you
reset the data in the from reset trip computer, the eco score display in the smart
Media-System will also be reset automatically (see the separate operating instructions).
X To reset the data: press the a button
on the steering wheel.
X Press the 9 or : button to select
yes and press the a button to confirm.
The display shows the trip computer and
the data shown is reset.
The average speed and average fuel consumption are only displayed again once a
distance of approx. 400 m has been covered.
The data in the from start trip computer
menu refers to the start of the journey. The
data in the from reset trip computer submenu refers to the last time the submenu
was reset.
The from start trip computer is automatically reset when:
Rthe ignition has been switched off for
more than 4 hours.
R999 hours have been exceeded.
R9,999 kilometres have been exceeded.
The from reset trip computer is automatically reset if the value exceeds
9,999 hours or 99,999 kilometres.
The unit of distance for the journey, speed
and consumption information can be
changed in the Display submenu
(Y page 159).
eco score from start menu
eco score display (vehicles with manual transmission)
eco score display (vehicles with automatic
transmission)
X
To display: press the 9 or : button
on the steering wheel to select the eco
score from start menu.
If you reset the data in the eco score display, then the data in the from start trip
computer is also reset automatically
(Y page 154).
X To reset the data: press the a button
on the steering wheel.
X Press the 9 or : button to select
yes and press the a button to confirm.
The display shows the eco score display
and the data shown is reset.
The percentage count in the eco score
display only reappears once a distance
of approx. 400 m has been covered.
If the ignition remains switched off for
longer than 4 hours, the eco score display
in the on-board computer will be automatically reset.
For further information on the eco score
display, see (Y page 134).
Z
155
>> On-board computer and displays.
Menus and submenus
156
Menus and submenus
>> On-board computer and displays.
Fuel consumption menu
Example: fuel consumption
X
Press the 9 or : button on the
steering wheel to select the display of
current fuel consumption.
The display shows the fuel consumption
over the previous 15 minutes as a bar chart.
The display additionally shows the current
fuel consumption as a numeric value in the
upper right section of the display.
When the vehicle is stationary or up to a
speed of approximately 5 km/h, the display
shows the current fuel consumption as a
numeric value in l/h. If you have changed
the unit of measurement for distance to
Miles, the display shows two dashes.
If you switch off the ignition, or change the
distance unit, the fuel consumption data is
deleted automatically.
You can change the distance unit in the
Display submenu (Y page 159).
Coolant temperature menu
Under normal operating conditions and
with the specified coolant level, the coolant temperature may rise to 110 †.
Example: coolant temperature
X
Press the 9 or : button on the
steering wheel to select the coolant temperature display.
The display shows the current coolant
temperature as a bar in the range
between 50 and 110 †.
If the coolant temperature rises above
110 †, then the display shows a display
message (Y page 175). Observe the display message. You could otherwise damage the engine.
You can change the temperature unit in the
Display submenu (Y page 160).
Messages and service menu
Example: messages and service
If you have hidden display messages these
are saved in the message memory. The menu
shows the number of display messages in
message memory : and next service due
date ; (Y page 211). The message memory
can only be called up when the ignition is
switched on.
X Press the 9 or : button on the
steering wheel to select the Messages
and service menu.
The display shows the number of display
messages in the message memory and the
next service due date.
If there are no display messages, then the
value in brackets is 0 and the information on the a button is hidden.
X To show display messages: press the a
button on the steering wheel.
The lower area on the right of the display
shows the display message, its list num-
ber and then number of display messages
in the message memory.
X Press 9 to scroll through the display
messages in the message memory.
Pressing : only allows you to scroll
back to messages which have already been
read.
If you scroll back from the first display
message using :, the Messages and
service menu will again be shown in the
display. Existing display messages are
not shown.
Settings menu
Introduction
In the Settings menu, as well as in its submenus, a navigation bar is also shown at the
top of the display field. The navigation bar
serves for quick orientation and shows the
navigation path to the current selection
shown in the display (submenu/function).
The selection shown in the display is highlighted in the navigation path.
Depending on the vehicle equipment, you
can call up the following submenus in the
Settings menu:
RTime submenu (Y page 157)
For vehicles with a smart media system,
the time is set using the smart media
system.
- Setting the time and the time format
(12/24 h)
RDisplay submenu (Y page 158)
- Adjusting the instrument cluster
lighting
- Shows and sets the digital speedometer
- Setting the units for distance and temperature
RAmbient lighting submenu
(Y page 160)
- Setting and switching the ambient
lighting on/off
RTyre pressure monitor submenu
- Restarts the tyre pressure monitor
(Y page 246)
RLanguage (Language) submenu
(Y page 160)
- Setting the menu language
The Settings menu and some submenus also
show the back function.
If the back function is shown, you have to
select the function to leave the menu.
X Press the 9 or : button on the
steering wheel to select the back function and press a on the steering wheel
to confirm.
You quit the menu and the display shows
the next higher menu level.
i If you press and hold 9 or :, you
change directly to the back function.
Time submenu
Introduction
This submenu is not available on vehicles
with a smart media system. You set the time
using the smart media system.
The Time submenu offers the following
options:
Rsetting the time
Rsetting the time format (12/24 h)
Z
157
>> On-board computer and displays.
Menus and submenus
Menus and submenus
>> On-board computer and displays.
158
X
To leave the submenu: press the 9
or : button on the steering wheel to
select the back function and press a
on the steering wheel to confirm.
The display shows the Settings menu.
i If you press and hold 9 or :, you
change directly to the back function.
Setting the time
Press the 9 or : button on the
steering wheel to select the Settings
menu and press a on the steering
wheel to confirm.
X Press the 9 or : button to select
the Time submenu and confirm with a.
X Press the 9 or : button to select
Set the time and press the a button
to confirm.
X Press the 9 or : button to set the
hour and confirm with a.
X Press the 9 or : button to set the
minutes and confirm with a.
The time is set and the display shows the
Time submenu.
X
i If you are setting the time and keep the
9 or : button depressed, then the
numerical value changes continuously.
Setting the time format (12/24 h)
X Press the 9 or : button on the
steering wheel to select the Settings
menu and press a on the steering
wheel to confirm.
X Press the 9 or : button to select
the Time submenu and confirm with a.
X Press 9 or : to select Time for‐
mat (12/24 h) and confirm with a.
X Press 9 or : to select the desired
time format 24 hour or 12 hour (am/pm)
and confirm with a.
The time format is accepted and the display shows the Time submenu.
Display submenu
Introduction
In the Display submenu, you can call up the
following submenus:
RDisplay/switch brightness submenu
(Y page 158)
- Adjusting the instrument cluster
lighting
RDigital speedometer submenu, see
(Y page 159)
- Shows and sets the digital speedometer
RUnits of distance submenu
(Y page 159)
- Setting the units of distance
RUnits of temperature submenu
(Y page 160)
- Setting the units of temperature
X To leave the submenu: press the 9
or : button on the steering wheel to
select the back function and press a
on the steering wheel to confirm.
The display shows the Settings menu.
i If you press and hold 9 or :, you
change directly to the back function.
Adjusting the instrument cluster lighting
Instrument cluster lighting includes illumination of the instrument cluster, the
additional instruments on the dashboard,
the displays and the controls.
You can set the brightness of the instrument cluster to different levels with the
Display/switch brightness function.
X
Press the 9 or : button on the
steering wheel to select the Settings
menu and press a on the steering
wheel to confirm.
X Press the 9 or : button to select
the Display submenu and confirm with
a.
X Press the 9 or : button to select
Display/switch brightness and press
the a button to confirm.
X
Press the 9 or : button to set the
brightness level. Level 1 corresponds to
dimmed instrument lighting and level 5
to bright instrument lighting.
With the selection during night-time
driving, the instrument cluster brightness level is set at the same time.
X Press the a button to confirm the setting.
The instrument lighting is set and the
display shows the Display submenu.
Digital speedometer submenu
In the Digital speedometer submenu you
have the following options:
Rshowing/hiding the digital speedometer
Rsetting the unit for speed in the digital
speedometer
X To call up the submenu: press the 9
or : button on the steering wheel to
select the Settings menu and press a
on the steering wheel to confirm.
X Press the 9 or : button to select
the Display submenu and confirm with
a.
X Press the 9 or : button to select
the Digital speedometer submenu and
confirm with a.
X
To show/hide the digital speedometer:
press the 9 or : button to select
the On function.
X Activate or deactivate the On function by
pressing the a button.
When the function is highlighted, it is
activated and the display shows the digital speedometer (Y page 153).
X To set the unit of speed: press the 9
or : button to select Unit and press
the a button to confirm.
X Press the 9 or : button to select
the unit of speed km/h or mph and confirm
with a.
The display shows the Digital speed‐
ometer submenu.
X
To leave the submenu: press the 9
or : button to select the back function and confirm with a.
The display shows the Display submenu.
i If you press and hold 9 or :, you
change directly to the back function.
Setting the unit of measurement for distance
If you change the unit of measurement for
distance, the values in the:
Rtrip computer "From start" or "From
reset" (Y page 154)
Reco score from start (Y page 155)
Rfuel consumption (Y page 156)
menus are also reset automatically.
You can only set the unit of measurement for
distance when the vehicle is stationary.
X
Press the 9 or : button on the
steering wheel to select the Settings
menu and press a on the steering
wheel to confirm.
X Press the 9 or : button to select
the Display submenu and confirm with
a.
X Press the 9 or : button to select
Units of distance and press the a
button to confirm.
X Press the 9 or : button to select
Kilometres or Miles as the unit of measurement for distance and press a to
confirm.
The display shows the Display submenu.
The selected unit of measurement for distance applies as the basis for:
Rthe
trip computer
service display
Rthe fuel consumption display
Rthe total distance recorder and the trip
meter display
Rthe speed display for cruise control and
the limiter
Rthe
Z
159
>> On-board computer and displays.
Menus and submenus
Menus and submenus
>> On-board computer and displays.
160
Setting the temperature unit
You can switch the display of the outside
temperature and the coolant temperature
between † and ‡.
X
Press the 9 or : button on the
steering wheel to select the Settings
menu and press a on the steering
wheel to confirm.
X Press the 9 or : button to select
the Display submenu and confirm with
a.
X Press the 9 or : button to select
Units of temperature and press the
a button to confirm.
X Press the 9 or : button to select
the unit of temperature °C or °F and confirm with a.
The display shows the Display submenu.
Ambient lighting submenu
Introduction
In the Ambient lighting submenu you have
the following options:
Rswitching the ambient lighting on/off
Rsetting the brightness of the ambient
lighting to different levels
X To leave the submenu: press the 9
or : button on the steering wheel to
select the back function and press a
on the steering wheel to confirm.
The display shows the Settings menu.
i If you press and hold 9 or :, you
change directly to the back function.
Switching the ambient lighting on/off
X Press the 9 or : button on the
steering wheel to select the Settings
menu and press a on the steering
wheel to confirm.
X Press the 9 or : button to select
the Ambient lighting submenu and confirm by pressing the a button.
X
Press the 9 or : button to select
the On function.
X Activate or deactivate the On function by
pressing the a button.
When the function is highlighted it is
activated and the ambient lighting is
switched on.
Setting the brightness
You can set the brightness of the ambient
lighting to different levels.
X
Press the 9 or : button on the
steering wheel to select the Settings
menu and press a on the steering
wheel to confirm.
X Press the 9 or : button to select
the Ambient lighting submenu and confirm by pressing the a button.
You will see the selected setting.
X Press the 9 or : button to select
Brightness and press the a button to
confirm.
X Press the 9 or : button to set the
brightness level. Level 1 corresponds to
dimmed ambient lighting and level 5 to
bright ambient lighting.
With the selection, the ambient lighting
brightness level is set at the same time.
X Press the a button to save the setting.
The brightness of the ambient lighting
is set and the display shows the Ambient
lighting submenu.
Language submenu
X
Press the 9 or : button on the
steering wheel to select the Settings
menu and press a on the steering
wheel to confirm.
X Use 9 or : to select the Language
(Language) submenu and confirm with
a.
X Press the 9 or : button to select
the desired language for the displays
and messages and confirm with a.
161
>> On-board computer and displays.
Menus and submenus
X
Press the 9 or : button on the
steering wheel to select the back function and press a on the steering wheel
to confirm.
The display shows the Settings menu in
the selected language.
i If you press and hold 9 or :, you
change directly to the back function.
Z
162
Display messages (on-board computer with monochrome display)
>> On-board computer and displays.
Display messages (on-board computer with monochrome display)
Introduction
Warnings, malfunctions or additional information are shown in the monochrome display
as symbols. For certain display messages a warning tone also sounds.
Display messages with graphic symbols are simplified in the Owner's Manual and may
differ from the symbols in the display.
Please respond in accordance with the display messages and follow the additional notes
in this Owner's Manual. The cause of a display message should be remedied as soon as
possible.
Display messages
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
b
The symbol lights up.
The brake lights are not functioning. The actuation or the
bulbs or LEDs are faulty.
G WARNING
Bulbs and lamps are an important aspect of vehicle safety. The
brake lamps are not functioning and are no longer working when
braking.
There is a risk of an accident.
X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible,
paying attention to road and traffic conditions.
X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 132).
X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
A
Vehicles with manual transmission only: letter N flashes in the
middle of the display.
You are trying to start the engine, a gear is engaged and the
clutch pedal is not fully depressed.
To start the engine:
X
Engage neutral. (Y page 121)
or
X Depress the clutch pedal fully.
If the engine fails to start despite the clutch pedal being fully
depressed, then the clutch sensor is malfunctioning.
X
Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
Only for vehicles with automatic transmission: the letter N
flashes in the middle of the display if you try to shift to P. A
warning tone also sounds.
The parking lock is malfunctioning.
X Apply the parking brake to park.
AorB
Vehicles with automatic transmission only: P or N flash alternately in the middle of the display.
You have attempted to start the engine with the transmission in
position D or R.
X
Shift to P or N to start.
Aor7/
C
Vehicles with automatic transmission only: N flashes alternately with the currently selected transmission position in
the middle of the display.
The engine switches off while the vehicle is in motion.
X Shift to N to start.
ì
Vehicles with automatic transmission only: B flashes for 15
seconds in the middle of the display.
You have tried to start the engine in transmission position N
without depressing the brake pedal.
X Depress the brake pedal.
Bor7/
C,A
Vehicles with automatic transmission only: P flashes alternately with the currently selected transmission position. A
warning tone also sounds.
The driver's door is open/not fully closed and the gear lever is
in position R, N or D.
G WARNING
The vehicle may roll away.
There is a risk of an accident.
X Shift the selector lever to position P.
X Secure the vehicle to prevent it from rolling away.
X Fully close the driver's door.
Z
163
>> On-board computer and displays.
Display messages (on-board computer with monochrome display)
>> On-board computer and displays.
164
Display messages (on-board computer with monochrome display)
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
S
Vehicles with manual transmission only: the transmission
display shows three lines.
The transmission electronics are malfunctioning or the neutral gate switch is faulty.
The Start/Stop function and cruise control are deactivated
automatically.
Starting the engine is only possible with the clutch pedal fully
depressed.
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
S
Vehicles with automatic transmission only: the transmission
display shows three lines.
The automatic transmission is malfunctioning.
X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
SorB/
7/C/
A
Vehicles with automatic transmission only: S flashes
alternately with the currently selected transmission position.
The automatic transmission clutch has overheated. You will
feel the clutch pedal pulsate.
X Initially try to avoid pulling away or crawling manoeuvres.
If the display message disappears, automatic transmission
is available again.
SorB/
7/C/
A
Only for vehicles with automatic transmission: S flashes
alternately with the currently selected transmission position.
A warning tone also sounds.
Further pulling away or crawling manoeuvres have led to a
critical clutch temperature.
X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible,
paying attention to road and traffic conditions.
X Secure the vehicle to prevent it from rolling away.
X Wait until the automatic transmission has cooled down and
the display message does not reappear after acknowledging
it.
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
¤
The symbol flashes for a maximum of 5 seconds and in addition
a warning tone sounds.
Lane Keeping Assist warning
You are crossing a detected outer lane marking without indicating.
X Remain in lane, paying attention to road and traffic conditions.
or
X Indicate to change lane.
Ã
The symbol flashes for about 3 seconds and in addition a warning tone sounds. The symbol is then hidden.
Lane Keeping Assist is malfunctioning and deactivated. Possible causes:
Rthe
windscreen is dirty in the camera's field of vision.
is impaired due to heavy rain, snow or fog.
Rthere are no lane markings for a longer period.
Rthe lane markings are worn, dark or covered, e.g. by dirt or
snow.
Rthe system electronics are faulty.
Lane Keeping Assist is automatically operational again when
the causes mentioned above no longer apply.
If the windscreen is dirty:
Rvisibility
X
Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible,
paying attention to road and traffic conditions.
X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 132).
X Clean the outside of the windscreen (Y page 214).
If the windscreen is clean and the causes listed above do not
apply, then the electronics are malfunctioning.
X
Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
°h
The symbols flash for about 5 seconds. The symbols then both
remain lit.
The tyre pressure monitor is restarted (Y page 246).
È
The symbol lights up without the speed display.
The limiter has been activated without a speed being entered
or has been cancelled.
X Set a limit speed .
Z
165
>> On-board computer and displays.
Display messages (on-board computer with monochrome display)
>> On-board computer and displays.
166
Display messages (on-board computer with monochrome display)
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
È
The symbol flashes for about 10 seconds and is then hidden. A
warning tone also sounds.
The limiter is malfunctioning and deactivated automatically.
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
È
The symbol lights up and the speed display flashes. A warning
tone also sounds.
The vehicle is exceeding the set limit speed.
X If required, brake the vehicle paying attention to road and
traffic conditions.
V
The symbol flashes for about 10 seconds and is then hidden. A
warning tone also sounds.
In addition the \ door warning lamp and other warning
lamps, e.g. ÷, light up.
The central vehicle electronics system and cruise control are
malfunctioning.
After the engine is switched off:
Rdo
not lock/unlock the doors using the remote control function of the key.
Ryou can no longer start the engine
X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible,
paying attention to road and traffic conditions. Do not continue driving under any circumstances.
X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 132).
X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
V
The symbol lights up without the speed display.
Cruise control has been activated without a speed being
entered or has been cancelled.
X Set a speed (Y page 139).
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
V
The symbol flashes for about 10 seconds and is then hidden. A
warning tone also sounds.
Cruise control is malfunctioning and deactivated automatically.
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Ò
The outside temperature has fallen to 3 † or lower. The symbol
flashes for about 1 minute. The road surface may be icy.
If the outside temperature falls to a level under -3 †, the
symbol does not flash but rather remains on continuously.
X
Observe the information on the outside temperature display
(Y page 149).
X Adapt your driving style and speed to suit the weather conditions.
Display messages (on-board computer with colour display)
Introduction
Display messages with graphic symbols are simplified in the Owner's Manual and may
differ from the symbols in the display. The display shows high-priority messages in red.
For certain display messages a warning tone also sounds.
Please respond in accordance with the display messages and follow the additional notes
in this Owner's Manual.
You can use the a button on the multifunction steering wheel to hide low-priority
messages. The display messages are stored in the message memory and can be called up as
for as long as the ignition remains switched on (Y page 156). When the ignition is turned
off, the message memory is deleted and no display messages are stored. The cause of a
display message should be remedied as soon as possible.
High-priority display messages cannot be hidden. The multifunction display shows these
messages continuously until the causes for the messages have been remedied.
Z
167
>> On-board computer and displays.
Display messages (on-board computer with colour display)
168
Display messages (on-board computer with colour display)
>> On-board computer and displays.
Safety systems
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
6
The restraint system is faulty.
Malfunction Visit
workshop
G WARNING
The airbags or belt tensioners may either be triggered unintentionally or, in the event of an accident, may not be triggered.
This poses an increased risk of injury.
X Drive on carefully.
X Have the restraint system checked at a qualified specialist
workshop immediately.
For further information about the restraint system, see
(Y page 38).
Electronics mal‐
function Stop See
Owner's Manual
In addition, the ÷, ! and J warning lamps light up in
the instrument cluster and a warning tone sounds.
abs (Anti-lock Brake System) and esp® (Electronic Stability
Program) are malfunctioning. This means that crosswind assist
and hill start assist, for example, are also unavailable.
Further driving systems could be switched off automatically.
G WARNING
The brake system continues to function normally, but without
the functions listed above. The front and rear wheels could
therefore lock if you brake hard, for example.
The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely
affected. The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can increase.
If esp® is not operational, esp® is unable to stabilise the
vehicle.
The danger of skidding and having an accident increases.
X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible,
paying attention to road and traffic conditions. Do not continue driving under any circumstances.
X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 132).
X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
J
Release parking
brake
You are driving with the parking brake applied.
X Release the parking brake.
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
Brake force distri‐
bution inoperative
Stop See Owner's
Manual
In addition, the J warning lamp in the instrument cluster
lights up and a warning tone sounds.
EBD is malfunctioning. This means that abs, esp®, crosswind
assist and hill start assist, for example, are also unavailable.
Further driving systems could be switched off automatically.
G WARNING
The brake system continues to function normally, but without
the functions listed above. The front and rear wheels could
therefore lock if you brake hard, for example.
The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely
affected. The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can increase.
If esp® is not operational, esp® is unable to stabilise the
vehicle.
The danger of skidding and having an accident increases.
X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible,
paying attention to road and traffic conditions. Do not continue driving under any circumstances.
X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 132).
X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
J
Check brake fluid
level
There is insufficient brake fluid in the brake fluid reservoir.
G WARNING
The braking efficiency may be impaired.
There is a risk of an accident.
X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible,
paying attention to road and traffic conditions. Do not continue driving under any circumstances.
X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 132).
X Do not top up the brake fluid. This does not correct the malfunction.
X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Z
169
>> On-board computer and displays.
Display messages (on-board computer with colour display)
>> On-board computer and displays.
170
Display messages (on-board computer with colour display)
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
!
abs is malfunctioning. This means that esp®, crosswind assist
and hill start assist, for example, are also unavailable.
Further driving systems could be switched off automatically.
System inoperative
G WARNING
The brake system continues to function normally, but without
the functions listed above. The wheels could therefore lock if
you brake hard, for example.
The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely
affected. The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can increase.
If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilise the
vehicle.
The danger of skidding and having an accident increases.
X Drive on carefully.
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
If the abs control unit is faulty, there is also a possibility that
other systems may be unavailable.
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
÷
ESP® is not available due to a malfunction.
This means that crosswind assist and hill start assist, for
example, are also unavailable.
Further driving systems could be switched off automatically.
System inoperative
G WARNING
The brake system continues to function normally, but without
the functions listed above.
The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can
thus increase.
The brake lamps may not be functioning and thus no longer
working when braking.
If esp® is not operational, esp® is unable to stabilise the
vehicle.
The danger of skidding and having an accident increases.
X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible,
paying attention to road and traffic conditions. Do not continue driving under any circumstances.
X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 132).
X Check that the brake lamps are working.
If the brake lamps are not working:
X
Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
If the brake lamps are working:
X
X
Hill start assist
inoperative
Drive on carefully.
Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
The ÷ warning lamp also lights up in the instrument cluster.
Hill start assist is malfunctioning. If you release the brake,
your vehicle will not be held automatically when pulling away
uphill and may roll away immediately.
Further driving systems could be switched off automatically.
G WARNING
The brake system continues to function normally, but without
the functions listed above.
If esp® is not operational, esp® is unable to stabilise the
vehicle.
The danger of skidding and having an accident increases.
X Drive on carefully.
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Z
171
>> On-board computer and displays.
Display messages (on-board computer with colour display)
>> On-board computer and displays.
172
Display messages (on-board computer with colour display)
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
^
The distance warning function is temporarily inoperative.
Possible causes:
Distance warning
inoperative
Rthe
smart logo in the radiator trim is dirty.
function is impaired due to heavy rain or snow.
Rthe radar sensor system is temporarily inoperative, e.g. due
to electromagnetic radiation emitted by nearby TV or radio
stations or other sources of electromagnetic radiation.
Rthe system is outside the operating temperature range.
Rthe on-board voltage is too low.
Once the causes listed above no longer apply, the display message goes out.
The distance warning function is operational again.
If the display message does not disappear:
Rthe
X
Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible,
paying attention to road and traffic conditions.
X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 132).
X Clean the smart logo in the radiator trim (Y page 215).
X Restart the engine.
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
^
The distance warning function is malfunctioning or temporarily inoperative. Possible causes:
Electronics mal‐
function Visit
workshop
Rthe
smart logo in the radiator trim is dirty.
function is impaired due to heavy rain or snow.
Rthe radar sensor system is temporarily inoperative, e.g. due
to electromagnetic radiation emitted by nearby TV or radio
stations or other sources of electromagnetic radiation.
Rthe system is outside the operating temperature range.
Rthe on-board voltage is too low.
If the causes listed above no longer apply, the distance warning function is operational again.
If the display message continues to light up, the electronics of
the distance warning function are malfunctioning.
Rthe
X
Ò
Black ice warning
Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
The outside temperature has fallen to 3 † or lower. The road
surface may be icy.
If the outside temperature sinks below -3 †, the colour display
only shows the Ò symbol beside the outside temperature
display.
X Observe the information on the outside temperature display
(Y page 149).
X Adapt your driving style and speed to suit the weather conditions.
Engine
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
;
The engine is running in emergency mode. For example, the
fuel injection may be faulty.
X Drive on carefully.
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.
Reduced power See
Owner's Manual
í
Malfunction Visit
workshop
The battery monitoring is malfunctioning.
Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
X
Z
173
>> On-board computer and displays.
Display messages (on-board computer with colour display)
>> On-board computer and displays.
174
Display messages (on-board computer with colour display)
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
í
The battery is not being charged.
Possible causes:
Stop See Owner's
Manual
Rfaulty
alternator
poly-V-belt
Ra malfunction in the electronics
X Stop the vehicle immediately, paying attention to road and
traffic conditions, and switch off the engine.
Rtorn
! Do not continue driving. The engine could otherwise overheat.
X
X
5
Stop Switch off
engine
Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 132).
Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
The oil pressure is too low. There is a risk of engine damage.
Stop the vehicle immediately, paying attention to road and
traffic conditions, and switch off the engine.
X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 132).
X Check the oil level (Y page 207).
X If necessary, top up the engine oil (Y page 207).
X
Information on approved engine oils can also be obtained from
any qualified specialist workshop.
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
?
The coolant temperature has exceeded 110 †. The airflow to the
engine radiator may be blocked or the coolant level may be too
low.
Stop Switch off
engine
G WARNING
The engine is not being cooled sufficiently and may be damaged.
Never drive with an overheated engine. Driving when your
engine is overheated can cause some fluids which may have
leaked into the engine compartment to catch fire.
Steam from an overheated engine can cause serious burns,
which can occur just by opening the engine compartment cover.
There is a risk of injury.
X Stop the vehicle immediately, paying attention to road and
traffic conditions, and switch off the engine.
X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 132).
X Leave the vehicle and keep a safe distance from the vehicle
until the engine has cooled down.
X Check the coolant level and top up the coolant. Observe the
notes as you do so (Y page 264).
X If you have to top up the coolant frequently, have the engine
cooling system checked.
X Make sure that the air supply to the engine radiator is not
blocked, e.g. by frozen slush.
X Do not start the engine again until the coolant temperature
is below 110 †. The engine may otherwise be damaged.
Avoid heavy loads on the engine as you do so, e.g. driving in
mountainous terrain and stop-start traffic.
6
Low fuel level
The fuel level has dropped into the reserve range.
X Refuel at the nearest filling station.
Z
175
>> On-board computer and displays.
Display messages (on-board computer with colour display)
176
Display messages (on-board computer with colour display)
>> On-board computer and displays.
Driving systems
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
Ã
The à symbol in the top bar of the display also flashes white
for approximately 3 seconds and a warning tone sounds. The
symbol is then hidden.
Lane Keeping Assist is malfunctioning and deactivated. Possible causes:
Lane Keeping
Assist inoperative
Rthe
windscreen is dirty in the camera's field of vision.
is impaired due to heavy rain, snow or fog.
Rthere are no lane markings for a longer period.
Rthe lane markings are worn, dark or covered, e.g. by dirt or
snow.
Rthe system electronics are faulty.
Lane Keeping Assist is automatically operational again when
the causes mentioned above no longer apply.
If the windscreen is dirty:
Rvisibility
X
Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible,
paying attention to road and traffic conditions.
X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 132).
X Clean the outside of the windscreen (Y page 214).
If the windscreen is clean and the causes listed above do not
apply, then the electronics are malfunctioning.
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Ã
The symbol in the top bar of the display flashes green for a
maximum of 5 seconds and a warning tone sounds.
Lane Keeping Assist warning
You are crossing a detected outer lane marking without indicating.
X Remain in lane, paying attention to road and traffic conditions.
or
X Indicate to change lane.
For further information about Lane Keeping Assist, see
(Y page 145).
È
Limiter inopera‐
tive
The È symbol in the display footer also flashes for approximately 10 seconds and a warning tone sounds. The symbol is
then hidden.
The limiter is malfunctioning and deactivated automatically.
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
È
The symbol in the footer of the display is lit and the speed
display flashes. A warning tone also sounds.
The vehicle is exceeding the set limit speed.
X If required, brake the vehicle paying attention to road and
traffic conditions.
È
The symbol in the footer of the display is lit without a speed
display.
The limiter has been activated without a speed being entered
or has been cancelled.
X Set a limit speed .
V
The V symbol in the display footer also flashes for approximately 10 seconds and a warning tone sounds. The symbol is
then hidden.
Cruise control is malfunctioning and deactivated automatically.
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Cruise control
inoperative
V
The symbol in the footer of the display is lit without a speed
display.
Cruise control has been activated without a speed being
entered or has been cancelled.
X Set a speed (Y page 139).
Z
177
>> On-board computer and displays.
Display messages (on-board computer with colour display)
178
Display messages (on-board computer with colour display)
>> On-board computer and displays.
Tyres
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
h
The tyre pressure in one or more tyres has dropped suddenly.
Tyre pressure Cau‐
tion tyre malfunc‐
tion
G WARNING
If you drive with a flat tyre, there is a risk of the following
hazards:
Ra
flat tyre affects the ability to steer or brake the vehicle.
could lose control of the vehicle
Rcontinued driving with a flat tyre will cause excessive heat
build-up and possibly a fire.
There is a risk of an accident.
X Stop the vehicle without making any sudden steering or
braking manoeuvres. Pay attention to the traffic conditions
as you do so.
X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 132).
X Check the tyres and, if necessary, follow the instructions for
a flat tyre (Y page 221).
Ryou
h
Tyre pressure mon‐
itor inoperative
The tyre pressure monitor is malfunctioning or was not restarted after a wheel change.
G WARNING
The system is possibly unable to recognise or register low tyre
pressure.
There is a risk of an accident.
X Restart the tyre pressure monitor after a wheel change
(Y page 246)
The tyre pressure monitor is activated automatically after
driving for a few minutes.
If the display message continues to be displayed:
X
X
Drive on carefully.
Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
h
There is no signal from the tyre pressure sensor of one or several wheels, or the wheels fitted do not have suitable tyre
pressure sensors. The tyre pressure monitor was not restarted
after a wheel change.
Tyre pressure mon‐
itor inoperative
wheel sensors miss‐
ing
G WARNING
The system is possibly unable to recognise or register low tyre
pressure.
There is a risk of an accident.
X Have the faulty tyre pressure sensor replaced at a qualified
specialist workshop.
or
X Fit wheels with suitable tyre pressure sensors.
or
X Restart the tyre pressure monitor after a wheel change
(Y page 246)
The tyre pressure monitor is activated automatically after
driving for a few minutes.
If the display message continues to be displayed:
X
X
h
Correct tyre pres‐
sure
Drive on carefully.
Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
The tyre pressure is too low in at least one of the tyres, or the
tyre pressure difference between the wheels is too great.
X Check the tyre pressures at the next opportunity
(Y page 245).
X If necessary, correct the tyre pressure.
X Restart the tyre pressure monitor (Y page 246).
Z
179
>> On-board computer and displays.
Display messages (on-board computer with colour display)
180
Display messages (on-board computer with colour display)
>> On-board computer and displays.
Vehicle
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
b
The brake lights are not functioning. The actuation or the
bulbs/LEDs are faulty.
Brake lamps inoper‐
ative
G WARNING
Bulbs and lamps are an important aspect of vehicle safety. The
brake lamps are not functioning and are no longer working when
braking.
There is a risk of an accident.
X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible,
paying attention to road and traffic conditions.
X Secure the vehicle from rolling away (Y page 132).
X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Switch off lights
The lights are still switched on when you leave the vehicle. A
warning tone also sounds.
X Turn the light switch to à or $.
\
A door or the tailgate is open. A warning tone also sounds.
The display shows the open doors/tailgate.
X Pull over paying attention to road and traffic conditions and
stop the vehicle, then close the doors and tailgate.
(Example of all doors
and tailgate open)
D
Steering malfunc‐
tion See Owner's
Manual
D
Electronics mal‐
function See Own‐
er's Manual
ç
Malfunction See
Owner's Manual
The power steering assistance is faulty.
G WARNING
You will need to use more force to steer.
There is a risk of an accident.
X Check whether you are able to apply the extra force required.
X If you are able to steer safely: carefully drive on to a qualified specialist workshop.
X If you are unable to steer safely: do not drive on. Contact the
nearest qualified specialist workshop.
The power steering assistance may be malfunctioning. You may
need to use more force to steer.
X Drive on carefully to a qualified specialist workshop and
have the steering checked immediately.
The automatic Start/Stop function is malfunctioning and will
be switched off.
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
è
The vehicle is in automatic engine stop. You have opened the
driver's door or released the seat belt and the key is in the
ignition lock.
X The engine will not start automatically.
X Please take note of the conditions for the automatic engine
stop/engine start (Y page 118).
When exiting:
remove key
è
Depress clutch to
start engine
è
Engage neutral to
start engine
To start engine:
shift to neutral
or depress clutch
Vehicles with manual transmission only: you have stalled the
engine when pulling away or when stopping.
X Depress the clutch pedal fully.
The engine starts automatically.
Vehicles with manual transmission only: you have stalled the
engine when pulling away or when stopping and the clutch sensor is inoperative.
X Engage neutral (Y page 121).
The engine starts automatically.
Vehicles with manual transmission only: you are trying to start
the engine, a gear is engaged and the clutch pedal is not fully
depressed.
To start the engine:
X
Engage neutral. (Y page 121)
or
X Depress the clutch pedal fully.
To start engine:
shift to neutral
Vehicles with manual transmission only: the clutch sensor is
malfunctioning. You are trying to start the engine, a gear is
engaged and the clutch pedal is fully depressed.
X To start the engine, engage neutral. (Y page 121)
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
A
Only for vehicles with automatic transmission: the letter N
flashes in the middle of the display if you try to shift to P. A
warning tone also sounds.
The parking lock is malfunctioning.
X Apply the parking brake to park.
Parking brake mal‐
function Apply
parking brake to
park
Z
181
>> On-board computer and displays.
Display messages (on-board computer with colour display)
>> On-board computer and displays.
182
Display messages (on-board computer with colour display)
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
Shift to P or N to
start
Vehicles with automatic transmission only: the currently
selected transmission position is shown in the middle of the
display.
You have attempted to start the engine with the transmission in
position D or R.
X
Shift to P or N to start.
Shift to N to
start.
Vehicles with automatic transmission only: the currently
selected transmission position is shown in the middle of the
display.
The engine switches off while the vehicle is in motion.
X Shift to N to start.
A
Vehicles with automatic transmission only: N is shown in the
middle of the display.
You have tried to start the engine in transmission position N
without depressing the brake pedal.
X Depress the brake pedal.
Apply brakes to
start
Risk of vehicle
rolling Transmis‐
sion not in P
Vehicles with automatic transmission only: a warning tone
also sounds.
The driver's door is open/not fully closed and the gear lever is
in position R, N or D.
G WARNING
The vehicle may roll away.
There is a risk of an accident.
X Shift the selector lever to position P.
X Secure the vehicle to prevent it from rolling away.
X Fully close the driver's door.
S
Transmission mal‐
function Visit
workshop
SorB/
7/C/
A
Clutch protection
active See Owner's
Manual
Vehicles with automatic transmission only: S is shown.
The automatic transmission is malfunctioning.
X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Vehicles with automatic transmission only: S flashes
alternately with the currently selected transmission position.
The automatic transmission clutch has overheated. You will
feel the clutch pedal pulsate.
X Initially try to avoid pulling away or crawling manoeuvres.
If the display message disappears, automatic transmission
is available again.
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
SorB/
7/C/
A
Only for vehicles with automatic transmission: S flashes
alternately with the currently selected transmission position.
A warning tone also sounds.
Further pulling away or crawling manoeuvres have led to a
critical clutch temperature.
X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible,
paying attention to road and traffic conditions.
X Secure the vehicle to prevent it from rolling away.
X Wait until the automatic transmission has cooled down and
the display message does not reappear after acknowledging
it.
Transmission over‐
heated See Owner's
Manual
Electronics mal‐
function Visit
workshop
In addition the \ door warning lamp and other warning
lamps, e.g. ÷, light up.
The central vehicle electronics system is malfunctioning.
After the engine is switched off:
Rdo
not lock/unlock the doors using the remote control function of the key.
Ryou can no longer start the engine
X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible,
paying attention to road and traffic conditions. Do not continue driving under any circumstances.
X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 132).
X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Electronics mal‐
function Visit
workshop
The transmission electronics are malfunctioning or the neutral gate switch is faulty.
The Start/Stop function and cruise control are deactivated
automatically.
Starting the engine is only possible with the clutch pedal fully
depressed.
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Rain/light sensor
inoperative
The rain/light sensor is malfunctioning.
Automatic headlamp mode and automatic intermittent wipe are
not available.
X Switch on exterior lighting manually if required
(Y page 87).
X Switch the windscreen wipers on or off manually as required
(Y page 95).
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Z
183
>> On-board computer and displays.
Display messages (on-board computer with colour display)
184
Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster
>> On-board computer and displays.
Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster
Safety
Seat belts
Problem
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
ü
The seat belt warning lamp reminds the driver and front
Only for certain coun- passenger to fasten their seat belts. An additional warning
tone will sound if the driver's seat belt is not fastened.
tries: the red seat
belt warning lamp
X Fasten your seat belt (Y page 40).
lights up for six secThe warning tone ceases.
onds after the engine
starts.
ü
After starting the
engine, the red seat
belt warning lamp
lights up.
The driver or front passenger has not fastened their seat belt.
X Fasten your seat belt (Y page 40).
The warning lamp goes out.
ü
The red seat belt
warning lamp flashes
and a warning tone
sounds.
The driver or passenger has not fastened their seat belt. At the
same time, you are driving faster than 20 km/h or have briefly
driven faster than 20 km/h.
X Fasten your seat belt (Y page 40).
The warning lamp goes out and the warning tone ceases.
Safety systems
Problem
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
6
The restraint system is faulty.
The red restraint sys- G WARNING
tem warning lamp is
lit while the engine is The airbags or belt tensioners may either be triggered unintentionally or, in the event of an accident, may not be trigrunning.
gered.
This poses an increased risk of injury.
X Drive on carefully.
X Have the restraint system checked at a qualified specialist
workshop immediately.
For further information about the restraint system, see
(Y page 38).
J÷!
The red brake system
warning lamp, the yellow esp® warning lamp
and the yellow ABS
warning lamp light up
while the engine is
running.
ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) and esp® (Electronic Stability
Program) are malfunctioning. This means that crosswind assist
and hill start assist, for example, are also unavailable.
Further driving systems could be switched off automatically.
G WARNING
The brake system continues to function normally, but without
the functions listed above. The front and rear wheels could
therefore lock if you brake hard, for example.
The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely
affected. The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can increase.
If esp® is not operational, esp® is unable to stabilise the
vehicle.
The danger of skidding and having an accident increases.
X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible,
paying attention to road and traffic conditions. Do not continue driving under any circumstances.
X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 132).
X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
J
You are driving with the parking brake applied.
The red brake system X Release the parking brake.
warning lamp comes on
The warning lamp goes out and the warning tone ceases.
while the vehicle is
moving. A warning
tone also sounds.
Z
185
>> On-board computer and displays.
Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster
>> On-board computer and displays.
186
Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster
Problem
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
J
There is insufficient brake fluid in the brake fluid reservoir.
The red brake system
G WARNING
warning lamp comes on
The braking efficiency may be impaired.
while the engine is
There is a risk of an accident.
running. A warning
tone also sounds.
X Vehicles with a colour display: observe the additional display messages.
X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible,
paying attention to road and traffic conditions. Do not continue driving under any circumstances.
X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 132).
X Do not top up the brake fluid. Topping up will not rectify the
fault.
X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
J
The red brake system
warning lamp comes on
while the engine is
running. A warning
tone also sounds.
EBD (electronic brake force distribution) is malfunctioning.
This means that ABS, esp®, crosswind assist and hill start
assist, for example, are also unavailable.
Further driving systems could be switched off automatically.
G WARNING
The brake system continues to function normally, but without
the functions listed above. The wheels could therefore lock
early if you brake hard, for example.
The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely
affected. The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can increase.
If esp® is not operational, esp® is unable to stabilise the
vehicle.
The danger of skidding and having an accident increases.
X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible,
paying attention to road and traffic conditions. Do not continue driving under any circumstances.
X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 132).
X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Problem
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
!
ABS is malfunctioning. This means that esp®, crosswind assist
The yellow ABS warn- and hill start assist, for example, are also unavailable.
ing lamp is lit while Further driving systems could be switched off automatically.
the engine is running.
G WARNING
The brake system continues to function normally, but without
the functions listed above. The wheels could therefore lock if
you brake hard, for example.
The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely
affected. The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can increase.
If esp® is not operational, esp® is unable to stabilise the
vehicle.
The danger of skidding and having an accident increases.
X Drive on carefully.
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
If the ABS control unit is faulty, there is also a possibility that
other systems may be unavailable.
÷
The central vehicle electronics system is malfunctioning.
The yellow esp® warn- After the engine is switched off:
ing lamp is on when
Rdo not lock/unlock the doors using the remote control funcyou are driving.
tion of the key.
In addition, the \ Ryou can no longer start the engine
door warning lamp and X
Vehicles with a colour display: observe the additional disother warning lamps,
play messages.
e.g. h, light up.
X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible,
paying attention to road and traffic conditions. Do not continue driving under any circumstances.
X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 132).
X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
÷
esp® or traction control has intervened because there is a risk
The yellow esp® warn- of skidding or at least one wheel has started to spin.
ing lamp flashes while Cruise control is automatically deactivated.
the vehicle is in
X Only depress the accelerator pedal as far as necessary when
motion.
pulling away.
X Accelerate more gently while the vehicle is in motion.
X Adapt your driving style to suit the road and weather conditions.
Z
187
>> On-board computer and displays.
Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster
>> On-board computer and displays.
188
Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster
Problem
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
÷
esp® is not available due to a malfunction.
The yellow esp® warn- This means that crosswind assist and hill start assist, for
ing lamp is lit while example, are also unavailable.
the engine is running. Further driving systems could be switched off automatically.
G WARNING
The brake system continues to function normally, but without
the functions listed above.
The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can
thus increase.
The brake lamps may not be functioning and thus no longer
working when braking.
If esp® is not operational, esp® is unable to stabilise the
vehicle.
The danger of skidding and having an accident increases.
X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible,
paying attention to road and traffic conditions. Do not continue driving under any circumstances.
X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 132).
X Vehicles with a colour display: observe the additional display messages.
X Check that the brake lamps are working.
If the brake lamps are not working:
X
Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
If the brake lamps are working:
X
X
Drive on carefully.
Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
^
The central vehicle electronics system is malfunctioning.
The yellow distance
After the engine is switched off:
warning function
Rdo not lock/unlock the doors using the remote control funcwarning lamp comes on
tion of the key.
while the vehicle is
Ryou can no longer start the engine
moving.
X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible,
In addition the \
paying attention to road and traffic conditions. Do not condoor warning lamp and
tinue driving under any circumstances.
other warning lamps,
X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 132).
e.g. ÷, light up.
X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Problem
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
^
The distance warning function is malfunctioning or temporarily inoperative. Possible causes:
The yellow distance
warning function
Rthe smart logo in the radiator trim is dirty.
warning lamp comes on Rthe function is impaired due to heavy rain or snow.
while the vehicle is
Rthe radar sensor system is temporarily inoperative, e.g. due
moving.
to electromagnetic radiation emitted by nearby TV or radio
stations or other sources of electromagnetic radiation.
Rthe system is outside the operating temperature range.
Rthe on-board voltage is too low.
If the causes listed above no longer apply, the distance warning function is operational again.
If the distance warning lamp continues to light up, the distance warning function electronics are malfunctioning.
X
·
The red distance
warning lamp lights
up while the vehicle
is in motion. A warning tone also sounds.
·
The red distance
warning lamp lights
up while the vehicle
is in motion.
Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
You are approaching a vehicle or a stationary obstacle in your
line of travel at too high a speed.
X Be prepared to brake immediately.
X Pay careful attention to the traffic situation. You may have to
brake or take evasive action.
Further information on the distance warning function
(Y page 60).
The distance to the vehicle in front is too small for the speed
selected.
X Increase the distance.
Z
189
>> On-board computer and displays.
Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster
190
Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster
>> On-board computer and displays.
Engine
Problem
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
;
The ignition system is malfunctioning. The engine is misfiring, for example, which means the catalytic converter could
The yellow engine
diagnostics warning become damaged.
lamp flashes while the X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.
engine is running.
;
The engine is running in emergency mode. This may lead to a
malfunctioning of the fuel injection system, for example.
The yellow engine
diagnostics warning X Drive on carefully.
lamp lights up while X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.
the engine is running.
The engine power output is also reduced.
;
There may be a fault, for example:
The yellow engine
Rin the engine management
diagnostics warning Rin the exhaust system
lamp lights up while
Rin the fuel system
the engine is running.
Rwith the accelerator pedal sensor
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.
í
The battery is not being charged.
The red battery warn- Possible causes:
ing lamp is lit while Rfaulty alternator
the engine is running.
Rthe battery is faulty
A warning tone also
Rtorn poly-V-belt
sounds.
Ra malfunction in the electronics
X Stop the vehicle immediately, paying attention to road and
traffic conditions, and switch off the engine.
! Do not continue driving. The engine could otherwise overheat.
X
X
Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 132).
Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Problem
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
5
The red oil pressure
indicator lamp is lit
while the engine is
running. A warning
tone also sounds.
The engine oil pressure is too low. There is a risk of engine
damage.
X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible,
paying attention to road and traffic conditions. Do not continue driving under any circumstances.
X Switch off the engine.
X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 132).
X Check the oil level (Y page 207).
X If necessary, top up the engine oil (Y page 207).
Information on approved engine oils can also be obtained from
any qualified specialist workshop.
?
The red coolant temperature warning
lamp comes on while
the engine is running.
A warning tone also
sounds.
The coolant temperature has exceeded 110 †. The airflow to the
engine radiator may be blocked or the coolant level may be too
low.
G WARNING
The engine is not being cooled sufficiently and may be damaged.
Never drive with an overheated engine. Driving when your
engine is overheated can cause some fluids which may have
leaked into the engine compartment to catch fire.
Steam from an overheated engine can cause serious burns,
which can occur just by opening the engine compartment cover.
There is a risk of injury.
X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible,
paying attention to road and traffic conditions. Do not continue driving under any circumstances.
X Switch off the engine.
X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 132).
X Leave the vehicle and keep a safe distance from the vehicle
until the engine has cooled down.
X Check the coolant level and top up the coolant. Observe the
notes as you do so (Y page 264).
X If you have to top up the coolant frequently, have the engine
cooling system checked.
X Make sure that the air supply to the engine radiator is not
blocked, e.g. by frozen slush.
X Do not start the engine again until the coolant temperature
is below 110 †. The engine may otherwise be damaged.
Avoid heavy loads on the engine as you do so, e.g. driving in
mountainous terrain and stop-start traffic.
Z
191
>> On-board computer and displays.
Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster
192
Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster
>> On-board computer and displays.
Tyres
Problem
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
h
The central vehicle electronics system is malfunctioning.
You are driving and
After the engine is switched off:
the yellow tyre pres- Rdo not lock/unlock the doors using the remote control funcsure monitor warning
tion of the key.
lamp (pressure loss/
Ryou can no longer start the engine
malfunction) is lit.
X Vehicles with a colour display: observe the additional disIn addition the \
play messages.
door warning lamp and
X
Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible,
other warning lamps,
paying attention to road and traffic conditions. Do not cone.g. ÷, light up.
tinue driving under any circumstances.
X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 132).
X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
h
You are driving and
the yellow tyre pressure monitor warning
lamp (pressure loss/
malfunction) is lit. A
warning tone also
sounds.
The tyre pressure in one or more tyres has dropped suddenly.
G WARNING
If you drive with a flat tyre, there is a risk of the following
hazards:
Ra
flat tyre affects the ability to steer or brake the vehicle.
could lose control of the vehicle
Rcontinued driving with a flat tyre will cause excessive heat
build-up and possibly a fire.
There is a risk of an accident.
X Stop the vehicle without making any sudden steering or
braking manoeuvres. Pay attention to the traffic conditions
as you do so.
X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 132).
X Check the tyres and, if necessary, follow the instructions for
a flat tyre (Y page 221).
Ryou
Problem
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
h
The yellow tyre pressure monitor warning
lamp (pressure loss/
malfunction) flashes
for approximately
one minute and then
remains lit.
There is no signal from the tyre pressure sensor of one or several wheels, or the wheels fitted do not have suitable tyre
pressure sensors. The tyre pressure monitor was not restarted
after a wheel change.
G WARNING
The system is possibly unable to recognise or register low tyre
pressure.
There is a risk of an accident.
X Vehicles with a colour display: observe the additional display messages.
X Have the faulty tyre pressure sensor replaced at a qualified
specialist workshop.
or
X Fit wheels with suitable tyre pressure sensors.
or
X Restart the tyre pressure monitor after a wheel change
(Y page 246)
The tyre pressure monitor is activated automatically after
driving for a few minutes.
If the yellow tyre pressure monitor warning lamp continues to
remain on:
X
X
h
You are driving and
the yellow tyre pressure monitor warning
lamp (pressure loss/
malfunction) is lit.
Drive on carefully.
Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
The tyre pressure is too low in at least one of the tyres, or the
tyre pressure difference between the wheels is too great.
X Check the tyre pressures at the next opportunity
(Y page 245).
X If necessary, correct the tyre pressure.
X Restart the tyre pressure monitor (Y page 246).
Z
193
>> On-board computer and displays.
Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster
194
Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster
>> On-board computer and displays.
Vehicle
Problem
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
\
The central vehicle electronics system is malfunctioning.
The red door warning After the engine is switched off:
lamp comes on while
Rdo not lock/unlock the doors using the remote control functhe vehicle is moving.
tion of the key.
In addition, further
Ryou can no longer start the engine
warning lamps light
X Vehicles with a colour display: observe the additional disup, such as ÷.
play messages.
X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible,
paying attention to road and traffic conditions. Do not continue driving under any circumstances.
X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 132).
X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
\
The red door warning
lamp is on.
A door or the tailgate is open. If you are driving at speeds
above 20 km/h, an additional warning tone will sound.
X Vehicles with a colour display: observe the additional display messages.
X Pull over at a suitable place and stop the vehicle safely,
paying attention to road and traffic conditions.
X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 132).
X Close all doors and the tailgate.
D
The yellow power
steering warning
lamp is lit while the
engine is running.
The power steering assistance is faulty.
G WARNING
You may need to use more force to steer.
There is a risk of an accident.
X Vehicles with a colour display: observe the additional display messages.
X Check whether you are able to apply the extra force required.
X If you are able to steer safely: carefully drive on to a qualified specialist workshop.
X If you are unable to steer safely: do not drive on. Contact the
nearest qualified specialist workshop.
Problem
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
ç
The yellow automatic
Start/Stop function
warning lamp is lit
when the vehicle is
stationary and while
it is moving.
The automatic Start/Stop function is malfunctioning and will
be switched off.
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
ç
Not all conditions for the automatic engine switch-off have
The yellow automatic been met.
Start/Stop function
X Please take note of the conditions for automatic engine
warning lamp only
switch-off (Y page 118).
lights up when the
vehicle is stationary.
è
The green automatic
start/stop system
indicator lamp starts
flashing when the
vehicle is stationary
and the engine is running.
Vehicles with manual transmission only: the vehicle is at a
standstill. No stop preventers are active. The clutch pedal is
fully depressed.
The engine is not switched off automatically. The flashing
indicator lamp is intended to remind you to activate the start/
stop function in order to save fuel.
X Shift to neutral and slowly release the clutch pedal.
(Y page 121).
The engine is switched off automatically.
è
The green automatic
Start/Stop function
indicator lamp
flashes during the
automatic engine
switch-off. A warning
tone also sounds.
The vehicle is in automatic engine stop. The driver's door has
been opened or the seatbelt removed while the ignition is
switched on.
The engine will not start automatically.
X Vehicles with manual transmission: depress the clutch
pedal completely.
Vehicles with automatic transmission: release the brake.
The engine starts automatically.
è
The green automatic
start/stop system
indicator lamp starts
flashing and the
engine is switched
off.
Vehicles with manual transmission only: you have stalled the
engine when pulling away or when stopping.
X Depress the clutch pedal fully.
The engine starts automatically.
If the engine does not start automatically:
X
Engage neutral (Y page 121).
The engine starts automatically.
Z
195
>> On-board computer and displays.
Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster
196
197
Useful information ........................... 198
Stowage areas .................................. 198
>> Stowing and features.
Features ........................................ 202
198
Stowage areas
Useful information
>> Stowing and features.
i This Owner's Manual describes all models, series and optional equipment for
your vehicle that were available at the
time of going to press. Country-specific
differences are possible. Note that your
vehicle may not be fitted with all features described. This is also the case for
systems and functions relevant to safety.
i Read the information on qualified specialist workshops: (Y page 21).
Stowage areas
Loading guidelines
G WARNING
If objects, luggage or loads are not secured
or not secured sufficiently, they could
slip, tip over or be flung around and
thereby hit vehicle occupants. There is a
risk of injury, especially when braking or
abruptly changing directions.
Always store objects so that they cannot be
flung around. Secure objects, luggage or
loads against slipping or tipping before
the journey.
G WARNING
Combustion engines emit poisonous
exhaust gases such as carbon monoxide. If
the tailgate is open when the engine is
running, particularly if the vehicle is
moving, exhaust fumes could enter the
passenger compartment. There is a risk of
poisoning.
Turn off the engine before opening the
tailgate. Never drive with the tailgate
open.
Your vehicle has not been approved by the
manufacturer for towing a trailer. A
trailer could seriously impair driving
safety.
Mounting a basic rack, a cycle rack or a ski/
snowboard rack on the rear of the vehicle
will change the axle load distribution as
specified by the vehicle manufacturer.
Read the operating instructions for the
individual accessories.
The handling characteristics of a laden
vehicle are dependent on the distribution
of the load within the vehicle. For this
reason, you should observe the following
notes when transporting a load:
Rnever
exceed the maximum permissible
gross vehicle weight or the permissible
axle loads for the vehicle (including
occupants)
Rthe load must not protrude above the
upper edge of the head restraints
Rensure that no items of luggage can enter
the vehicle interior above or between the
front seats
Rensure that loaded objects are stowed
safely and are secured
Rload heavy objects at the bottom and
light objects at the top
Stowage compartments
Important safety notes
G WARNING
If you stow objects in the vehicle interior
in an unsuitable way, they could slip or be
thrown around and thus hit vehicle occupants. There is a risk of injury, especially
in the case of heavy braking or a sudden
change in direction.
RAlways stow objects so they cannot be
thrown around in these or similar situations.
RAlways ensure that objects do not protrude over the top of stowage compartments or ruffled pockets.
Stowage areas
RClose
closable stowage compartments
while driving.
RAlways stow and secure heavy, hard, pointed, sharp-edged or fragile objects
behind the last bench seat or under the
passenger seats.
Stowage compartment in the doors
The stowage compartments are located in
the driver's door and front-passenger
door.
>> Stowing and features.
Observe the loading guidelines
(Y page 198).
Glove compartment
: Stowage compartment
Bottles can be stowed in the doors.
Drawer in the centre console
Illustration of a closed glove compartment
X
To open: pull handle :.
The closed glove compartment can be
locked with the key.
X
Pull drawer ; by handle : in the direction of the arrow.
Stowage compartment in the tailgate
X
To lock: insert the key into the lock and
turn it 90° clockwise to position 2.
X To unlock: insert the key into the lock
and turn it 90° anti-clockwise to position 1.
199
The stowage compartment in the tailgate
offers additional stowage space for small
objects. You can keep the fluorescent
jacket, first-aid kit and warning triangle
here, for example.
Z
Stowage areas
200
The boot cover:
Rconceals
objects in the vehicle's boot
smaller objects from slipping
from the boot into the vehicle interior,
but will not restrain loads in the event of
an accident
The luggage net bag:
>> Stowing and features.
Rprevents
Rserves
to hold small, light objects
smaller objects from slipping
within the vehicle interior
Rprevents
X
To open: open the tailgate.
Pull back handle : on the inside of the
tailgate.
X Fold the lid of the stowage compartment
forwards in the direction of the arrow.
X To close: fold the lid of the stowage compartment back in the opposite direction
to the arrow.
X Press the cover firmly closed in the middle until it engages audibly.
X
Boot cover
Important safety notes
G WARNING
On its own, the boot cover cannot secure or
restrain heavy objects, items of luggage
and heavy loads. You could be hit by an
unsecured load during sudden changes in
direction, braking or in the event of an
accident. There is an increased risk of
injury or even fatal injury.
Always store objects so that they cannot be
flung around. Secure objects, luggage or
loads against slipping or tipping over,
e.g. by using lashing material, even if you
are using the boot cover.
Observe the loading guidelines
(Y page 198).
Fitting
If you use the boot cover under normal circumstances, install it in brackets ;. If
you do not need to use the boot cover,
install it in brackets =.
X
For easier fitting, fold the frontpassenger seat backrests forwards
(Y page 80).
X Open the upper and lower tailgate
(Y page 71).
X Hold boot cover : in the boot with the
luggage net bag at the front.
X Insert the boot cover into upper
bracket ; or into lower bracket = on
the right-hand side.
i Lower bracket = can only be used if
there is no subwoofer fitted.
Stowage areas
201
To install: grip boot cover : in the
middle and pull it back.
X Hook boot cover : into left and right
rear brackets B and release.
X To remove: grip boot cover : in the
middle, pull it back and unhook it from
rear brackets B.
X Slide boot cover : back.
X
Slide handle ? to the right in the direction of the arrow.
X Insert the boot cover into bracket ; or
= on the left side panelling and release
the handle.
Boot cover : snaps into place.
Fitting/removing the subwoofer
X
To fit: insert connector :.
Place subwoofer ; on the side trim.
X Slide subwoofer ; to bracket =.
X
X
Pull luggage net bag A down slightly and
secure with the Velcro fasteners.
To remove, follow the sequence in reverse.
Installing and removing the boot cover
X
Slide the subwoofer up in the direction
of the arrow on bracket =.
Z
>> Stowing and features.
X
Features
>> Stowing and features.
202
X
Then slide the subwoofer over bracket =
in the direction of the arrow until the
subwoofer slides down.
X Close quick-release fastener ?.
X To remove: release quick-release fastener ?.
X Slide the subwoofer up over bracket =
and remove.
X Disconnect plug :.
X Take out subwoofer :.
Features
Cup holders
G WARNING
If you do not correctly store objects in the
vehicle interior, they can slip or be flung
around, thus striking vehicle occupants.
There is a risk of injury, especially when
braking or abruptly changing directions.
RAlways store objects so that they cannot
be flung around in these or in similar
situations.
RAlways make sure that objects do not protrude from stowage compartments, luggage nets or stowage nets.
RClose lockable stowage compartments
while driving.
RStow and secure objects that are heavy,
hard, pointy, sharp-edged, fragile or too
large in the luggage compartment.
! Only use the cup holders for containers
of the right size and which have lids. The
drinks could otherwise spill.
Observe the loading guidelines
(Y page 198).
Cup holder in the front centre console
Important safety notes
G WARNING
The cup holder cannot secure a drinks container in place during a journey. If you use
a cup holder during a journey, the drinks
container could be flung around and liquid
could be spilt. Vehicle occupants could
come into contact with the liquid and, in
particular, be scalded by hot liquid. You
could be distracted from the traffic situation and lose control of the vehicle. There
is a risk of an accident and injury.
Only use the cup holder when the vehicle is
stationary. Only place containers of a suitable size in the cup holder. Seal the container, in particular when it contains hot
liquid.
: Cup holders
Features
Cup holder in the centre console
The cup holder has a recess for storing
selected mobile phones.
Overview
X
To open: lift up cover :.
To close: push down cover :.
X To remove: pull the ashtray up and out.
X To insert: insert the ashtray into the cup
holder.
X
i If you remove the ashtray, you can use
the resulting compartment for stowage.
Cigarette lighter
Important safety notes
: Mirror cover
; Bracket
= Retaining strap
? Vanity mirror
Glare from the side
X
Fold down the sun visor.
X Pull the sun visor out of bracket ;.
X Swing the sun visor to the side.
Ashtray
! The cup holder in the centre console is
G WARNING
You can burn yourself if you touch the hot
heating element or the socket of the cigarette lighter.
In addition, flammable materials can
ignite if:
Rthe
hot cigarette lighter falls
Ra child holds the hot cigarette lighter to
objects, for example
There is a risk of fire and injury.
Always hold the cigarette lighter by the
knob. Always make sure that the cigarette
lighter is out of reach of children. Never
leave children unattended in the vehicle.
not heat resistant. Before placing lit
Z
>> Stowing and features.
cigarettes in the ashtray, make sure that
the ashtray is fully inserted in the cup
holder. Make sure that lit cigarettes do
not fall into the cup holder.
Otherwise, the cup holder could be damaged.
: Cup holders
Sun visors
203
Features
204
>> Stowing and features.
Your attention must always be focused on
the traffic conditions. Only use the cigarette lighter when road and traffic conditions permit.
X
Press in cigarette lighter :.
Cigarette lighter : will pop out automatically when the heating element is
red-hot.
X
Lift up the cover of socket :.
Floormat on the driver's side
G WARNING
Objects in the driver's footwell may
restrict the clearance around the pedals or
block a depressed pedal. This jeopardises
the operating and road safety of the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident.
Stow all objects securely in the vehicle so
that they do not get into the driver's footwell. Always fit the floormats securely and
as prescribed in order to ensure that there
is always sufficient room for the pedals. Do
not use loose floormats and do not place
several floormats on top of one another.
12 V sockets
General notes
X
Turn the key to position 1 in the ignition
lock (Y page 115).
The sockets can be used for accessories
with a maximum draw of 120 W (10 A). Example
accessories include mobile phone chargers.
If you use the sockets for long periods when
the engine is switched off, the battery may
discharge.
Socket in the front centre console
X
Slide the driver's seat backwards.
To fit: lay the floormat in the footwell.
X Press safety catch knobs : onto retainers ;.
X To remove: pull the floormat from retainers ;.
X Remove the floormat.
X
205
Useful information .......................... 206
Checking service products ................. 206
Service .......................................... 211
>> Maintenance and care.
Care .............................................. 212
Checking service products
206
Useful information
>> Maintenance and care.
i This Owner's Manual describes all models, series and optional equipment for
your vehicle that were available at the
time of going to press. Country-specific
differences are possible. Note that your
vehicle may not be fitted with all features described. This is also the case for
systems and functions relevant to safety.
i Read the information on qualified specialist workshops: (Y page 21).
Checking service products
Engine compartment (rear)
Engine compartment cover
G WARNING
The engine compartment cover can become
very hot. There is a risk of injury if you
remove the engine compartment cover to
work in the engine compartment.
Allow the engine to cool down before removing the engine compartment cover.
X
To open: apply the parking brake.
X Select a gear.
X Switch the ignition off.
X Remove the key from the ignition lock.
X Open the upper and lower tailgate
(Y page 71).
X For vehicles with the subwoofer: remove
the subwoofer (Y page 206).
X
Remove luggage compartment cover : if
necessary (Y page 200).
X Hold the carpet on the right and left
sides and fold upwards.
X Remove the carpet from the vehicle.
X Vehicles with a boot cover: attach the
hook to upper bracket of boot cover :
(Y page 200).
X Unscrew screws = from engine compartment cover ; manually.
X Remove engine compartment cover ;.
X To close: slide engine compartment
cover ; forward as far as it will go.
X Retighten screws = manually.
X Vehicles with a boot cover: unhook the
hooks.
X Put the carpet back into the vehicle.
X Fold down the carpet and push it under
the side panelling.
X For vehicles with the subwoofer: fit the
subwoofer again (Y page 206).
X Close the tailgate.
Engine oil
General notes
Depending on your driving style, the vehicle consumes up to 0.5 litres of oil per
1000 km. The oil consumption may be higher
than this when the vehicle is new or if you
frequently drive at high engine speeds.
When checking the oil level:
Rpark
the vehicle on a level surface.
engine should be switched off for
approximately 5 minutes if the engine is
at normal operating temperature.
Rif the engine is not at normal operating
temperature, e.g. if the engine was only
started briefly, wait approximately
30 minutes before carrying out the measurement.
Rthe
Checking service products
207
G WARNING
Certain components in the engine compartment could be very hot, e.g. the engine, the
radiator and parts of the exhaust system.
There is a risk of injury when accessing the
engine compartment.
As far as possible, allow the engine to cool
down and only touch the components described in the following.
G WARNING
If you open the bonnet while the engine is
overheating or while there is a fire in the
engine compartment, you could come into
contact with hot gases or other leaking service products. There is a danger of injury.
Allow an overheating engine to cool down
before opening the bonnet. If there is a fire
in the engine compartment, leave the bonnet closed and notify the fire brigade.
G WARNING
There are moving components in the engine
compartment. Certain components may continue to move or suddenly move again even
after the ignition has been switched off,
e.g. the radiator fan. There is a risk of
injury.
If you have to carry out work in the engine
compartment:
Rswitch
off the ignition
Rnever touch the dangerous areas surrounding moving components, e.g. the
rotation area of the fan
Rremove jewellery and watches
Rkeep items of clothing and hair, for
example, away from moving parts.
X
Open the engine compartment cover
(Y page 206).
Example
X
Pull oil dipstick : out of the oil dipstick tube.
X Wipe off oil dipstick :.
X Slowly slide oil dipstick : into the
guide tube to the stop, and take it out
again.
If the level is between MIN mark = and
MAX mark ;, the oil level is correct.
Adding engine oil
G WARNING
Certain components in the engine compartment could be very hot, e.g. the engine, the
radiator and parts of the exhaust system.
There is a risk of injury when accessing the
engine compartment.
As far as possible, allow the engine to cool
down and only touch the components described in the following.
G WARNING
If engine oil comes into contact with hot
components in the engine compartment, it
may ignite. There is a risk of fire and
injury.
Make sure that engine oil does not spill out
over the filler neck. Allow the engine to
cool down and thoroughly clean the components that have come into contact with
engine oil before you start the engine.
Z
>> Maintenance and care.
Checking the oil level using the oil dipstick
Checking service products
208
H Environmental note
When topping up the oil, take care not to
spill any. If oil enters the soil or waterways, it is harmful to the environment.
>> Maintenance and care.
! Do not add too much oil. Topping up with
too much engine oil can result in damage
to the engine or to the catalytic converter. Have excess engine oil siphoned
off.
You will find further information on
engine oils you can use in the "Technical
data" section (Y page 263).
view or endanger other road users. There is
a risk of an accident and injury.
Therefore, make sure that the service cover
is locked before driving off.
G WARNING
If the windscreen wipers start to move when
the service cover is open, you could become
caught up in the wiper rods. There is a risk
of injury.
Always switch off the windscreen wipers
and the ignition before you open the service cover.
! To ensure unhindered air intake, completely remove any dirt or snow from the
ventilation slots above the service
cover.
X
Turn cap : anti-clockwise and remove
it.
X Top up the engine oil.
If the oil level is at or below the MIN
mark on the oil dipstick, top up once with
a maximum of 1 l engine oil.
X Replace cap : on the filler neck and turn
clockwise.
Make sure that the cap locks securely into
place.
X Check the oil level again with the oil
dipstick (Y page 207).
To prevent it from becoming damaged or
dirty, the service cover can be removed and
hung on the front of the vehicle.
The service cover is attached to the rear
side of the vehicle body with a strap.
X Park the vehicle on a flat, level surface.
X Apply the parking brake.
X Select a gear.
X Switch the ignition off.
Removing
Front compartment
Service cover
Important safety notes
G WARNING
If the service cover is not locked, it may
come loose during driving and block your
Vehicles with a lockable service cover:
X
To unlock: remove lock cover : (driver's
side only) with the key.
X Insert the key into the lock and turn it to
position u.
X
Pull both levers : with both index fingers in the direction of the arrows.
X
First pull both levers ; forwards and
then completely out.
X Lift service cover = and pull forwards.
X
X
X
Hook service cover = into the openings
on the vehicle using the hooks at the top
rear.
Inserting
X Lift service cover =.
Slide bars A on the left and right of the
service cover under the bars on wing ?.
Press service cover = down in the direction of the arrow.
X Slide both levers ; in and then back.
X Press lever ; in the radiator trim and
allow it to engage.
Vehicles with a lockable service cover:
X
To lock: insert the key into the lock and
turn it to position 1.
Insert lock cover : flush (on the driver's side) and clip it into place.
Z
209
>> Maintenance and care.
Checking service products
Checking service products
210
Coolant
>> Maintenance and care.
Important safety notes
G WARNING
The engine cooling system is under pressure, particularly if the engine is warm.
You could be scalded by hot coolant spraying out when opening the cap. There is a
danger of injury.
Allow the engine to cool before opening the
cap. Wear gloves and protective eyewear
when opening. Slowly turn the cap half a
turn to allow pressure to escape.
Checking the coolant
The coolant expansion tank is in the area
under the service cover.
X
Turn cap : further anti-clockwise and
remove it.
X Do not exceed the maximum filling level
when adding coolant.
X Screw on cap : tightly.
For further information on coolant, see
(Y page 264).
Windscreen washer system
G WARNING
Windscreen washer concentrate is highly
flammable. If it comes into contact with hot
components in the front compartment, it
may ignite. There is a risk of fire and
injury.
Make sure that windscreen washer concentrate is not spilled next to the filler neck.
X
Open the service cover (Y page 208).
Let the coolant cool down for at least
30 minutes.
X Park the vehicle on a level surface.
Only check the coolant level if the vehicle is on a level surface and the engine
has cooled down.
X Check the reservoir visually.
The fluid level must be between MIN and
MAX.
X
Topping up the coolant
X Cover cap : of coolant expansion
tank ; with a cloth.
X Slowly turn cap : by half a turn anticlockwise to allow excess pressure to
escape.
X
Open the service cover (Y page 208).
To open: pull cap : upwards by the tab.
X If available, pull the removable nozzle
up as far as the stop.
X Top up with the premixed washer fluid.
X To close: if available, push the removable nozzle down and push it inside.
X Press cap : onto the filler neck until it
engages.
X
Further information on windscreen washer
fluid/antifreeze (Y page 265).
Service
Service display
Service message
The service display informs you of the next
service due date. Depending on the operating conditions of the vehicle, the
remaining time or distance until the next
service due date is displayed.
Information on the type of service and service intervals (see separate Service Booklet).
For further information enquire at any
smart centre.
i The service display does not show any
information on the engine oil level.
Observe the notes on the engine oil level
(Y page 207).
Whenever a service is due, this is shown
approximately 30 days or 1500 km (1000 mi)
beforehand. After starting the engine, a
service message appears in the instrument
cluster display for a few seconds; see the
following example.
RInstrument
cluster with monochrome
display
The ¯ or ° symbol flashes. If a
service due date has been exceeded, a
minus is shown before the information
about the days or distance.
RInstrument cluster with colour display
Next service due in .. days together
with the ¯ or ° symbol. If the service due date has been exceeded, Ser‐
vice due .. days ago.
The symbol shows the type of service. ¯
stands for a minor service and ° for a
major service.
The service display does not take into
account any periods of time during which
the battery is disconnected.
Maintaining the time-dependent service
schedule:
X
Note down the service due date in the
service display before disconnecting
the battery.
or
X After reconnecting the battery, subtract
the battery disconnection periods from
the service date shown on the display.
Hiding a service message
This function is only available with an
instrument cluster with colour display.
X Press the a button on the multifunction steering wheel.
Calling up the service display
X
X
Switch the ignition on.
Depending on the equipment in the vehicle, you can call up the service display
with the buttons on the multifunction
lever or on the multifunction steering
wheel.
Instrument cluster with monochrome display
X
Use the ÷ multifunction lever to select
the Service menu.
The service display shows when the service is due.
Instrument cluster with colour display
X
Press the 9 or : button on the
steering wheel to select the Messages
and service menu.
The service display shows when the service is due.
Information about Service
Resetting the service display
! Have service work carried out as
described in the Service Booklet. This
may otherwise lead to increased wear and
Z
>> Maintenance and care.
Service
211
212
Care
damage to the major assemblies or the
vehicle.
>> Maintenance and care.
A qualified specialist workshop, e.g. a
smart centre, will reset the service interval display after the service work has been
carried out. You can also obtain further
information on maintenance work, for
example.
Special service requirements
The prescribed service interval is based
on normal operation of the vehicle. Service
work will need to be performed more often
if the vehicle is operated under arduous
conditions or increased loads, for example:
Rregular
city driving with frequent
intermediate stops
Rif the vehicle is primarily used to travel
short distances
Rfor frequent operation in mountainous
terrain or on poor road surfaces
Rif the engine is often left idling for long
periods
In these or similar operating conditions,
have, for example, the air filter, engine
oil and oil filter changed more frequently.
The tyres must be checked more frequently
if the vehicle is operated under increased
loads. You can obtain further information
at a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. a
smart centre.
Driving abroad
An extensive smart service network is also
available in other countries. For further
information enquire at any smart centre.
Care
General notes
H Environmental note
Dispose of empty packaging and cleaning
cloths in an environmentally responsible
manner.
! For cleaning your vehicle, do not use
any of the following:
Rdry,
rough or hard cloths
cleaning agents
Rsolvents
Rcleaning agents containing solvents
Do not scrub.
Do not touch the surfaces or protective
films with hard objects, e.g. a ring or ice
scraper. You could otherwise scratch or
damage the surfaces and protective film.
Rabrasive
! Do not park up the vehicle for an extended period straight after cleaning it,
particularly after having cleaned the
wheels with wheel cleaner. Wheel cleaners could cause increased corrosion of
the brake discs and brake pads/linings.
For this reason, you should drive for a
few minutes after cleaning. Braking
heats the brake discs and the brake pads/
linings, thus drying them. The vehicle
can then be parked up.
Regular care of your vehicle is a condition
for retaining the quality in the long term.
Use care products and cleaning agents recommended and approved by smart.
Care of the exterior
Automatic car wash
G WARNING
Braking efficiency is reduced after the
vehicle has been washed. There is a risk of
an accident.
After washing the vehicle, brake carefully
while paying attention to the traffic conditions in order to restore full braking
efficiency.
Care
Rthe
side windows are fully closed
Rthe climate control blower is switched
off
Rthe
windscreen wiper switch is at
position 0
The vehicle could otherwise be damaged.
You can wash the vehicle in an automatic
car wash from the very start.
Wash off excess dirt before cleaning the
vehicle in an automatic car wash.
After using an automatic car wash, wipe off
wax from the windscreen and the wiper
blades. This will prevent smears and
reduce wiping noises caused by residue on
the windscreen.
Washing by hand
In some countries, washing by hand is only
allowed at specially equipped washing
bays. Observe the legal requirements for
each individual country.
X Do not use hot water and do not wash the
vehicle in direct sunlight.
X Use a soft sponge to clean.
X Use a mild cleaning agent, such as a car
shampoo approved by smart.
X Thoroughly hose down the vehicle with a
gentle jet of water.
X Do not point the water jet directly
towards the air inlet.
X Use plenty of water and rinse out the
sponge frequently.
X Rinse the vehicle with clean water and
dry thoroughly with a chamois.
X Do not let the cleaning agent dry on the
paintwork.
When using the vehicle in winter, remove
all traces of road salt deposits carefully
and as soon as possible.
High-pressure cleaning equipment
G WARNING
The water jet of circular-jet nozzles (dirt
grinders) can cause damage not visible
from the outside to tyres or chassis components. Components damaged in this way
can unexpectedly fail. There is a risk of an
accident.
Do not use high-pressure cleaners with
circular-jet nozzles to clean the vehicle.
Have damaged tyres or chassis components
replaced immediately.
! Always maintain a distance of at least
30 cm between the vehicle and the highpressure cleaner nozzle. Information
about the correct distance is available
from the equipment manufacturer.
Move the high-pressure cleaner nozzle
around when cleaning your vehicle.
Do not aim directly at any of the following:
Rtyres
Rdoor
gaps, roof gaps, joints etc.
components
Rbattery
Rconnectors
Rlights
Rseals
Rventilation slots
Damaged seals or electrical components
can lead to leaks or failures.
Relectrical
Cleaning the paintwork
! Do not affix:
Rstickers
Rfilms
Rmagnetic
plates or similar items
to painted surfaces. You could otherwise
damage the paintwork.
Z
>> Maintenance and care.
! Make sure that:
213
Care
214
>> Maintenance and care.
X
Remove impurities immediately, where
possible, whilst avoiding rubbing too
hard.
X Soak insect remains with insect remover
and rinse off the treated areas afterwards.
X Soak bird droppings with water and rinse
off the treated areas afterwards.
X Remove coolant, brake fluid, tree resin,
oils, fuels and greases by rubbing gently
with a cloth soaked in petroleum ether or
lighter fluid.
X Use tar remover to remove tar stains.
X Use silicone remover to remove wax.
The following cannot always be completely
repaired:
Rscratches
Rcorrosive
deposits
affected by corrosion
Rdamage caused by inadequate care
In such cases, visit a qualified specialist
workshop.
Rareas
Cleaning the panoramic roof
! Only use cleaning agents or cleaning
cloths that are suitable for plastic lenses. Unsuitable cleaning agents or
cleaning cloths could scratch or damage
the plastic panes of the panorama roof.
Do not use cleaning agents containing
solvents
X
Clean the plastic panes of the panoramic
roof using a wet sponge and a mild cleaning agent, e.g. smart car shampoo, a commercially available glass cleaner or
cleaning cloths.
Cleaning the wheels
G WARNING
The water jet of circular-jet nozzles (dirt
grinders) can cause damage not visible
from the outside to tyres or chassis components. Components damaged in this way
can unexpectedly fail. There is a risk of an
accident.
Do not use high-pressure cleaners with
circular-jet nozzles to clean the vehicle.
Have damaged tyres or chassis components
replaced immediately.
! Do not use acidic wheel cleaning products to remove brake dust. This could
damage wheel bolts and brake components.
! Do not park up the vehicle for an extended period straight after cleaning it,
particularly after having cleaned the
wheels with wheel cleaner. Wheel cleaners could cause increased corrosion of
the brake discs and brake pads/linings.
For this reason, you should drive for a
few minutes after cleaning. Braking
heats the brake discs and the brake pads/
linings, thus drying them. The vehicle
can then be parked up.
Cleaning the windows
G WARNING
If the windscreen wipers are set in motion
when cleaning the windscreen or wiper
blades, you could become trapped. There is
a danger of injury.
Always switch off the windscreen wipers
and the ignition before cleaning the windscreen or wiper blades.
! Do not use dry cloths, abrasive products, solvents or cleaning agents containing solvents to clean the inside of
the windows. Do not touch the insides of
the windows with hard objects, e.g. an ice
scraper or ring. There is otherwise a
risk of damaging the windows.
! Clean the water drainage channels of
the windscreen and the rear window at
regular intervals. Deposits such as
leaves, petals and pollen may under certain circumstances prevent water from
Care
X
Clean the inside and outside of the windows with a damp cloth and a cleaning
agent that is recommended and approved
by smart.
X
Clean the plastic lenses of the exterior
lighting using a wet sponge and a mild
cleaning agent, e.g. smart car shampoo or
cleaning cloths.
Cleaning the sensors
! If you clean the sensors with a highpressure cleaner, make sure that you keep
a distance of at least 30 cm between the
vehicle and the high-pressure cleaner
nozzle. Information about the correct
distance is available from the equipment manufacturer.
Cleaning the wiper blades
G WARNING
If the windscreen wipers are set in motion
when cleaning the windscreen or wiper
blades, you could become trapped. There is
a danger of injury.
Always switch off the windscreen wipers
and the ignition before cleaning the windscreen or wiper blades.
! Do not pull on the wiper blade. Otherwise, the wiper blade could be damaged.
! Do not clean wiper blades too often and
do not rub them too hard. Otherwise, the
graphite coating could be damaged. This
could cause wiper noise.
X
Fold the wiper arms away from the windscreen.
X Carefully clean the wiper blades with a
damp cloth.
X Fold the windscreen wipers back again
before switching on the ignition.
! Hold the wiper arm securely when folding back. The windscreen could be damaged if the wiper arm hits against it
suddenly.
X
Clean sensors : of the driving systems
with water, car shampoo and a soft cloth.
Cleaning the reversing camera
! Do not clean the camera lens and the
area around the reversing camera with a
high-pressure cleaner.
Cleaning the exterior lighting
! Only use cleaning agents or cleaning
cloths that are suitable for plastic lenses. Unsuitable cleaning agents or
cleaning cloths could scratch or damage
the plastic lenses of the exterior lighting.
Z
>> Maintenance and care.
draining away. This can lead to corrosion damage and damage to electronic
components.
215
Care
216
X
>> Maintenance and care.
Before cleaning the display, make sure
that it is switched off and has cooled
down.
X Clean the display surface using a commercially available microfibre cloth
and TFT/LCD display cleaner.
X Dry the display surface using a dry
microfibre cloth.
Cleaning the plastic trim
X
Use clear water and a soft cloth to clean
camera lens :.
Cleaning the exhaust pipe
Impurities combined with the effects of
road grit and corrosive environmental factors may cause flash rust to form on the
surface. You can restore the original shine
of the exhaust pipe by cleaning it regularly, especially in winter and after washing.
! Do not clean the exhaust pipe with acid-
X
G WARNING
Care products and cleaning agents containing solvents can cause surfaces in the cockpit to become porous. This could result in
plastic parts breaking away when the airbags are deployed. There is a danger of
injury.
Do not use care products and cleaning
agents containing solvents to clean the
cockpit.
! Do not affix the following to plastic
surfaces:
based cleaning agents such as sanitary
cleansers or wheel cleaners.
Rstickers
Clean the exhaust pipe with a care product tested and approved by smart.
Rscented
Interior care
Rfilms
oil bottles or similar items
You could otherwise damage the plastic.
! Do not allow cosmetics, insect repellent or sunscreen to come in contact with
the plastic trim. This maintains the
high-quality look of the surfaces.
Cleaning the display
! For cleaning, do not use any of the following:
Ralcohol-based
thinner or petrol
cleaning agents
Rcommercially-available household
cleaning agents
These may damage the display surface. Do
not put pressure on the display surface
when cleaning. This could lead to irreparable damage to the display.
Rabrasive
X
Wipe the plastic trim with a damp, lintfree cloth, e.g. a microfibre cloth.
X Heavy soiling: use care products and
cleaning agents recommended and
approved by smart.
The surface may change colour temporarily. Wait until the surface is dry again.
Cleaning the steering wheel and gear or
selector lever
X
taining 1% detergent (e.g. washing-up
liquid).
Rclean cloth covers with a microfibre
cloth moistened with a solution containing 1% detergent (e.g. washing-up
liquid). Rub carefully, and always wipe
entire seat sections to avoid leaving
visible lines. Leave the seat to dry
afterwards. Cleaning results depend
on the type of dirt and how long it has
been there.
RClean DINAMICA covers with a damp
cloth. Make sure that you wipe entire
seat sections to avoid leaving visible
lines.
Thoroughly wipe with a damp cloth or use
leather care agents that have been recommended and approved by smart.
Cleaning the seat covers
General notes
! Do not use microfibre cloths to clean
genuine leather, artificial leather or
DINAMICA covers. If used often, these can
damage the cover.
i Note that regular care is essential to
make sure that the appearance and comfort of the covers are retained over time.
Genuine leather seat covers
Leather is a natural product.
It has natural surface properties, e.g.:
Runevenness in structure
Rmarks caused by growth and injury
Rsubtle colour differences
These are characteristics of leather and
not material faults.
Cleaning the seat belts
G WARNING
Seat belts may be severely weakened if
bleached or coloured. This may lead to the
seat belts, for example, tearing or failing
in an accident. There is an increased risk
of injury, possibly even fatal.
Never bleach or colour seat belts.
! Do not clean the seat belts using chemical cleaning agents. Do not dry the seat
belts at temperatures above 80 † or in
direct sunlight.
! To maintain the leather's natural
appearance, observe the following
cleaning tips:
Rclean genuine leather covers carefully
with a damp cloth and then wipe the
covers down with a dry cloth.
RMake sure that the leather does not
become soaked. It may otherwise
become rough and cracked.
ROnly use leather care agents that have
been recommended by smart. You can
obtain these from a qualified specialist workshop.
Seat covers from other materials
! Observe the following when cleaning:
X
Use clean, lukewarm water and soap solution.
Cleaning the roof lining and carpets
X
Roof lining: if it is very dirty, use a soft
brush or a cleaning agent recommended
and approved by smart.
X
Carpets: use the carpet and textile
cleaning agents recommended and
approved by smart.
Rclean
artificial leather covers with a
cloth moistened with a solution con-
Z
217
>> Maintenance and care.
Care
218
219
Useful information .......................... 220
Where will I find...? ......................... 220
Flat tyres ....................................... 221
Battery (vehicle) ............................. 225
Jump-starting ................................. 228
Towing and tow-starting ................... 230
>> Breakdown assistance.
Electrical fuses .............................. 233
Where will I find...?
220
Useful information
Setting up the warning triangle
i This Owner's Manual describes all models, series and optional equipment for
your vehicle that were available at the
time of going to press. Country-specific
differences are possible. Note that your
vehicle may not be fitted with all features described. This is also the case for
systems and functions relevant to safety.
>> Breakdown assistance.
i Read the information on qualified specialist workshops: (Y page 21).
X
X
Where will I find...?
Warning triangle
Removing/replacing the warning triangle
Fold feet = out to the side.
Pull side reflectors ; upwards to form a
triangle and lock them at the top using
upper press-stud :.
First-aid kit
The warning triangle is secured behind the
front-passenger seat backrest with a Velcro fastener.
X
To remove: fold the driver's seat forwards.
X Remove warning triangle :.
X To replace: press the side of warning
triangle : with the Velcro fastener
firmly in the relevant position.
X Fold the driver's seat back again.
First-aid kit : is secured behind the
front-passenger seat backrest with a Velcro fastener.
X To remove: fold the driver's seat forwards.
X Remove first-aid kit :.
X To replace: press the side of first-aid
kit : with the Velcro fastener firmly in
the relevant position.
X Fold the driver's seat back again.
i Check the use-by date on first-aid
kit : at least once a year. Replace the
contents if necessary, and replace any
missing items.
Flat tyres
221
Fire extinguisher
Fire extinguisher ; is located in front of
the passenger's seat.
X Pull tab : forwards.
X Remove fire extinguisher ;.
i Have fire extinguisher ; refilled
after each use and checked every one to
two years. It may otherwise fail in an
emergency.
Observe the legal requirements for each
individual country.
Vehicle tool kit
The TIREFIT kit and the towing eye are
located in the stowage well under the frontpassenger footwell.
X
X
Unscrew wing nuts :.
Remove the vehicle tool tray.
Flat tyres
Preparing the vehicle
Your vehicle may be equipped with a
TIREFIT kit (Y page 221).
Information on changing a wheel/fitting
(Y page 248).
X Stop the vehicle as far away as possible
from traffic on solid, non-slippery and
level ground.
X Switch on the hazard warning lamps.
X Secure the vehicle against rolling away
(Y page 132).
X If possible, bring the front wheels into
the straight-ahead position.
X Switch off the engine.
X Remove the key from the ignition lock.
X Make sure that the passengers are not
endangered as they get out of the vehicle.
Make sure that no one is near the danger
area while a wheel is being changed.
Anyone who is not directly assisting in
the wheel change should, for example,
stand behind the barrier.
X Get out of the vehicle. Pay attention to
traffic conditions when doing so.
>> Breakdown assistance.
: Towing eye
; Tyre sealant filler bottle
= Tyre inflation compressor
Flat tyres
222
X
X
Close the driver's door.
Place the warning triangle a suitable
distance away (Y page 220). Observe legal
requirements.
TIREFIT kit
>> Breakdown assistance.
Important safety notes
TIREFIT is a tyre sealant.
You can use TIREFIT to seal punctures of up
to 4 mm, particularly those in the tyre
tread. You can use TIREFIT at outside temperatures down to Ò20 †.
G WARNING
In the following situations, the tyre sealant is unable to provide sufficient breakdown assistance, as it is unable to seal the
tyre properly:
Rthere
are cuts or punctures in the tyre
larger than those mentioned above.
Rthe wheel rim is damaged.
Ryou have driven at very low tyre pressures
or on a flat tyre.
There is a risk of an accident.
Do not drive any further. Contact a qualified specialist workshop.
G WARNING
The tyre sealant is harmful and causes irritation. It must not come into contact with
your skin, eyes or clothing or be swallowed.
Do not inhale TIREFIT fumes. Keep tyre
sealant away from children. There is a risk
of injury.
If you come into contact with the tyre sealant, observe the following:
RRinse
off the tyre sealant from your skin
immediately with water.
RIf the tyre sealant comes into contact
with your eyes, immediately rinse them
thoroughly with clean water.
RIf tyre sealant is swallowed, immediately
rinse your mouth out thoroughly and
drink plenty of water. Do not induce vomiting, and seek medical attention immediately.
RImmediately change out of clothing
which has come into contact with tyre
sealant.
RIf an allergic reaction occurs, seek medical attention immediately.
! Do not operate the tyre inflation compressor for longer than 15 minutes at a
time without a break. It may otherwise
overheat.
The tyre inflation compressor can be
operated again once it has cooled down.
Comply with the manufacturer’s safety
instructions on the sticker on the tyre
inflation compressor.
Using the TIREFIT kit
X
Do not remove any foreign objects which
have penetrated the tyre, e.g. screws or
nails.
X Remove the tyre sealant bottle and the
tyre inflation compressor from the
front-passenger footwell (Y page 221).
X Affix the 80 km/h maximum speed sticker
to the instrument cluster within the
driver's field of vision.
Flat tyres
Unwind plug : with the cable from the
tyre inflation compressor ;.
X Remove hose A from the bottom section
of tyre inflation compressor housing ;.
X Remove cap on tyre sealant bottle ? and
connect hose A.
If a tyre pressure of 180 kPa (1.8 bar/26 psi)
has not been achieved after a maximum of
15 minutes, see "Tyre pressure is not achieved" (Y page 223).
i If the tyre sealant leaks out, allow it to
dry. It can then be removed like a layer of
film.
If you get tyre sealant on your clothing,
have it cleaned as soon as possible with
perchloroethylene.
Tyre pressure not reached
If a tyre pressure of 180 kPa (1.8 bar/26 psi)
has not been achieved after a maximum of
10 minutes:
X
X
Remove the cap from valve E on the
faulty tyre.
X Remove cap on filler hose = and screw
filler hose = onto the valve.
X Insert plug : into the socket of the cigarette lighter (Y page 203) or into the 12 V
power socket in your vehicle
(Y page 204).
X Turn the key to position 1 in the ignition
lock (Y page 115).
X Press on/off switch B on tyre inflation
compressor ; to I.
The tyre inflation compressor is
switched on. The tyre is inflated.
i First, tyre sealant is pumped into the
tyre. The pressure can briefly rise to
approximately 600 kPa (6.0 bar/86 psi).
Do not switch off the tyre inflation compressor during this phase.
X
Let the tyre inflation compressor run for
a maximum of 15 minutes. The tyre should
then have attained a pressure of at least
180 kPa (1.8 bar/26 psi).
If a tyre pressure of 180 kPa (1.8 bar/26 psi)
is achieved after a maximum of 15 minutes,
see "Tyre pressure is achieved"
(Y page 223).
Switch off the tyre inflation compressor.
Unscrew the filler hose from the valve of
the defective tyre.
X Very slowly drive forwards or reverse
approximately 10 m.
X Pump up the tyre again.
After a maximum of 10 minutes, the tyre
pressure must be at least 180 kPa (1.8 bar/
26 psi).
X
G WARNING
If the required tyre pressure is not reached
after the specified time, the tyre is too
badly damaged. The tyre sealant cannot
repair the tyre in this instance. Damaged
tyres and a tyre pressure that is too low can
significantly impair the vehicle's braking
and driving characteristics. There is a
risk of accident.
Do not continue driving. Contact a qualified specialist workshop.
Tyre pressure reached
G WARNING
A tyre temporarily sealed with tyre sealant
impairs the driving characteristics and is
not suitable for higher speeds. There is a
risk of accident.
Z
>> Breakdown assistance.
X
223
Flat tyres
224
You should therefore adapt your driving
style accordingly and drive carefully. Do
not exceed the specified maximum speed
with a tyre that has been repaired using
tyre sealant.
The maximum speed for a tyre sealed with
tyre sealant is 80 km/h. The 80 km/h maximum speed sticker must be affixed to the
instrument cluster within the driver's
field of vision.
and driving characteristics. There is a
risk of accident.
Do not continue driving. Contact a qualified specialist workshop.
X
Correct the tyre pressure if it is still at
least 130 kPa (1.3 bar/19 psi). For the values see the tyre pressure information
label on the driver's side B-pillar.
X
To increase the tyre pressure: switch on
the tyre inflation compressor.
>> Breakdown assistance.
! After use, excess tyre sealant may run
out of the filler hose. This could cause
stains.
Therefore, place the filler hose in the
plastic bag that contained the TIREFIT
kit.
H Environmental note
Have the used tyre sealant bottle disposed
of professionally, e.g. at a qualified specialist workshop.
If a tyre pressure of 180 kPa (1.8 bar/26 psi)
has been achieved after 10 minutes:
X
X
Switch off the tyre inflation compressor.
Unscrew the filler hose from the valve of
the defective tyre.
X
Stow the tyre sealant bottle, the tyre
inflation compressor and the warning
triangle.
X Pull away immediately.
X
Stop after driving for approximately
3 km and check the tyre pressure with the
tyre inflation compressor.
The tyre pressure must now be at least
130 kPa (1.3 bar/19 psi).
G WARNING
If the required tyre pressure is not reached
after driving for a short period, the tyre is
too badly damaged. The tyre sealant cannot
repair the tyre in this instance. Damaged
tyres and a tyre pressure that is too low can
significantly impair the vehicle's braking
X
To reduce the tyre pressure: depress
pressure release button : next to pressure gauge ;.
X If the tyre pressure is correct, unscrew
the filler hose from the valve of the
sealed tyre.
X Screw the valve cap onto the valve of the
sealed tyre.
X Drive to the nearest qualified specialist
workshop and have the tyre changed
there.
X Have the tyre sealant bottle and the
filler hose replaced as soon as possible
at a qualified specialist workshop.
X Have the tyre sealant bottle replaced
every four years at a qualified specialist workshop.
Battery (vehicle)
Important safety notes
Work on the battery, e.g. removing or
installing, requires specialist knowledge
and the use of special tools. Therefore,
always have work on the battery carried out
at a qualified specialist workshop.
G WARNING
Work carried out incorrectly on the battery
can lead, for example, to a short circuit and
thus damage the vehicle electronics. This
can lead to function restrictions applying
to safety-relevant systems, e.g the lighting
system, the ABS (anti-lock braking system)
or the ESP® (Electronic Stability Program).
The operating safety of your vehicle may be
restricted.
You could lose control of the vehicle, for
example:
Rwhen
braking
the event of abrupt steering manoeuvres and/or when the vehicle's speed is
not adapted to the road conditions
There is a risk of an accident.
In the event of a short circuit or a similar
incident, contact a qualified specialist
workshop immediately. Do not drive any
further. Always have work on the battery
carried out at a qualified specialist workshop.
Rin
Further information about ABS (Y page 59)
and esp® (Y page 61).
G WARNING
Electrostatic build-up can lead to the creation of sparks, which could ignite the
highly explosive gases of a battery. There
is a risk of an explosion.
Before handling the battery, touch the
vehicle body to remove any existing electrostatic build-up.
The highly flammable gas mixture is created while the battery is charging and when
jump-starting.
Always make sure that neither you nor the
battery is electrostatically charged. Electrostatic charge is created, for example:
Rby
wearing synthetic fibre clothing
to friction between clothing and the
seat
Rwhen you pull or push the battery across
carpet or other synthetic materials
Rwhen you rub the battery with a cloth
Rdue
G WARNING
During the charging process, a battery produces hydrogen gas. If a short circuit
occurs or sparks are created, the hydrogen
gas can ignite. There is a risk of an explosion.
RMake sure that the positive terminal of a
connected battery does not come into
contact with vehicle parts.
RNever place metal objects or tools on a
battery.
RIt is important that you observe the
described order of the battery terminals
when connecting and disconnecting a
battery.
RWhen jump-starting, make sure that the
battery poles with identical polarity are
connected.
RIt is particularly important to observe
the described order when connecting and
disconnecting the jump leads.
RNever connect or disconnect the battery
terminals while the engine is running.
G WARNING
Battery acid is caustic. There is a risk of
injury.
Avoid contact with the skin, eyes or clothing. Do not breathe in any battery gases. Do
not lean over the battery. Keep the batteries out of the reach of children. Immediately rinse off battery acid thoroughly with
Z
>> Breakdown assistance.
Battery (vehicle)
225
226
Battery (vehicle)
plenty of clean water and seek medical
attention at once.
>> Breakdown assistance.
H Environmental note
Batteries contain pollutants. It is illegal to dispose of them with the
household rubbish. They
must be collected separately and disposed of in an
environmentally responsible recycling system.
Dispose of batteries in an
environmentally responsible manner. Take discharged batteries to a
qualified specialist workshop or to a collection
point for used batteries.
! Have the battery checked regularly at a
qualified specialist workshop.
Observe the service intervals in the Service Booklet or contact a qualified specialist workshop for more information.
Comply with safety precautions and take
protective measures when handling batteries.
WARNING
Fire, naked flames and smoking
are prohibited when handling
the battery. Avoid creating
sparks.
Battery acid is caustic. Avoid
contact with the skin, eyes or
clothing.
Wear suitable protective clothing, in particular gloves, an
apron and a face mask.
Immediately rinse acid splashes
off with clean water. Consult a
doctor if necessary.
Wear eye protection.
Keep children away.
! You should have all work involving the
battery carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. If, in exceptional circumstances, you need to disconnect the
battery yourself, please make sure that:
Ryou have switched off the engine and
removed the key. Check to see that
there are no indicator lamps lighting
in the instrument cluster. Electronic
components such as the alternator may
otherwise be damaged.
Ryou have first removed the negative
terminal and then the positive terminal. Never mix up the terminal clamps.
The vehicle's electronics system may
otherwise be damaged.
The battery and the cover of the positive
terminal clamp must be fitted securely
during operation.
Observe this Owner's Manual.
For safety reasons, smart recommends that
you only use batteries which have been tested and approved specifically for your
vehicle by smart. These batteries provide
increased impact protection to prevent
vehicle occupants from suffering acid
burns should the battery be damaged in the
event of an accident.
In order for the battery to achieve the maximum possible service life, it must always
be sufficiently charged.
Like other batteries, the vehicle battery
may discharge over time if you do not use
the vehicle. In such cases, have the battery
disconnected at a qualified specialist
workshop. To maintain the charge, you can
Battery (vehicle)
i When you park the vehicle, remove the
key if you do not require any electrical
consumers. The vehicle will then use very
little energy, thus conserving battery
power.
Charging the battery
G WARNING
During charging and jump-starting, explosive gases can escape from the battery.
There is a risk of an explosion.
Particularly avoid fire, naked flames, creating sparks and smoking. Ensure there is
sufficient ventilation while charging and
jump-starting. Do not lean over a battery.
G WARNING
Battery acid is caustic. There is a risk of
injury.
Avoid contact with the skin, eyes or clothing. Do not breathe in any battery gases. Do
not lean over the battery. Keep the batteries out of the reach of children. Immediately rinse off battery acid thoroughly with
plenty of clean water and seek medical
attention at once.
Allow the frozen battery to thaw out before
charging it or jump-starting.
! Only use battery chargers with a maximum charging voltage of 14.8 V.
X
Open the service cover (Y page 208).
X Connect the battery charger to the positive terminal and earth point in the same
order as when connecting the donor battery in the jump-starting procedure
(Y page 228).
If the indicator/warning lamps do not light
up at low temperatures, it is very likely
that the discharged battery has frozen. In
this case you may neither jump-start the
vehicle nor charge the battery. The service
life of a battery that has been thawed may
be reduced. The starting characteristics
may be impaired, especially at low temperatures. Have the thawed battery checked
at a qualified specialist workshop.
Only charge the fitted battery with a battery charger which has been tested and
approved by smart. A battery charger specially adapted for smart vehicles, and tested and approved by smart, is available as
an accessory. It permits the charging of the
battery in its installed position. Contact a
smart centre for further information and
availability. Read the battery charger's
operating instructions before charging
the battery.
G WARNING
A discharged battery can freeze at temperatures below freezing point. When jumpstarting the vehicle or charging the battery, gases can escape from the battery.
There is a risk of an explosion.
Z
>> Breakdown assistance.
also charge the battery with a charger recommended by smart. For more information,
please contact a qualified specialist
workshop.
Have the battery charge checked more frequently if you use the vehicle mainly for
short trips or if you leave it standing idle
for a lengthy period. Consult a qualified
specialist workshop if you wish to leave
your vehicle parked up for a long period of
time.
227
228
Jump-starting
Jump-starting
G WARNING
Battery acid is caustic. There is a risk of injury.
Avoid contact with the skin, eyes or clothing. Do not breathe in any battery gases. Do not lean
over the battery. Keep the batteries out of the reach of children. Immediately rinse off
battery acid thoroughly with plenty of clean water and seek medical attention at once.
>> Breakdown assistance.
G WARNING
During charging and jump-starting, explosive gases can escape from the battery. There is a
risk of an explosion.
Particularly avoid fire, naked flames, creating sparks and smoking. Ensure there is sufficient ventilation while charging and jump-starting. Do not lean over a battery.
G WARNING
During the charging process, a battery produces hydrogen gas. If a short circuit occurs or
sparks are created, the hydrogen gas can ignite. There is a risk of an explosion.
RMake sure that the positive terminal of a connected battery does not come into contact with
vehicle parts.
RNever place metal objects or tools on a battery.
RIt is important that you observe the described order of the battery terminals when connecting and disconnecting a battery.
RWhen jump-starting, make sure that the battery poles with identical polarity are connected.
RIt is particularly important to observe the described order when connecting and disconnecting the jump leads.
RNever connect or disconnect the battery terminals while the engine is running.
G WARNING
A discharged battery can freeze at temperatures below freezing point. When jump-starting
the vehicle or charging the battery, gases can escape from the battery. There is a risk of an
explosion.
Allow the frozen battery to thaw out before charging it or jump-starting.
! Avoid repeated and lengthy starting attempts. Otherwise, the catalytic converter
could be damaged by the non-combusted fuel.
If the indicator/warning lamps do not light up at low temperatures, it is very likely that
the discharged battery has frozen. In this case you may neither jump-start the vehicle nor
charge the battery. The service life of a battery that has been thawed may be reduced. The
starting characteristics may be impaired, especially at low temperatures. Have the
thawed battery checked at a qualified specialist workshop.
Jump-starting
229
Do not use a rapid charging device to start the vehicle. If your vehicle's battery is
discharged, the engine can be jump-started from another vehicle or from a second battery
using jump leads. Observe the following points:
battery is not accessible in all vehicles. If the other vehicle's battery is not
accessible, jump-start the vehicle using a second battery or a jump-starting device.
RYou may only jump-start the vehicle when the engine and exhaust system are cold.
RDo not start the engine if the battery is frozen. Let the battery thaw first.
RJump-starting may only be performed from batteries with a nominal voltage of 12 V.
ROnly use jump leads that have a sufficient cross-section and insulated terminal
clamps.
RIf the battery is fully discharged, leave the battery that is being used to jump-start
connected for a few minutes before attempting to start. This charges the empty battery
a little.
RMake sure that the two vehicles do not touch.
Make sure that:
RThe
jump leads are not damaged.
parts of the terminal clamp do not come into contact with other metal parts while
the jump leads are connected to the battery.
RThe jump leads cannot come into contact with parts which can move when the engine is
running, such as the wiper rods or the fan.
X Secure the vehicle using the parking brake.
X Turn the key to position 0 in the ignition lock and remove it.
X Switch off all electrical consumers, e.g. rear window heating, lighting etc.
X Open the service cover.
RBare
Z
>> Breakdown assistance.
RThe
Towing and tow-starting
230
Position number A identifies the charged battery of the other vehicle or an equivalent
jump-starting device.
X
Remove the protective cover from positive terminal :.
Connect positive terminal : on your battery to positive terminal ; of donor battery
A using the jump lead. Begin with your own battery.
X Start the engine of the donor vehicle and run it at idling speed.
X Connect negative terminal = of donor battery A to negative terminal ? of your
battery using the jump lead. Connect the jump lead to donor battery A first.
X Start the engine.
X Before disconnecting the jump leads, let the engines run for several minutes.
X First disconnect the jump lead from negative terminal ? and negative terminal = and
then from positive terminal : and positive terminal ;. Begin each time at the contacts on your own vehicle first.
X Attach the protective cover to positive terminal :.
X Have the battery checked at a qualified specialist workshop.
>> Breakdown assistance.
X
i Jump-starting is not considered to be a normal operating condition.
i Jump-starting cables and further information regarding jump-starting can be
obtained at any qualified specialist workshop.
Towing and tow-starting
Important safety notes
G WARNING
Safety relevant functions are restricted or
no longer available if:
Rthe
engine is not running
brake system or power steering is
malfunctioning
Rthere is a malfunction in the voltage supply or the vehicle's electrical system
When your vehicle is towed away or towed
started, you may require considerably more
effort to steer and brake. There is a risk of
an accident.
In such cases use a rigid towing bar. Before
being towed away or tow started, make sure
the steering moves freely.
Rthe
G WARNING
If the steering wheel lock is engaged, the
vehicle can no longer be steered. There is a
risk of an accident.
Always switch on the ignition when towing
with a tow rope or a towing bar.
G WARNING
When towing or tow-starting another vehicle and its weight is greater than the permissible gross weight of your vehicle, the:
Rtowing
eye may be torn off
combination may swerve or
even overturn
There is a risk of an accident.
When towing or tow-starting another vehicle, its weight should not be greater than
the permissible gross weight of your vehicle.
Rcar/trailer
Information on your vehicle's gross vehicle weight rating can be found on the vehicle identification plate (Y page 259).
Towing and tow-starting
locked out when pushing or towing the
vehicle.
! Observe the following points when towing with a tow rope:
both vehicles.
Rmake sure that the tow rope is not longer than legally permitted. Mark the
tow rope in the middle, e.g. with a
white cloth (30 x 30 cm). This makes
other road users aware that a vehicle is
being towed.
Ronly secure the tow rope to the towing
eye.
Robserve the brake lamps of the towing
vehicle while driving. Always maintain a distance so that the tow rope
does not sag.
Rdo not use steel cables or chains to tow
your vehicle. You could otherwise damage the vehicle.
i Vehicles with the basic carrier fitted:
Do not tow away the vehicle with the basic
carrier fitted.
Do not secure the tow cable or tow bar to
the basic carrier.
Fitting/removing the towing eye
Fitting the towing eye
>> Breakdown assistance.
Rsecure the tow rope on the same side on
! Do not use the towing eyes for recovery
purposes as this could damage the vehicle. If in doubt, recover the vehicle with
a crane.
! Pull away smoothly when towing away or
tow-starting a vehicle. If the tractive
power is too high, the vehicles could be
damaged.
! You may tow the vehicle for a maximum
of 50km. A towing speed of 50 km/h must
not be exceeded.
For towing distances over 50 km, the
entire vehicle must be lifted up and
transported.
Observe the legal requirements for the relevant countries when towing and tow-starting.
It is better to have the vehicle transported
than to have it towed.
The battery must be connected and charged.
Otherwise, you cannot turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock.
231
X
Remove the towing eye from the stowage
space.
The towing eye is located in the vehicle
tool kit stowage compartment in the
front-passenger footwell (Y page 221).
X Carefully prise out cover : using a
suitable tool, e.g. a plastic wedge.
X Screw in the towing eye clockwise to the
stop and tighten it.
i Before the vehicle is towed, switch off
the automatic locking feature
(Y page 69). You could otherwise be
Z
Towing and tow-starting
232
Removing the towing eye
X
Loosen the towing eye and unscrew it.
Position top of cover : in the bumper
and press it in at the bottom until it
engages.
X Place the towing eye in the vehicle tool
kit stowage compartment in the frontpassenger footwell (Y page 221).
>> Breakdown assistance.
X
Towing the vehicle with the rear axle
raised
When towing your vehicle with the rear axle
raised, it is important that you observe the
safety instructions (Y page 230).
! The ignition must be switched off if you
are towing the vehicle with the rear axle
raised. Intervention by ESP® could otherwise damage the brake system.
X
Make sure that the vehicle is stationary.
Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition
lock.
X Depress and hold the brake pedal.
X
X
Leave the key in position 2 in the ignition lock.
X Release the brake pedal.
X Release the parking brake.
X Switch on the hazard warning lamps
(Y page 90).
It is important that you observe the safety
instructions when towing away your vehicle
(Y page 230).
Transporting the vehicle
! You may only secure the vehicle by the
wheels, not by parts of the vehicle such as
axle or steering components. Otherwise,
the vehicle could be damaged.
X
Switch on the hazard warning lamps
(Y page 90).
X Bring the front wheels into the straightahead position.
X Turn the key to position 0 in the ignition
lock and remove the key from the ignition
lock.
X When leaving the vehicle, take the key
with you.
Towing the vehicle with both axles on
the ground
X
Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition
lock.
As soon as the vehicle is loaded:
X
Prevent the vehicle from rolling away by
applying the parking brake.
X Turn the key to position 0 in the ignition
lock and remove it.
X Secure the vehicle.
The towing eye can be used to pull the vehicle onto a trailer or transporter for transporting purposes.
i In order to signal a change of direction
when towing with the hazard warning
lamps switched on, use the combination
switch as usual. In this case, only the
turn signals for the desired direction
flash. When you reset the combination
switch, the hazard warning lamps start
flashing again.
Tow-starting (emergency engine starting)
i You can find information on "Jumpstarting" at (Y page 228).
Before tow-starting the following conditions must be fulfilled:
Rthe
battery is connected.
engine has cooled down.
Rthe exhaust system has cooled down.
Rthe
Electrical fuses
Always replace faulty fuses with specified
new fuses of the correct amperage.
! Only use fuses that have been approved
for smart vehicles and which have the
correct fuse rating for the system concerned. Components or systems could
otherwise be damaged.
The fuses in your vehicle serve to disconnect faulty circuits. If a fuse blows, all the
components on the circuit and their functions will fail.
Blown fuses must be replaced with fuses of
the same rating, which you can recognise by
the colour and fuse rating. The fuse ratings
are listed in the fuse allocation chart
(Y page 235).
If the newly inserted fuse also blows, have
the cause traced and rectified at a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. a MercedesBenz Service Centre.
Before replacing a fuse
X
Secure the vehicle against rolling away
(Y page 132).
X Switch off all electrical consumers.
X Turn the key to position 0 in the ignition
lock and remove it (Y page 115). All indicator lamps in the instrument cluster
must be off.
The fuses are located in various fuse boxes:
RFuse
RFuse
box in the front area
box in the glove compartment
Electrical fuses
Important safety notes
G WARNING
If you manipulate, bridge or replace a
faulty fuse with a fuse of a higher amperage, the electric cables could be overloaded. This may result in a fire. There is a
risk of an accident and injury.
Fuse box in the front area
Pay attention to the "Important safety
notes" (Y page 233).
G WARNING
If the windscreen wipers start to move when
the service cover is open, you could become
caught up in the wiper rods. There is a risk
of injury.
Z
>> Breakdown assistance.
When tow-starting, it is important that you
observe the safety instructions
(Y page 230) and the legal requirements in
each respective country.
X Switch on the hazard warning lamps
(Y page 90).
X Fit the towing eye (Y page 231).
X Secure the rigid towing bar or the towing
rope.
X Depress and hold the brake pedal.
X Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition
lock.
X Depress the clutch pedal fully, engage
second gear and keep the clutch pedal
fully depressed.
X Release the brake pedal.
X Tow-start the vehicle.
X Release the clutch pedal slowly; do not
depress the accelerator pedal while
doing so.
X When the engine is started, immediately
depress the clutch pedal fully and select
neutral.
X Pull over at a suitable place and stop the
vehicle safely, paying attention to road
and traffic conditions.
X Secure the vehicle against rolling away
with the parking brake.
X Remove the rigid towing bar or towing
rope.
X Remove the towing eye (Y page 232).
X Switch off the hazard warning lamps.
233
Electrical fuses
234
Always switch off the windscreen wipers
and the ignition before you open the service cover.
! Make sure that no moisture can enter the
fuse box when the cover is open.
! When closing the cover, make sure that
it is lying correctly on the fuse box.
Moisture seeping in or dirt could otherwise impair the operation of the fuses.
>> Breakdown assistance.
X
X
Make sure that the windscreen wipers are
switched off.
Open the service cover (Y page 208).
You can now see fuse box :.
Fuse box in the glove compartment
Fuse box
! Do not use a pointed object such as a
screwdriver to open the cover in the
dashboard. You could damage the dashboard or the cover.
! Make sure that no moisture can enter the
fuse box when the cover is open.
! When closing the cover, make sure that
it is lying correctly on the fuse box.
Moisture seeping in or dirt could otherwise impair the operation of the fuses.
X
Open the front-passenger door.
Vehicles with lockable glove compartment: open the glove compartment.
X To open: open cover : in the direction
of the arrow.
X To close: insert and fold in cover :
until it engages.
X Vehicles with lockable glove compartment: close the glove compartment.
X
Electrical fuses
235
No.
Consumer
Current
Colour coding
1
Starter motor
5A
Brown
2
Power steering control unit
5A
Brown
3
Lighting control unit
5A
Brown
4
Airbag
5A
Brown
5
‑
‑
‑
6
Instrument cluster
10 A
Red
7
Horn, alarm system
15 A
Blue
8
Control unit power supply
10 A
Red
9
Control unit power supply
10 A
Red
10
Central control unit
20 A
Yellow
11
Turn signals
15 A
Blue
12
Central control unit
10 A
Red
13
Central control unit
15 A
Blue
14
‑
30 A
Green
15
esp®
5A
Brown
16
Interior lighting
10 A
Red
17
Immobiliser
3A
Violet
Z
>> Breakdown assistance.
Fuse allocation
>> Breakdown assistance.
236
Electrical fuses
No.
Consumer
Current
Colour coding
18
Electrical exterior mirror
5A
Brown
19
Brake lamps
10 A
Red
20
Parking aid, headlamp settings, Lane Keeping
Assist
15 A
Blue
21
Engine control unit
5A
Brown
22
Rear window wiper
15 A
Blue
23
Starter motor
30 A
Green
24
Central locking
40 A
Orange
25
Front windscreen wipers
30 A
Green
26
Radio
20 A
Yellow
27
‑
‑
‑
28
12 V socket, cigarette lighter
15 A
Blue
29
Power supply control unit
5A
Brown
30
Horn
15 A
Blue
31
‑
10 A
Red
32
Central locking
15 A
Blue
33
Tail lamps, hazard warning lamp button, locking button, headlamp range control, power windows, licence plate lighting, radio, control
panel for air-conditioning system, cruise control, limiter, parking aid button, program
selector button, tailgate unlocking, Lane Keeping Assist camera, automatic start/stop system
button
25 A
Cyan
34
Headlamps, daytime driving lamps
25 A
Cyan
35
Headlamps, daytime driving lamps
25 A
Cyan
36
‑
‑
‑
37
‑
‑
‑
38
‑
‑
‑
39
‑
‑
‑
40
‑
‑
‑
Electrical fuses
Consumer
41
‑
42
Current
Colour coding
‑
‑
‑
‑
43
Exterior mirror heating
5A
Brown
44
Anti-entrapment feature
25 A
Cyan
45
Transmission control unit
5A
Brown
46
Radio amplifier
20 A
Yellow
47
‑
‑
‑
48
‑
‑
‑
‑
‑
49
>> Breakdown assistance.
No.
237
Z
238
239
Useful information .......................... 240
Important safety notes ...................... 240
Operation ...................................... 240
Winter operation ............................. 242
Tyre pressure ................................. 243
Changing a wheel ............................. 247
>> Wheels and tyres.
Wheel and tyre combinations .............. 252
240
Operation
Useful information
i This Owner's Manual describes all models, series and optional equipment for
your vehicle that were available at the
time of going to press. Country-specific
differences are possible. Note that your
vehicle may not be fitted with all features described. This is also the case for
systems and functions relevant to safety.
i Read the information on qualified specialist workshops: (Y page 21).
>> Wheels and tyres.
Important safety notes
G WARNING
If wheels and tyres of the wrong size are
used, the wheel brakes or suspension components may be damaged. There is a risk of
an accident.
Always replace wheels and tyres with those
that fulfil the specifications of the original part.
When replacing wheels, make sure to fit the
correct:
Rdesignation
Rtype
When replacing tyres, make sure to fit the
correct:
Rdesignation
Rmanufacturer
Rtype
G Warning
A flat tyre severely impairs the driving,
steering and braking characteristics of
the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident.
Do not drive with a flat tyre. Immediately
replace the flat tyre with your spare wheel,
or consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Accessories that are not approved for your
vehicle by smart or that are not being used
correctly can impair the driving safety.
Before purchasing and using non-approved
accessories, visit a qualified specialist
workshop and enquire about:
Rsuitability
Rlegal
stipulations
recommendations
Information on dimensions and types of
wheels and tyres for your vehicle
(Y page 252).
Information on air pressure for the tyres on
your vehicle can be found:
Rfactory
Ron the tyre pressure information label on
the driver's side B-pillar
"Tyre pressure" (Y page 243)
Modification work on the brake system and
wheels is not permitted. The use of wheel
spacers or brake dust shields is not permitted. This invalidates the general operating permit for the vehicle.
Runder
i Further information on wheels and
tyres can be obtained at any qualified
specialist workshop.
Operation
Information on driving
RCheck the tyre pressures when the vehicle
is heavily laden and, if necessary, adjust
before starting your journey.
RWhile driving, pay attention to vibrations, noises and unusual handling characteristics, e.g. pulling to one side.
This may indicate that the wheels or
tyres are damaged. If you suspect that a
tyre is defective, reduce your speed
immediately. Stop the vehicle as soon as
possible to check the wheels and tyres for
damage. Hidden tyre damage could also
be causing the unusual handling characteristics. If you find no signs of damage,
have the tyres and wheels checked at a
qualified specialist workshop.
RWhen parking your vehicle, make sure
that the tyres do not get deformed by the
Operation
kerb or other obstacles. If it is necessary to drive over kerbs, speed humps or
similar elevations, try to do so slowly
and at an obtuse angle. Otherwise, the
tyres, particularly the sidewalls, may be
damaged.
241
Adjust the tyre pressure as necessary
(Y page 243).
The service life of tyres depends on various factors, including the following:
Rdriving
style
pressure
Rmileage
Rtyre
Regular checking of wheels and tyres
Regularly check the wheels and tyres of
your vehicle for damage, at least once a
month, as well as after driving on rough
roads. Damaged wheels can cause a loss of
tyre pressure. Pay particular attention to
damage such as:
Rcuts
in the tyres
in the tyres
Rtears in the tyres
Rbulges on tyres
Rdeformation or severe corrosion on
wheels
Regularly check the tyre tread depth and
the condition of the tread across the whole
width of the tyre (Y page 241). If necessary,
turn the front wheels to full lock in order to
inspect the inner side of the tyre surface.
All wheels must have a valve cap to protect
the valve against dirt and moisture. Do not
fit anything onto the valve other than the
standard valve cap or other valve caps
approved for your vehicle by smart. Do not
fit any other valve caps or systems, e.g.
tyre pressure monitoring systems.
Regularly check the pressure of all the
tyres, particularly prior to long trips.
Rpunctures
Notes on tyre profile
G WARNING
Insufficient tyre tread will reduce tyre
traction. The tyre is no longer able to dissipate water. This means that on wet road
surfaces, the risk of aquaplaning increases, in particular where speed is not adapted to suit the driving conditions. There is
a risk of accident.
If the tyre pressure is too high or too low,
tyres may exhibit different levels of wear
at different locations on the tyre tread.
Thus, you should regularly check the tread
depth and the condition of the tread across
the entire width of all tyres.
Minimum tyre tread depth for:
Rsummer
tyres: 3 mm
tyres: 4 mm
For safety reasons, replace the tyres before
the legally prescribed limit for the minimum tyre tread depth is reached.
RM+S
Selecting, fitting and replacing tyres
G WARNING
Exceeding the stated tyre load-bearing
capacity and the approved maximum speed
could lead to tyre damage or the tyre bursting. There is a risk of accident.
Therefore, only use tyre types and sizes
approved for your vehicle model. Observe
the tyre load rating and speed rating
required for your vehicle.
Z
>> Wheels and tyres.
G WARNING
Damaged tyres can cause tyre inflation
pressure loss. As a result, you could lose
control of your vehicle. There is a risk of
accident.
Check the tyres regularly for signs of damage and replace any damaged tyres immediately.
>> Wheels and tyres.
242
Winter operation
Pay special attention to the country-specific requirements for tyre approval.
These requirements can stipulate a specific tyre type for your vehicle. Furthermore, the use of certain tyre types in certain regions and areas of operation can be
highly beneficial. You can find further
information regarding tyres at specialist
tyre retailers, at qualified specialist
workshops or at any smart centre.
ROnly fit tyres and wheels of the same type
and make.
Exception: it is permissible to fit a different type or make in the event of a flat
tyre.
ROnly fit tyres of the correct size onto the
wheels.
RRun in new tyres at moderate speeds for
the first 100 km. They only reach their
full performance after this distance.
RDo not drive with tyres which have too
little tread depth. This otherwise significantly reduces the traction on wet
roads (aquaplaning).
RReplace the tyres after six years at the
latest, regardless of wear.
Winter operation
General notes
Have your vehicle winterproofed at a
qualified specialist workshop at the onset
of winter.
Observe the notes in the "Changing a
wheel" section (Y page 247).
Driving with summer tyres
At temperatures below +7 †, summer tyres
lose elasticity and therefore traction and
braking power. Change the tyres on your
vehicle to M+S tyres. Using summer tyres at
very cold temperatures could cause tears to
form, thereby damaging the tyres perma-
nently. smart cannot accept responsibility
for this type of damage.
G WARNING
Damaged tyres can cause tyre inflation
pressure loss. As a result, you could lose
control of your vehicle. There is a risk of
accident.
Check the tyres regularly for signs of damage and replace any damaged tyres immediately.
M+S tyres
G WARNING
M+S tyres with a tyre tread depth of less
than 4 mm are not suitable for use in winter
as they do not provide sufficient traction.
There is a risk of accident.
M+S tyres with a tread depth of less than
4 mm must be replaced.
At temperatures below +7 † use winter
tyres marked with M+S.
Only winter tyres bearing the i snowflake symbol in addition to the M+S marking provide the best possible grip in wintry road conditions. Only these tyres will
allow driving safety systems such as ABS
and ESP® to function optimally in winter.
These tyres have been developed specifically for driving in snow.
Use M+S tyres of the same make and tread on
all wheels to maintain safe handling characteristics.
Always observe the maximum permissible
speed specified for the M+S tyres you have
fitted. Therefore, only use tyre types and
sizes approved for smart. Observe the tyre
load rating and speed rating required for
smart.
Tyres with a specified direction of rotation have additional benefits, e.g. if there
is a risk of aquaplaning. These advantages
can only be gained if the tyres are fitted
Tyre pressure
X
Check the tyre pressures (Y page 243).
Restart the tyre pressure monitor (vehicles with black and white display)
(Y page 246).
X Restart the tyre pressure monitor (vehicles with colour display) (Y page 246).
X
contact the smart centre or a qualified
specialist workshop.
If you intend to fit snow chains, please bear
the following points in mind:
Rsnow
chains cannot be fitted to all
wheel-tyre combinations. Permissible
wheel-tyre combinations (Y page 252).
Ronly use snow chains when the road surface is completely snow-covered. Remove
the snow chains as soon as possible when
you come to a road that is not snow-covered.
Rlocal regulations may restrict the use of
snow chains. Observe the appropriate
regulations if you wish to fit snow
chains.
Rdo not exceed the maximum permissible
speed of 50 km/h.
Tyre pressure
Tyre pressure specifications
G WARNING
Snow chains
G WARNING
If you have fitted snow chains to the front
wheels, they may scrape against the vehicle
body or chassis components. This could
cause damage to the vehicle or the tyres.
There is a risk of an accident.
To avoid hazardous situations:
Rnever fit snow chains on the front wheels
Rfit
snow chains to the rear wheels in
pairs.
! Vehicles with steel wheels: if you fit
snow chains on steel wheels, you may
damage the hub caps. Remove the hub caps
from the relevant wheels before fitting
the snow chains.
smart recommends that you only use snow
chains that have been specially approved
for smart. For more information, please
Underinflated or overinflated tyres pose
the following risks:
Rthe
tyres may burst, especially as the
load and vehicle speed increase.
Rthe tyres may wear excessively and/or
unevenly, which may greatly impair tyre
traction.
Rthe driving characteristics, as well as
steering and braking, may be greatly
impaired.
There is a risk of an accident.
Observe the recommended tyre pressure and
check the tyre pressure of all the tyres:
Rat
least every two weeks
the load changes
Rbefore embarking on a longer journey
Rfor changed operating conditions, e.g.
off-road driving
If necessary, correct the tyre pressure.
Rwhen
Z
>> Wheels and tyres.
corresponding to the direction of rotation.
An arrow on the sidewall of the tyre indicates its correct direction of rotation.
If you fit M+S tyres that have a lower maximum permissible speed than that of the
vehicle, affix an appropriate warning sign
in the driver's field of vision. This can be
obtained at a qualified specialist workshop.
Under these circumstances, you should also
use the speed limiter to restrict the maximum speed of the vehicle so that it does
not exceed the maximum permissible speed
for the M+S tyres (Y page 141).
When you have fitted the M+S tyres:
243
244
Tyre pressure
>> Wheels and tyres.
G WARNING
If you mount unsuitable accessories onto
tyre valves, the tyre valves may be overloaded and malfunction, which can cause tyre
pressure loss. Aftermarket tyre pressure
monitoring systems will cause the tyre
valve to remain open. This can also result
in tyre pressure loss. There is a risk of an
accident.
Only screw standard valve caps or valve
caps specifically approved by smart for
your vehicle onto the tyre valve.
G WARNING
If the tyre pressure drops repeatedly, the
wheel, valve or tyre may be damaged. Tyre
pressure that is too low may result in a tyre
blow-out. There is a risk of accident.
RCheck the tyre for foreign objects.
RCheck whether the wheel is losing air or
the valve is leaking.
If you are unable to rectify the damage,
contact a qualified specialist workshop.
H Environmental note
Check the tyre pressure regularly, at least
every 14 days.
You will find a table with the recommended
tyre pressure on the tyre pressure information label on the driver's side B-pillar.
The tyre pressure information label may
also state tyre pressures for different load
conditions. These are defined in the table
as different numbers of passengers and
amounts of luggage. The actual number of
seats may vary; for more information,
please refer to the vehicle's registration
documents.
If tyre sizes are not specified, the tyre
pressures stated on the tyre pressure
information label apply for all tyres
approved for this vehicle.
If a tyre size precedes a tyre pressure, the
following tyre pressure information is
only valid for that tyre size.
Use a suitable pressure gauge to check the
tyre pressure. The outer appearance of a
tyre does not permit any reliable conclusion about the tyre pressure.
If possible, only correct tyre pressures
when the tyres are cold.
The tyres are cold:
Rif
the vehicle has been parked with the
tyres out of direct sunlight for at least
three hours and
Rif the vehicle has not been driven further
than 2 km
Depending on the ambient temperature, the
speed at which you are driving and the load
on the tyres, the tyre temperature and thus
the tyre pressure change by approximately:
10 kPa per 10 † (0.1 bar/1.5 psi). Take this
into account when checking the pressure of
warm tyres. Only correct the tyre pressure
if it is too low for the current operating
conditions.
Driving with tyre pressure that is too high
or too low can:
Rshorten
the service life of the tyres
increased tyre damage
Rhave a negative effect on handling characteristics and thus the driving safety
(e.g. aquaplaning)
Rcause
Tyre pressure
General notes
If a tyre pressure monitor system is fitted,
the vehicle's wheels have sensors fitted
that monitor the tyre pressures in all four
tyres. The tyre pressure monitor warns you
if the pressure drops in one or more of the
tyres. The tyre pressure monitor only functions if the corresponding sensors are fitted to all wheels.
Important safety notes
It is the driver's responsibility to set the
tyre pressure to the recommended cold tyre
pressure suitable for the operating situation (Y page 243). Note that the correct tyre
pressure for the current operating situation must first be taught-in to the tyre
pressure monitor. If there is a substantial
loss of pressure, the warning threshold for
the warning message is aligned to the reference values taught-in. Restart the tyre
pressure monitor after adjusting to the
cold tyre pressure. The current pressures
are saved as new reference values. This
will ensure that a warning message will
only appear if the tyre pressure drops significantly.
The tyre pressure monitor does not warn you
of an incorrectly set tyre pressure.
Observe the notes on the recommended tyre
pressure (Y page 243).
The tyre pressure monitor is not able to
warn you of a sudden loss of pressure, e.g.
if the tyre is penetrated by a foreign
object. In the event of a sudden loss of
pressure, bring the vehicle to a halt by
braking carefully. Avoid abrupt steering
manoeuvres.
The tyre pressure monitor has a yellow
warning lamp in the instrument cluster for
indicating a pressure loss or malfunction.
Depending on how the warning lamp flashes
or lights up, a tyre pressure that is too low
or a malfunction in the tyre pressure monitor is indicated:
Rif
the warning lamp is lit continuously,
the tyre pressure on one or more tyres is
significantly too low. The tyre pressure
monitor is not malfunctioning.
Rif the warning lamp flashes for around a
minute and then remains lit constantly,
the tyre pressure monitor is malfunctioning.
i On-board computer with colour display: In addition to the warning lamp, a
message appears in the display.
Observe the information on display messages (Y page 178).
If the tyre pressure monitor is malfunctioning, it may take up to ten minutes for
the tyre pressure warning lamp to inform
you of the malfunction. The malfunction
will be indicated first by the tyre pressure
warning lamp flashing for approximately
one minute and then remaining lit. When
the fault has been rectified, the tyre pressure warning lamp goes out after you have
driven for a few minutes.
The operation of the tyre pressure monitor
can be affected by interference from radio
transmitting equipment (e.g. cordless
headphones, two-way radios) that may be
being operated in or near the vehicle.
Tyre pressure monitor warning (onboard computer with monochrome display)
If the tyre pressure monitor detects a pressure loss in one or more tyres, the yellow
warning light in the tyre pressure monitor
lights up. If the tyre pressure in one or
more tyres suddenly sinks, a warning tone
also sounds.
Z
>> Wheels and tyres.
Tyre pressure monitor
245
246
Tyre pressure
Observe the instructions and safety notes
for the indicator and warning lamps in the
instrument cluster in the "Tyres" section
(Y page 192).
wheels is correctly set for the operating
conditions.
Also observe the notes in the section on
tyre pressures (Y page 243).
Tyre pressure monitor warning messages
(on-board computer with colour display)
On-board computer with a monochrome display
X To restart the tyre pressure monitor:
press the ´ button on the multifunction lever repeatedly until the
° h symbols are displayed.
X Press and hold the a button on the
multifunction lever.
The ° h symbols flash for about 5
seconds. The symbols then both remain
lit.
The tyre pressure monitor is restarted.
If the tyre pressure monitor detects a pressure loss in one or more tyres, a warning
message is shown in the display. The yellow
warning light in the tyre pressure monitor
lights up. For certain display messages a
warning tone also sounds.
the Correct tyre pressure message
appears in the display, the tyre pressure
in at least one tyre is too low. Correct the
tyre pressure at the next opportunity.
RIf the Tyre pressure Caution tyre
malfunction message appears in the
display, the tyre pressure in one or more
tyres has dropped suddenly and the tyres
must be checked.
Observe the instructions and safety notes
for the display messages in the "Tyres"
section (Y page 178) and the indicator and
warning lamps in the instrument cluster in
the "Tyres" section (Y page 192).
>> Wheels and tyres.
RIf
Restarting the tyre pressure monitor
When you restart the tyre pressure monitor,
all existing warning messages are deleted
and the warning lamps go out. The monitor
uses the currently set tyre pressures as the
reference values for monitoring. In most
cases, the tyre pressure monitor will automatically detect the new reference values
after you have changed the tyre pressure.
However, you can also define reference values manually as described here. The tyre
pressure monitor then monitors the new
tyre pressure values.
X Using the tyre pressure information
label on the driver's side B-pillar,
ensure that the tyre pressure of all four
On-board computer with a colour display
X To restart the tyre pressure monitor:
press the 9 or : button on the
steering wheel to select the Settings
menu and press a on the steering
wheel to confirm.
X Press the 9 or : button to select
the Tyre pressure monitor submenu
and confirm with a.
The Tyre pressure monitor Adopt
current pressures as new reference
values? message appears in the display.
If you wish to confirm the restart:
X
Press the 9 or : button to select
yes and press the a button to confirm.
The Tyre pressure monitor restarted
message appears in the display.
X Press a to confirm.
After a short while, the message is also
hidden without pressing the a button.
After you have driven for a few minutes,
the system checks whether the current
tyre pressures are within the specified
range. The new tyre pressures are then
accepted as reference values and monitored.
i If the Tyre pressure monitor
restarted message does not appear after
approximately 5 seconds, the restart was
not successful. If this occurs, repeat the
restart.
If you wish to cancel the restart:
X
Country
Radio type approval number
Jordan
Model: Gen Alpha Wal 2 TPMS
transmitter
Type Approval Number:
TRC/LPD/2012/114
Model: Gen Gamma Gen
4 433.92 MHz.
Type Approval Number:
TRC/LPD/2012/190
Model: Corax 3 MRXMC34MA4
Type Approval Number:
TRC/LPD/2011/158
Type Number: LPD
Press the 9 or : button to select
no and press the a button to confirm.
The tyre pressure values stored at the
last restart will continue to be monitored.
Radio type approval for the tyre pressure
monitor
Country
Radio type approval number
Morocco
Argentina
MW2433A
H-12337
GG4
H-12338
MR7319 ANRT 2012/ 11/07/2012
MR7672 ANRT 2012/ 23/11/2012
MR6706 ANRT 2011
Moldova
1024
Philippines
No: ESD-1206394C
No: ESD-1306871C
Serbia
И 011 12
Singapore
Compliance with IDA Standard DA- 103365
South
Africa
TA-2012/719
TA-2012/1540
TA-2011/1370
Brazil
Abu
Dhabi
Dubai
2770-12-8001
Model: MW2433A
0381-13-8001
Model: GG4
TRA, Registered-NO
ER0092100/12
TRA, Registered-NO
ER0099792/12
TRA, Registered-NO
ER0076990/11
Dealer-NO: DA0047074/10
Changing a wheel
Flat tyres
You can find information on what to do in
the event of flat tyre in the "Flat tyre" section (Y page 221).
Interchanging the wheels
G WARNING
Never interchange the front and rear wheels
as they have different dimensions, e.g.
size, offset etc. Otherwise, there could be a
Z
247
>> Wheels and tyres.
Changing a wheel
248
Changing a wheel
negative effect on the road holding and you
could endanger yourself or others.
! On vehicles fitted with a tyre pressure
>> Wheels and tyres.
monitor, electronic components are
located in the wheel.
Tyre-fitting tools should not be applied
in the area of the valve, as this could
damage the electronic components.
Only have tyres changed at a qualified
specialist workshop.
Various types of steel wheel can be fitted
on your vehicle. Some steel wheels have a
red mark in the hub cap area. The hub cap
has to be removed to see the red mark, see
"Raising the vehicle" in the "Wheel
change" section (Y page 249). When changing the wheels, always fit wheels of the
same type on all axles.
Interchanging the front and rear wheels of
differing dimensions can render the general operating permit invalid.
Always pay attention to the instructions
and safety notes when changing a wheel
(Y page 247).
The wear patterns on the front and rear
tyres differ, depending on the operating
conditions. Front tyres typically wear
more on the shoulders and the rear tyres in
the centre.
Clean the contact surfaces of the wheel and
the brake disc thoroughly every time a
wheel is interchanged. Check the tyre
pressure and reactivate the tyre pressure
monitor if necessary.
Direction of rotation
Tyres with a specified direction of rotation have additional benefits, e.g. if there
is a risk of aquaplaning. These advantages
can only be gained if the direction of rotation is observed during fitting.
An arrow on the sidewall of the tyre indicates its correct direction of rotation.
Storing wheels
Store wheels in a cool, dry and preferably
dark place if they are not being used. Protect the tyres against oil, grease, petrol
and diesel.
Fitting a wheel
Preparing the vehicle
X
Make sure that you have the appropriate
tyre-changing tools. For further information enquire at any smart centre.
i Necessary tyre-changing tools can
include, for example:
Rjack
Rwheel
Rwheel
chock
wrench
X
Stop the vehicle on solid, non-slippery
and level ground.
X Apply the parking brake (Y page 133).
X Bring the front wheels into the straightahead position.
X Depress the clutch pedal fully and engage
first or reverse gear.
X Switch off the engine.
X Remove the key from the ignition lock.
X
Also secure the vehicle against rolling
away.
Securing the vehicle against rolling
away
Changing a wheel
On level ground: place chocks or other
suitable items under the front and rear of
the wheel that is diagonally opposite the
wheel you wish to change.
X
On light downhill gradients: place
chocks or other suitable items in front of
the wheels of the front and rear axle.
Raising the vehicle
G WARNING
If you do not position the jack correctly at
the appropriate jacking point of the vehicle, the jack could tip over with the vehicle
raised. There is a risk of injury.
Only position the jack at the appropriate
jacking point of the vehicle. The base of the
jack must be positioned vertically,
directly under the jacking point of the
vehicle.
Ravoid
changing the wheel on uphill and
downhill slopes.
Rbefore raising the vehicle, secure it
from rolling away by applying the parking brake and inserting wheel chocks.
Never disengage the parking brake while
the vehicle is raised.
Rthe jack must be placed on a firm, flat and
non-slip surface. On a loose surface, a
large, flat load-bearing underlay must
be used. On a slippery surface, a nonslip underlay must be used, e.g. rubber
mats.
Rdo not use wooden blocks or similar
objects as a jack underlay. Otherwise,
the jack will not be able to achieve its
load-bearing capacity due to the
restricted height.
Rmake sure that the distance between the
underside of the tyres and the ground
does not exceed 3 cm.
Rnever place your hands or feet under the
raised vehicle.
Rdo not lie under the vehicle.
Rdo not start the engine when the vehicle
is raised.
Rdo not open or close a door or the tailgate
while the vehicle is raised.
Rmake sure that no persons are present in
the vehicle when the vehicle is raised.
Observe the following when raising the
vehicle:
Rmake
sure you have a suitable jack and
wheel wrench. If the jack is used incorrectly, it could tip over while the vehicle is raised.
For further information enquire at any
smart centre.
Rthe jack is designed only to raise and
hold the vehicle for a short time while a
wheel is being changed. It is not suited
for performing maintenance work under
the vehicle.
Steel wheel with wheel trim
X
Vehicles with steel wheels and hub caps:
carefully reach into two of the hub cap
openings and remove the hub cap.
Z
>> Wheels and tyres.
X
249
Changing a wheel
250
identify the jacking points by the triangular indentations on the sill.
To avoid damage, position the jack centrally under the triangular indentations.
Steel wheel with hub cap
X
Vehicles with steel wheels and hub caps:
remove the hub cap.
>> Wheels and tyres.
X
X
Position jack ; centrally under the triangular indentations at jacking points
on the sill :.
Using wheel wrench :, loosen the bolts
on the wheel you wish to change by about
one full turn. Do not unscrew the bolts
completely.
Example
X
Make sure that the base of the jack is
positioned vertically under the jacking
point.
X
Raise the vehicle with jack ; until the
tyre is at most 3 cm off the ground.
Removing a wheel
! Do not place wheel bolts in sand or dirt.
The vehicle may only be raised at the designated jacking points on the sill.
The jacking points are located just behind
the front wheel arches and just in front of
the rear wheel arches (arrows). You can
The threads of the wheel bolts and wheel
hubs could otherwise be damaged when
the bolts are tightened.
X
Unscrew the wheel bolts.
X
Remove the wheel.
Changing a wheel
G WARNING
Oiled or greased wheel bolts or damaged
wheel bolts/hub threads can cause the wheel
bolts to come loose. As a result, you could
lose a wheel while driving. There is a risk
of accident.
Never oil or grease wheel bolts. In the event
of damage to the threads, contact a qualified specialist workshop immediately.
Have the damaged wheel bolts or hub threads
replaced/renewed. Do not continue driving.
X
Tighten the wheel bolts until they are
finger-tight.
Lowering the vehicle
G WARNING
The wheels could work loose if the wheel
nuts and bolts are not tightened to the
specified tightening torque. There is a
risk of accident.
Have the tightening torque immediately
checked at a qualified specialist workshop
after a wheel is changed.
G WARNING
If you tighten the wheel bolts or wheel nuts
when the vehicle is raised, the jack could
tip over. There is a risk of injury.
Only tighten the wheel bolts or wheel nuts
when the vehicle is on the ground.
Always pay attention to the instructions
and safety notices in "Changing a wheel"
(Y page 247).
Only use wheel bolts that are designed for
the wheel and the vehicle. For safety reasons, smart recommends that you only use
wheel bolts which have been approved for
smart vehicles and the respective wheel.
X
Lower the vehicle until it is once again
standing firmly on the ground.
X Place the jack to one side.
X
Tighten the wheel bolts evenly in a
crosswise pattern in the sequence indicated (: to ?). The tightening torque
must be 105 Nm.
X
Check the air pressure of the newly fitted
wheel and adjust accordingly.
Observe the recommended tyre pressure
(Y page 243).
i Vehicles with tyre pressure control
system: all fitted wheels must be equipped with functioning sensors.
X
Clean the wheel and wheel hub contact
surfaces.
X Place the new wheel on the wheel hub and
push it on.
Z
>> Wheels and tyres.
Fitting a new wheel
251
Wheel and tyre combinations
252
smart accepts no liability for damage
resulting from the use of tyres or wheels
other than those tested and approved.
Information on wheels and tyres can be
obtained at a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. a smart centre.
! Retreaded tyres have not been tested by
Steel wheel with wheel trim
>> Wheels and tyres.
X
Vehicles with steel wheels and hub caps:
fit hub cap A so that tyre valve B is not
trapped.
X Press the hub cap A evenly onto the
wheel with both hands.
X Check to make sure the hub cap A is
seated safely on the wheel.
X Vehicles with steel wheels and hub caps:
fit the hub cap.
Wheel and tyre combinations
General notes
! For safety reasons, smart recommends
that you only use tyres and wheels which
have been specifically approved by
smart for your vehicle. These are specially adapted to the control systems,
such as ABS or ESP®.
Only use tyres and wheels specifically
tested and approved by smart. Certain
characteristics, e.g. handling, vehicle
noise emissions or fuel consumption,
may otherwise be adversely affected. In
addition, when driving with a load,
dimensional variations and different
tyre deformation characteristics could
cause the tyres to make contact with the
bodywork and axle components. This
could result in damage to the tyres or the
vehicle.
smart and the fitment of such tyres is not
recommended. Previous damage sustained by the tyres (before the retreading process) cannot always be recognised. As a result, smart cannot guarantee vehicle safety if retreaded tyres are
fitted.
! Large wheels: the lower the section
width for a certain wheel size, the lower
the ride comfort is on poor road surfaces. Roll comfort and suspension comfort
are reduced and the risk of damage to the
wheels and tyres as a result of driving
over obstacles increases.
Overview of abbreviations used in the following tyre tables:
RBA:
both axles
front axle
RRA: rear axle
You will find a table with the recommended
tyre pressures on the tyre pressure information label on the driver's side B-pillar.
For further information on tyre pressure,
see (Y page 243). Check tyre pressures regularly and only when the tyres are cold.
Notes on the vehicle equipment – always fit
the vehicle:
RFA:
Rwith tyres of the same size on a given axle
(left/right)
the same type of tyres on all wheels
at a given time (summer tyres, winter
tyres)
Exception: it is permissible to fit a different type or make in the event of a flat
tyre.
Rwith
i Not all wheel/tyre combinations can be
fitted at the factory in all countries.
Wheel and tyre combinations
253
Tyres
smart fortwo coupé 45 kW
Tyres
Wheels
FA: 165/65 R15 81 T5
RA: 185/60 R15 84 T
Steel wheels:
FA: 5.0 J x 15 H2 ET 32
RA: 5.5 J x 15 H2 ET 42
Light-alloy wheels:
FA: 5.0 J x 15 CH ET 32
RA: 5.5 J x 15 CH ET 42
FA: 165/65 R15 81 H5
RA: 185/60 R15 84 H
Steel wheels:
FA: 5.0 J x 15 H2 ET 32
RA: 5.5 J x 15 H2 ET 42
Light-alloy wheels:
FA: 5.0 J x 15 CH ET 32
RA: 5.5 J x 15 CH ET 42
>> Wheels and tyres.
Summer tyres
R 15
R 16
Tyres
Wheels
FA: 185/50 R16 81 H5
RA: 205/45 R16 83 H5
Light-alloy wheels:
FA: 6.0 J x 16 CH ET 44
RA: 6.5 J x 16 CH ET 40
Winter tyres
R 15
5
Tyres
Wheels
FA: 165/65 R15 81 T M+Si5
RA: 185/60 R15 84 T M+Si
Steel wheels:
FA: 5.0 J x 15 H2 ET 32
RA: 5.5 J x 15 H2 ET 42
Light-alloy wheels:
FA: 5.0 J x 15 CH ET 32
RA: 5.5 J x 15 CH ET 42
Use of snow chains not permitted. Observe the notes in the section “Snow chains”.
Z
Wheel and tyre combinations
254
smart fortwo coupé 52 kW
>> Wheels and tyres.
Summer tyres
R 15
Tyres
Wheels
FA: 165/65 R15 81 T5
RA: 185/60 R15 84 T
Steel wheels:
FA: 5.0 J x 15 H2 ET 32
RA: 5.5 J x 15 H2 ET 42
Light-alloy wheels:
FA: 5.0 J x 15 CH ET 32
RA: 5.5 J x 15 CH ET 42
FA: 165/65 R15 81 H5
RA: 185/60 R15 84 H
Steel wheels:
FA: 5.0 J x 15 H2 ET 32
RA: 5.5 J x 15 H2 ET 42
Light-alloy wheels:
FA: 5.0 J x 15 CH ET 32
RA: 5.5 J x 15 CH ET 42
R 16
Tyres
Wheels
FA: 185/50 R16 81 H5
RA: 205/45 R16 83 H5
Light-alloy wheels:
FA: 6.0 J x 16 CH ET 44
RA: 6.5 J x 16 CH ET 40
Winter tyres
R 15
5
Tyres
Wheels
FA: 165/65 R15 81 T M+Si5
RA: 185/60 R15 84 T M+Si
Steel wheels:
FA: 5.0 J x 15 H2 ET 32
RA: 5.5 J x 15 H2 ET 42
Light-alloy wheels:
FA: 5.0 J x 15 CH ET 32
RA: 5.5 J x 15 CH ET 42
Use of snow chains not permitted. Observe the notes in the section “Snow chains”.
Wheel and tyre combinations
255
smart fortwo coupé 66 kW Turbo
Tyres
Wheels
FA: 165/65 R15 81 T5
RA: 185/60 R15 84 T
Steel wheels:
FA: 5.0 J x 15 H2 ET 32
RA: 5.5 J x 15 H2 ET 42
Light-alloy wheels:
FA: 5.0 J x 15 CH ET 32
RA: 5.5 J x 15 CH ET 42
FA: 165/65 R15 81 H5
RA: 185/60 R15 84 H
Steel wheels:
FA: 5.0 J x 15 H2 ET 32
RA: 5.5 J x 15 H2 ET 42
Light-alloy wheels:
FA: 5.0 J x 15 CH ET 32
RA: 5.5 J x 15 CH ET 42
>> Wheels and tyres.
Summer tyres
R 15
R 16
Tyres
Wheels
FA: 185/50 R16 81 H5
RA: 205/45 R16 83 H5
Light-alloy wheels:
FA: 6.0 J x 16 CH ET 44
RA: 6.5 J x 16 CH ET 40
Winter tyres
R 15
5
Tyres
Wheels
FA: 165/65 R15 81 T M+Si5
RA: 185/60 R15 84 T M+Si
Steel wheels:
FA: 5.0 J x 15 H2 ET 32
RA: 5.5 J x 15 H2 ET 42
Light-alloy wheels:
FA: 5.0 J x 15 CH ET 32
RA: 5.5 J x 15 CH ET 42
Use of snow chains not permitted. Observe the notes in the section “Snow chains”.
Z
256
257
Useful information .......................... 258
Information on technical data ............ 258
Vehicle electronics ......................... 258
Identification plates ....................... 259
Service products and capacities ......... 260
>> Technical data.
Vehicle data ................................... 265
258
Vehicle electronics
Useful information
i This Owner's Manual describes all models, series and optional equipment for
your vehicle that were available at the
time of going to press. Country-specific
differences are possible. Note that your
vehicle may not be fitted with all features described. This is also the case for
systems and functions relevant to safety.
i Read the information on qualified specialist workshops: (Y page 21).
Information on technical data
General notes
>> Technical data.
You can find current technical data on the
Internet on our smart homepage.
i The technical data was determined in
accordance with EC Directives. All data
applies to the vehicle's standard equipment. The data may therefore differ for
vehicles with optional equipment. For
further information enquire at any smart
centre.
Vehicle electronics
Tampering with the engine electronics
! Only have work carried out on the
engine electronics and its associated
parts, such as control units, sensors,
actuating components and connector
leads, at a qualified specialist workshop. Vehicle components may otherwise
wear more quickly and the vehicle's
operating permit may be invalidated.
Retrofitting two-way radios and
mobile phones (RF transmitters)
G WARNING
If RF transmitters are tampered with or not
properly retrofitted, the electromagnetic
radiation they emit can interfere with the
vehicle electronics. This may jeopardise
the operational safety of the vehicle. There
is a risk of an accident.
You should have all work on electrical and
electronic components carried out at a
qualified specialist workshop.
G WARNING
If you operate RF transmitters incorrectly
in the vehicle, the electromagnetic radiation could interfere with the vehicle electronics, e.g.:
Rif
the RF transmitter is not connected to
an exterior aerial
Rthe exterior aerial has been fitted
incorrectly or is not a low-reflection
type
This could jeopardise the operating safety
of the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident.
Have the low-reflection exterior aerial
fitted at a qualified specialist workshop.
When operating RF transmitters in the
vehicle, always connect them to the lowreflection exterior aerial.
! The operating permit may be invalidated if the instructions for installation
and use of RF transmitters are not
observed.
In particular, the following conditions
must be complied with:
Ronly
approved wavebands may be used.
Robserve the maximum permissible out-
put in these wavebands.
approved aerial positions may be
used.
Ronly
Identification plates
Excessive levels of electromagnetic radiation may cause damage to your health and
to the health of others. The use of an exterior aerial takes into consideration the
scientific discussion surrounding the
possible health risk posed by electromagnetic fields.
The following aerial positions may be used
if RF transmitters have been properly
installed:
259
The maximum transmission output (PEAK) at
the base of the aerial must not exceed the
following values:
Waveband
Maximum
transmission
output
Tetra
380 - 410 MHz
20 W
Mobile communications generation
2G/3G/4G
6W
The following can be used in the vehicle
without restrictions:
Approved aerial positions
: Front roof area
transmitters with a maximum transmission output of up to 100 mW
RMobile phones (2G/3G/4G)
There are no restrictions when positioning
the aerial on the outside of the vehicle for
the following wavebands:
; Rear roof area
RTetra
Use Technical Specification ISO/TS 21609
(Road Vehicles – "EMC guidelines for fitting aftermarket radio frequency transmitting equipment") when retrofitting RF
(radio frequency) transmitters. Comply
with the legal requirements for add-on
parts.
If your vehicle has fittings for two-way
radio equipment, use the power supply or
aerial connections intended for use with
the basic wiring. Be sure to observe the
manufacturer's additional instructions
when installing.
Deviations with respect to wavebands,
maximum transmission outputs or aerial
positions must be approved by MercedesBenz.
RMobile
communications (2G/3G/4G)
Identification plates
Vehicle identification plate with
vehicle identification number (VIN)
X
Open the front-passenger door.
You will see vehicle identification
plate :.
Z
>> Technical data.
RRF
260
Service products and capacities
X
Slide the right-hand front seat to its
rearmost position.
X Fold up floor covering : in front of the
right-hand front seat.
You will see VIN ;.
The VIN can also be found on the vehicle
identification plate (Y page 259).
Engine number
Example: vehicle identification plate
: Vehicle identification plate
; Paint code
= Vehicle manufacturer
? EU type approval number
A Vehicle identification number (VIN)
B Maximum permissible gross vehicle
>> Technical data.
weight
C Maximum permissible front axle load
D Maximum permissible rear axle load
i The data shown on the vehicle identification plate is example data. This data
is different for every vehicle and can
deviate from the data shown here. You can
find the data applicable to your vehicle
on the vehicle's identification plate.
Vehicle identification number (VIN)
The engine number is stamped onto the
crankcase. You can obtain further information from any qualified specialist
workshop.
Service products and capacities
Important safety notes
G WARNING
Service product can be poisonous and hazardous to health. There is a risk of injury.
Observe the instructions on the respective
original container when using, storing and
disposing off service products. Always
store service products in the sealed original container. Always keep service products out of the reach of children.
H Environmental note
Dispose of service products in an environmentally-responsible manner.
Service products include the following:
RFuels
RLubricants
(e.g. engine oil, transmission oil)
RCoolant
RBrake fluid
RWindscreen washer fluid
RClimate control system refrigerant
Components and service products must be
matched. smart recommends that you use
products tested and approved by smart.
Service products and capacities
They are listed in this smart Owner's Manual in the appropriate section.
You can identify service products approved
by Mercedes-Benz by the following
inscriptions on the container:
(e.g. MB-Freigabe 229.51)
Approval (e.g. MB Approval 229.51)
Other designations or recommendations
indicate a level of quality or a specification in accordance with an MB Sheet Number
(e.g. MB 229.5). They have not necessarily
been approved by Mercedes-Benz.
261
RIf
fuel is swallowed, seek immediate
medical attention. Do not induce vomiting.
RChange any clothing that has come into
contact with fuel immediately.
RMB-Freigabe
RMB
Tank capacity
Model
All models
i For further information enquire at any
Total capacity
28.0 l
or
34.0 l
smart centre.
Important safety notes
All models
G WARNING
Fuel is highly flammable. If you handle fuel
incorrectly, there is a risk of fire and
explosion.
You must avoid fire, naked flames, creating
sparks and smoking. Switch off the engine
and, if applicable, the auxiliary heating
before refuelling.
G WARNING
Fuels are poisonous and hazardous to
health. There is a danger of injury.
Do not swallow fuel or let it come into contact with skin, eyes or clothing. Do not
inhale fuel vapours. Keep fuels out of the
reach of children.
If you or others come into contact with fuel,
observe the following:
RWash
the fuel off any affected areas of
skin with water and soap immediately.
RIf you get fuel in your eyes, rinse them
thoroughly with clean water immediately. Seek immediate medical attention.
Of which
reserve fuel
Approx.
5.0 l
Petrol
Fuel grade
! Do not use diesel to refuel vehicles
with a petrol engine. Do not switch on the
ignition if you accidentally refuel with
the wrong fuel. Otherwise, the fuel will
enter the fuel system. Even small amounts
of the wrong fuel can result in damage to
the fuel system and the engine. Notify a
qualified specialist workshop and have
the fuel tank and fuel lines drained completely.
! Only refuel using premium-grade
unleaded petrol with at least 95 ROZ/
85 MOZ, that conforms to European standard EN 228 or E DIN 51626–1 or an equivalent specification.
Fuel of this specification can contain up
to 10 % ethanol.
Fuel that does not conform to EN 228 or
E DIN 51626–1 can lead to increased wear
and damage the engine and exhaust system.
Z
>> Technical data.
Model
Fuel
262
Service products and capacities
! Only use the fuel recommended. Operating the vehicle with other fuels can
lead to engine failure.
! Do not use the following:
>> Technical data.
RE85
(petrol with 85% ethanol)
RE100 (100% ethanol)
RM15 (petrol with 15% methanol)
RM30 (petrol with 30% methanol)
RM85 (petrol with 85% methanol)
RM100 (100% methanol)
Rpetrol with additives containing
metal
RDiesel
Do not mix such fuels with the fuel recommended for your vehicle. Do not use
additives. Engine failure may otherwise
occur. This does not include cleaning
additives for the removal and prevention
of residue build-up. Petrol must only be
mixed with cleaning additives recommended by smart, see "Additives". For
further information enquire at any smart
centre.
Usually you will find information about the
fuel grade on the pump. If you cannot find
the label on the petrol pump, ask the filling
station staff.
i E10 fuel contains up to 10% bioethanol.
Your vehicle is suitable for use with E10
fuel. You can refuel your vehicle using
E10 fuel.
As a temporary measure, if the recommended fuel is not available, you may also use
unleaded petrol with an octane rating of
91 RON/82 MON. This may reduce engine
performance and increase fuel consumption. Avoid driving at full throttle and
sudden acceleration. Never refuel using
fuel with a lower RON/MON.
i In some countries, the available petrol
may not be sufficiently low in sulphur.
This fuel can temporarily produce
unpleasant odours, especially on short
journeys. As soon as sulphur-free fuel
(sulphur content < 10 ppm) is used for
refuelling, the odours are reduced.
Information on refuelling (Y page 130).
Additives
! Operation of the engine with fuel additives added later can cause engine damage. Therefore, do not mix any fuel additives with the fuel. This does not include
additives for the removal and prevention
of residue build-up. Petrol must only be
mixed with additives recommended by
smart. Observe the instructions for use
in the product description. For further
information on recommended additives
enquire at any smart centre.
smart recommends that you use fuel brands
that have additives.
The quality of the fuel available in some
countries may not be sufficient. Residue
could build up in the injection system as a
result. In this case, in consultation with a
smart centre, the petrol may be mixed with
the cleaning additive recommended by
smart. You must observe the notes and mixing ratios specified on the container.
Fuel consumption information
H Environmental note
CO2 (carbon dioxide) is the gas which scientists believe to be principally responsible for global warming (the greenhouse
effect). Your vehicle's CO2 emissions are
directly related to fuel consumption and
therefore depend on:
Refficient use of the fuel by the engine
Rdriving style
Rother non-technical factors, such as
environmental influences, road conditions or traffic flow
You can minimise your vehicle's CO2 emissions by driving carefully and having it
serviced regularly.
Service products and capacities
Rat
very low outside temperatures
urban traffic
Ron short journeys
Rin mountainous terrain
Rin
i Only for certain countries: you can find
the current consumption and emission
values of your vehicle in the COC documents (EU CERTIFICATE OF CONFORMITY).
These documents are delivered with your
vehicle.
The consumption figures were in each
case based on the currently applicable
version:
Rfor vehicles that comply with or exceed
the EURO 5 standard, in accordance
with Regulation (EC) No. 715/2007
Deviations from these values may occur
under normal operating conditions.
Engine oil
General notes
When handling engine oil, observe the
important safety notes on service products
(Y page 260).
The quality of the engine oil is decisive
for the function and service life of an
engine. After extensive tests, MercedesBenz approves engine oils that correspond
to the current technical standard. Therefore, only use engine oils approved by
Mercedes-Benz.
Further information on tested and
approved engine oils can be obtained from
any smart centre. smart recommends that
you have the oil change carried out at a
qualified specialist workshop.
Mercedes-Benz approval is indicated on
the oil container by the inscription "MB
Approval" and the corresponding designation, e.g. MB Approval 229.51.
You can call up an overview of approved
engine oils on the Internet at
http://bevo.mercedes-benz.com by entering the designation, e.g. 229.5.
The table shows which engine oils have
been approved for your vehicle.
Petrol engines: in certain countries, different engine oils can be used, provided
that the maintenance intervals are
reduced. For more information, please
contact a qualified specialist workshop.
Model
All models
MB Approval
229.5
i If the engine oils listed in the table
are not available, you may add the following engine oils until the next oil
change:
RMB
Approval 229.1 and 229.3 or ACEA A3
This must only be added once and the
amount must not be greater than 1.0 l.
Capacities
The following values refer to an oil change
including the oil filter.
Model
All models
Replacement
amount
3.4 l
Additives
! Do not use any additives with the engine
oil. This could damage the engine.
Z
>> Technical data.
The vehicle will use more fuel than usual in
the following situations:
263
264
Service products and capacities
Engine oil viscosity
the replacement confirmed in the Service Booklet.
Coolant
General notes
>> Technical data.
! Only add coolant that has been premixed
Viscosity describes the flow characteristics of a fluid. If an engine oil has a high
viscosity rating, it flows slowly; the lower
the viscosity, the faster it flows.
Engine oil selection is based on the
respective outside temperatures and in
accordance with the SAE classification
(viscosity). The table shows you which SAE
classifications are to be used. The lowtemperature properties of engine oils can
be significantly impaired during operation due to, for example, ageing or soot and
fuel accretion. It is therefore strongly
recommended to observe regular oil
changes using an approved engine oil with
the appropriate SAE classification.
Brake fluid
When handling brake fluid, observe the
important safety notes on service products
(Y page 260).
The brake fluid change intervals can be
found in the Service Booklet.
Only use brake fluid approved by
Mercedes-Benz according to MB Approval
331.0.
Information about approved brake fluid
can be obtained at any qualified specialist workshop or on the Internet at:
http://bevo.mercedes-benz.com.
i Have the brake fluid regularly replaced
at a qualified specialist workshop and
with the desired antifreeze protection.
You could otherwise damage the engine.
Further information on coolants can be
found in the Mercedes-Benz Specifications for Service Products, MB Specifications for Service Products 310.1, e.g.
on the Internet at
http://bevo.mercedes-benz.com. Or contact a qualified specialist workshop.
! Always use a suitable coolant mixture,
even in countries where high temperatures prevail.
Otherwise, the engine cooling system is
not sufficiently protected from corrosion and overheating.
i Have the coolant regularly replaced at a
qualified specialist workshop and the
replacement confirmed in the Service
Booklet.
Comply with the important safety precautions for service products when handling
coolant (Y page 260).
The coolant is a mixture of water and antifreeze/corrosion inhibitor. It performs
the following tasks:
Rcorrosion
protection
protection
Rraising the boiling point
If antifreeze/corrosion inhibitor is present in the correct concentration, the boiling point of the coolant during operation
will be approximately 130 †.
Rantifreeze
Vehicle data
Rbe
The correct mixing ratio can be taken
from the information on the antifreeze
protection container.
at least 50%. This will protect the
engine cooling system against freezing
down to approximately -37 †.
Rnot exceed 55% (antifreeze protection
down to -45 †). Heat will otherwise not be
dissipated as effectively.
smart recommends an antifreeze/corrosion
inhibitor concentrate in accordance with
MB Specifications for Service Products
310.1.
Please note that for the specified vehicle
data:
i When the vehicle is first delivered, it
Rthe
is filled with a coolant mixture that
ensures adequate antifreeze and corrosion protection.
i The coolant is checked at every maintenance interval at a qualified specialist workshop.
Windscreen washer system
General notes
! Do not use distilled or de-ionised
water in the washer fluid reservoir. Otherwise, the level sensor may be damaged.
! Only the washer fluids SummerFit and
WinterFit can be mixed. Otherwise, the
spraying nozzles could become blocked.
When handling washer fluid, observe the
important safety notes on service products
(Y page 260).
At temperatures above freezing:
X
i Add washer fluid concentrate, e.g. MB
SummerFit or MB WinterFit, to the washer
fluid all year round.
Vehicle data
General notes
heights specified may vary as a
result of:
- tyres
- load
- condition of the suspension
- optional equipment
Roptional equipment reduces the maximum payload.
Rvehicle-specific weight information
can be found on the vehicle identification plate (Y page 259).
Ronly for certain countries: you can find
vehicle-specific vehicle data in the COC
documents (EU CERTIFICATE OF CONFORMITY). These documents are delivered with your vehicle.
You can find the correct values for your
model with the help of the VIN on the vehicle identification plate (Y page 259).
Fill the washer fluid reservoir with a
mixture of water and washer fluid, e.g.
MB SummerFit.
Mix 1 part MB SummerFit to 100 parts water.
At temperatures below freezing:
X
Fill the washer fluid reservoir with a
mixture of water and washer fluid, e.g.
MB WinterFit.
Z
>> Technical data.
The antifreeze/corrosion inhibitor concentration in the engine cooling system
should:
265
266
Vehicle data
Dimensions and weights
Model
:
Opening
height
All models
1855 mm
>> Technical data.
All models
Vehicle length
2695 mm
Vehicle width
including exterior
mirrors
1893 mm
Vehicle width
excluding exterior
mirrors
1663 mm
Vehicle height
1555 mm
Wheelbase
1873 mm
Maximum boot load
75 kg
Maximum tailgate
load
100 kg
267
268
Publication details
Internet
Further information about smart vehicles
and about Daimler AG can be found on the
following websites:
http://www.smart.com
http://www.daimler.com
Editorial office
You are welcome to forward any queries or
suggestions you may have regarding this
Owner's Manual to the technical documentation team at the following address:
Daimler AG, HPC: CAC, Customer Service,
70546 Stuttgart, Germany
©Daimler AG: not to be reprinted, translated or otherwise reproduced, in whole or in
part, without written permission from
Daimler AG.
Vehicle manufacturer
Daimler AG
Mercedesstraße 137
70327 Stuttgart
Germany
As at 05.09.2014
www.smart.com
smart - A Daimler brand
4535847902
É4535847902ÄËÍ
Order no. 6522 0126 02
Part no. 453 584 79 02
Edition NA 2014-11d
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertising